Home

SendSuite® Shipping - Pitney Bowes User Forum

1. Name DataControli 30 Connec tionTimeout 15 CursorLocation 2 ddADOUseServer General CursorType 0 ddADOOpenForwardOnly DataSourceName Provider y DefaultDatabase IsolationLevel DataSourceName v left i UserlD LockType 1 MaxRows 0 Password ConnectionString Build Provider Source SQL Source top 720 OK E Apply A cee ee 4 Define the database connection using one of the following methods L Complete the following fields in the Property Toolbox or Properties dialog box E DataSourceName You will see a list of the available DSNs on your system Use ppSQLData to connect to the SendSuite database E Default Database lf you used the ppSQLData DSN the you do not need to specify the database since the default database is built into the DSN The SendSuite database is ConquestDB SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 4 15 4 Reports Creating Custom Reports for the Shipping Workstation Creating a New Thin Client Report NOTE Unlike reports that are run from the Admin Workstation you may use any table or view for the Thin Client report data You may join tables together or you can create your own views for data 4 16 E UserlD ConquestUser is the user ID that connects to the SendSuite SQL data E Password The password for ConquestUser is transcape
2. Save Delete Close 16 Select Use Detailed FAK to specify a FAK Class for different freight classes a Inthe Freight Class column select each freight class included in the agreement b Inthe FAK Class column select the class at which the freight will be rated 17 To select a global FAK select a freight class from the FAK drop down list 18 Click Save then click Close on the FAK Parameter window 19 Click Save then click Close on the Discount Lanes window 20 Click in the next line down and repeat step 11 through step 19 for each additional FAK lane SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 6 31 6 Tariffs Tariff Absolute To define the minimum rate that an LTL carrier will accept Minimums 1 Open the Supporting Data module from the Control Center 2 Double click the Carrier amp Labels folder 3 Double click the Rates folder NOTE If you want to 4 Double click Carrier Setup se an existing file a ae the pi 5 Click in the line that has the tariff you want to discount arrow and select the 6 Click the Details button file ID Likewise once ae f l you set up the following 7 Click in the Absolute Min Lanes ID field and type a unique ID for the minimums you can use discount file them for other carriers 8 Click Save just by selecting this l Absolute Min Lanes ID 9 Click Close 10 Click the Absolute Minimums tab 11 Click the Details button A Absolute Minimum
3. Type ZERO in the Carrier ID field Set the effective date to the first day of the year i e 01 01 06 Type ZERO in the SCAC field Select LTL from the Service drop down menu Select the Zero Tariff ID from the Tariff ID drop down menu Click Close SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 6 Tariffs Zero Rate Carrier Creating an Address Record 6 56 To create an address record 1 Open Data gt Address 2 Create a new address record Type ZERO in the Address ID field EA Address x Address 1D ZERO _ ae _ a s Logo Address Detail Detail Message Signature Name Zero Rate Carrier at gt Camer Bill To Intermediate Title Consigr r Remit To r Govi Agency C Shipper T Dist Center r Trading Parner r Ship For r Agent T Hold At Location r Manufacturer C Haz Attention C Broker r Sold To r Seller Benef C Alt Retum Addr State Country us Perm Temp Permanent International No gt Pay Term Carrier Accounts Delete Close Type Zero Rate Carrier in the Name field Under Address Types select Carrier Leave the other options unselected Select ZERO from the SCAC drop down menu Save and close the address record O You can now select the Zero Rate carrier on the shipping screen for LTL shipments By selecting the Zero Rate carrier you will record the shipments for logging purposes
4. NOTE The Manifest Setup is configured during carrier installation Supporting Data 2 Manifest Setup A Manifest Setup Mm E l0 X Shipper ID PB y Carrier ID USPS y Configuration Manifest Numbers USPS Post DBMC 480 X Permit City DBMC Permit State mi y M Print Detail Form 3877 BMC Detroit MI 48399 Delivery Confirmation Post Master Shipper ID Local Postal Code Po Save Delete Close Use this feature to make required settings for carrier manifests You can make different settings for each shipper Airborne Commission Airborne Commission x Commission lype FIP C Activator EMail Address x PB COM User ID x User Password a IP Address 208 817434 0 Save Close Obsolete Airborne services have been replaced by DHL SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 2 41 2 Supporting Data Additional Supporting Data Carrier amp Labels NOTE UPS Communication is configured during carrier installation 2 42 Configure StreetSmart Data StreetSmart Address Verification data is installed using the Address Verification install CD See SV7S9128 for more information Use this screen to notify the SendSuite Shipping administrator before the Address Verification data expires i Configure StreetSmart Data Ioj x The following email addresses will be notited when the address verfication data is about to expire Email
5. cccccssssccssseseesesnesseseens 6 41 Creating Me VB SCH Geren cose ae 6 47 Modifying the SUb evenk a e a E 6 49 Associating the VB Script with a Shipping Screen 6 49 Adding Fields to the Shipping Screen 6 50 Processing a Shipment Using Manual Rates 6 51 Administrator Guide x Table of Contents A UNO A ee a ao ee 6 52 Creating Me SCACCO a ee race tena eee 6 52 GreANIO NIC AUN oe are ee E er ae eee ene nears 6 52 Sewing Ute Tah rada Mo eee eee 6 52 Setting the Zone Details cccococoncnccccononococononnnss 6 53 Setting the Class Rates aa seee r 6 54 Conor mI Tecaro cl E A 6 55 Creating an Address Record oocccccccoccccccccocconccnonnnnnnss 6 56 7 Labels MO O A eee eee ete ona 7 2 ADCS OT era ear ree ee ee ere eae ee ere eee 7 2 SCICCINIG ele OCI acess Stet see aa eee te eee E on 7 5 RUN MO A A dese Naren ose nee 7 6 EA S eee ee ere E ee nae eee a 7 7 Setting the Windows FONT SIZC ccccccssseeeeeeneseereanees 7 7 Graphic Label File INfOrMAtION ococccccccocnnoncooonononoo 7 8 8 Integration Data IVI ADDON Pr E a cesta vans renew eiian manne erie siace 8 3 A O amen 8 3 Cenas UCI Sa as aia atada 8 3 Data Map SEUNG sc ma O ae o a 8 4 CONS ata E E T 8 4 O o A ard E 8 6 Host File O O 8 7 SendSuite Table Properties InN ooccocoocococ o 8 10 A acre en rere ee eee eee 8 11 UE o A eee en cr 8 13 MAP OIG HINCURICICS 22 ae eaen
6. JN Carrier p E Weight Address Service i Weight Unit ity E SA Carrier M Service M i patas Pkg Type M pas Ese Carrier Del Dt Pieces ma 3 iia Date hE COD aa a Declared O SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 3 23 3 Shipping Shipping Screens Configuring the Appearance of the Shipping Screen NOTE Internet Explorer uses the following letters as hot keys on their menu F E V A T H If you assign one of these letters as a hot key for the SendSuite Shipping screen your hot key takes precedence over the Internet Explorer menu 3 24 Changing the Field Labels You can change the name of a field You may want to do this so the user can easily relate to the data For example SendSuite Shipping uses the Bill Number to keep track of the shipment If the user is scanning an Invoice Number that becomes the Bill Number then you can change the name of that field on the screen to read Invoice Number Although you can change the field label you are not actually changing the field name on the database table In the example above the screen will display Invoice Number but that information will be saved in the tbIShipmentHeader BillNr field Also if you use the Search feature on the shipping screen the drop down will still show Bill No Search Search By Creating Hot Keys You can create hot keys for quick navigat
7. Run as PENja0t 4da Set password Run only if logged on Jv Enabled scheduled task runs at specified time coca som 18 If you need the task to run more than once per day click the Schedule tab a Click Advanced Advanced Schedule Options Start Date Thursday October 26 2006 v End Date E owon fT o Ifthe task is still running stop it atthis time b Select Repeat Task c Set the frequency of repetition For example every 10 minutes SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Tools 5 Task Scheduler d Set the duration of repetition or indicate a stop time by selecting the Until option button e Click OK Running Tasks 19 Click OK From Windows 20 Type and confirm the password and click OK Task Scheduler Set Account Information x Run s Password AAA Confirm password Testing the Task To test the task 1 Right click on the task you just created and select Run 2 Check the Status column to verify that it displays as Running 3 After the task completes click the Last Run Time and Status columns If the Status column displays Could not start the task failed Open the properties of the task and the properties of the task group to determine what might have caused the task to fail See the Notes below for additional tips NOTES The Windows Task Scheduler can run tasks concurrently
8. ODBC To set up a new ODBC map open the Integration module from the Control Integration SEMIEN IN SendSuite When you select File gt New and select ODBC Data Exchange the ODBC Data Shipping Exchange Properties window will open ODBC Data Exchange Properties j Description PO Creating a New on Cancel ODBC Map e In SOL Select C Out SOL Insert or Update C Out SOL Inser C Out SOL Update Help ODEC Data Source Name DSN User Password C M Use Cursor Library Database Properties Escape Clause Character Literal Prefix Date Literal Prefix Driver Values Character Literal Suffix Date Literal Suffix String used to specify Table Alias las Connection String Select Statement Strings After SELECT After FROM table_list Host Date and Time Format This map will be used for z Ey Shipment Processing Description required Type a description of the data exchange in this field Data Direction Select the direction and behavior of the data exchange e In SQL Select This will bring information into SendSuite e Out SQL Insert or Update This will send information back to the host database You can either add new records to the host database or you can change existing records e Out SQL Insert This will send information back to the host database but it will only insert new records it will not update existing records in the h
9. C Canada ZIP to Zone C Distance Save Delete Close 3 Type the carrier s SCAC code in the SCAC field and press Tab 4 Create a unique Tariff Revision ID and type it in the Tariff Revision field and press Tab When you press Tab SendSuite Shipping automatically fills in the Tariff ID Select or type LTL in the Service field and press Tab 6 Optional Type a description of the service in the Service Desc field SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 6 13 6 Tariffs Creating a Custom LTL Tariff from Scratch Tariff Setup NOTE You must type the date as MM DD YY NOTE Pitney Bowes recommends that if you are creating a new Lane to Zone ID that you base the name on the SCAC and the service For example Joe s Delivery s Lane to Zone ID might be JOESLTL 6 14 Type the date the tariff took effect in the Eff Date field Click in the circle to the left of Class Rates table Click in the circle to the left of Lane to Zone Select or type a Lane to Zone ID e Ifthe carrier bases its rates on the same lane to zone that another carrier uses then you can select the other carrier s Lane to Zone ID from the drop down list e Ifthe carrier bases its rates on a lane to zone that is not already loaded into SendSuite then you must create a new Lane to Zone ID and type it in the Lane to Zone ID field 11 Click Save then click Close Zone RBN Tab You establish all of the zon
10. Ends the script at this line SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Integration 8 lf the result of the comparison is TRUE then the script proceeds to the next line If it is FALSE then it skips one line If you need to run a series of commands for a TRUE statement then your next line will be JUMP pointing to a sub script Message Box Creates a message box during run time Can be used after a comparison test to skip IS records Can be used in the middle of script to stop the script before it hits a sub script Link Table es EE Abort Execution Stops the data mapper AN 8 59 8 Integration Conditional To write a new script open the Integration module from the SendSuite Control Logic Scripting Center on the administrative workstation Click the New button and select Script PB TMS Integration Untitled VBS 10 x Fie View Operations Window Hep 15 x VBScript bara a mal gt a som GW 2 gt 21 8 TT 7 Jescnpbon T ota Conditional Logic q is map will be used for E billou Properties colilla DG biPMaipackToti 4 ED thiPvutPackTotal i FS thiSheomentH E tbiShipme TB tbiStop E vAliShippr E v8illTo TB vCarier ES vConsigne ES vShipFor FR vShipper gt Ready NUM Description Type a description of the script you are writing This map will be used for Click the drop down and select the use for this script Your selec
11. SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Creating a Custom Parcel Tariff from Scratch Tariff Setup NOTE Flat charges only go up to 200 lbs Use a Weight Rate see next page for carriers that ship parcels weighing more than 200 lb Weight Rates should also be used if the rate is based upon weight breaks NOTE You must enter a rate for every line item that is within the carrier s weight limit Tariffs 6 Rates Tab You must create rates that support every Zone RBN that you created while in the Zone RBN tab You can make individual rates for each Zone RBN or you can create a rate that applies to a range of Zones RBNs with numeric values You just must be certain that every Zone RBN has a rate that supports it In the Tariff Setup window 1 Click the Rates tab 2 Click in the New Record line 3 Click the Details button 4 Type the same zone number that you created in the Zone RBN tab in the Zone field Type the maximum weight that this tariff supports in the Max Tariff Wat field Select the appropriate weight unit in the Wat Break Unit field and press Tab 7 Enter the rates using one of the methods listed below e Flat charges e Weight rates Flat Charges Flat charges allow you to assign a separate rate per pound To create flat charges 1 Click the Flat Charges tab Header SCAC ESTM Tariff Revision ESTMO1 i ts Service Eff Date 1 1 2005 Detail
12. 1 2 3 4 i From the Control Center select the Reports module From the Custom menu select Import Crystal Report to ActiveReport Click Next Click the ellipsis ES and then locate the directory where your Crystal report is saved Click Next In the list of reports find your report and click in the selection box next to it la Convert Crystal Reports to ActiveReports Crystal Reports to ActiveReports 2 0 Select the reports that you want to convert ShipmentLoad rpt ShipmentZone rpt SLI rpt StatusList rpt StatueListD etal rpt SurmarnReport rot 5406 rp Tre rpt User rpt W Folder Reports OQODdODOoO bz rpl WICSBOL rpt VICSUnderlwingBOL rpt Voided rpt WeightCarrer rpt Weaighthevenue rt zCrystal rpt Lrystalample rpt Cancel Back Next gt Options Ooo LILI Finish Click Next On the Options screen in the Wizard select the path where the new ActiveReport will be located The standard path for these is C Program FilesipbTranscapelConquestirpx SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Reports 4 Creating 9 Make sure that the Place Multiple Sections To Frames checkbox is Custom unselected Re po rt S fo r l Convert Crystal Reports to ActiveReports the Shipping Workstation Reports Path C Program FilesiPBTranscaperConquestipa Es Creating a New Thin C
13. 10 Click the drop down arrow in the Sort by field 11 Select the field you wish to have SendSuite Shipping use to sort the records it finds 12 If you want SendSuite Shipping to display the records in descending order select the checkbox to the left of Descending A Query Database E o x Select table tbIShipmentHeader l Select an Existing Criterion m New Criterion Check fields to show Field Operator Value Logic Operator BillNr BillNr gt y 110000 AND y ActualDelDate ActualShipDate BillNr k y 50000 AND y AdditionalHandling ScheduledShipDate 7 ScheduledShipDate y 2 15 05 AESFilingStatus ES l AESXTNNumber Sort by ScheduledShipDate y Y Descending Clear Delete Save as M Descending Check All Uncheck All BillNr ScheduledShipDate 15 2 2005 3 8 2005 12 18 2005 2 18 2005 12 16 2005 J 5 records found Sum Field Sum Close 13 If you want SendSuite Shipping to save the query criterion you just defined click the Save as button 14 Click the View button SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 5 19 5 Tools Task Scheduler NOTE Although multiple task schedules can be setup only one task schedule can run at any given time throughout the enterprise Available Tasks 5 20 The Task Scheduler is a SendSuite Shipping feature that will perform a recu
14. Account ID Finance Carrier Service Pieces Pieces FEDX GRD 1 100 00 FM 1 Shipper Totals PB 37 Grand Totals 37 sub Account Minnesota SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Sub Sub Account Avg Cost 7 690 26 660 17 175 Sub Sub Account Avg Cost 5 370 5 370 59 767 59 767 PAGE 1 of Report Date 12 05 2006 08 58 AM sub Sub Account Avg Cost Total Cost 11 588 46 350 4 243 106 070 73 630 73 630 23 900 95 600 9 460 321 650 Development Total Cost 7 690 26 660 34 350 Total Cost 5 370 59 370 361 370 361 370 Tools Configuring Groups and USETS A Ar ao a a e eS 5 2 Seting U0 Groups L A r a ee eee 5 2 Seling DUO US Er E eA ae eee eee 5 4 Setting the User s Defaults oooococcccconcconocconconoonononnos 5 5 Editing the User Properties and Permissions 5 5 User Data VISIDINIY ti Ai etek 5 6 AICCOUNN VISIDINU acne meee coco aa aes 5 7 Adding a User tO A Groun aeaa aa a a E aa 5 8 Assigning Individual User RIghtS oooocooonco o 5 9 Security PerMiSSiONS aa e a a 5 14 Administrative Workstation Permissions 5 14 MASON o hare E eae 5 15 Importing Into SendSuite AE a a a 5 15 MPO SS CUS E e a E a a e a E al voy 5 15 Simple Database Queries An a n a a a 5 17 Tools Module Simple QUEI DE a e a a 5 17 Advanced Database QUerl8S oooonncccccccoconocinnocononononncinonos 5 19 Tools Mod
15. Click Management to expand the folder G pi ge ee ly Right click Database Maintenance Plans and select New Maintenance Plan From the Welcome to the Database Maintenance Plan Wizard click Next 8 To backup all the databases click the All user databases option button and click Next Database Maintenance Plan Wizard local select Databases select the databases for which to create the maintenance plan CAlldatabases CO All system databases master model and msdb ConquestDB O ConquestPPD O G5A O master SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 1 9 1 SendSuite Shipping Server SendSuite Database Maintenance Creating a Database Maintenance Plan NOTE When viewing the Maintenance Plan History you may see Not Completed for da tabases that have had no modifications For example Model Alternatively select the individual databases to be backed up and click Next e Master e Model e MSDB 9 From the Update Data Optimization Information dialog box leave the default settings selected Do not make any changes to the options on this dialog box 10 Accept the default selection of Change free space per page percentage to 11 If necessary click Change and modify when the activity is to occur The default is every Sunday at 1 00 AM Database Maintenance Plan Wizard local E a E x Update Data Optimization Information E 4s data and index
16. El 16 Select a tape drive from the drop down menu NW Alternatively you can save to your local hard drive by selecting Disk 17 If necessary click Change and modify the schedule The default is every Sunday at 2 00 AM once the database optimization and integrity checks have been completed 18 Click Next 19 From the Specify Backup Disk Directory select Use this directory SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 1 SendSuite Shipping Server SendSuite 20 Click the ellipsis to navigate to another local drive or tape backup device Data base Database Maintenance Plan Wizard local Mal ntenance Specify Backup Disk Directory Specify the directory in which to store the backup file Creating a Database Directory in which to store the backup file Maintenance Plan C Use the default backup directory Create a subdirectory for each database Backup file extension 21 Select Remove files older than and change to the number of weeks you want to keep these backups 22 Click Next 23 From the Specify the Transaction Log Backup Plan dialog box select Back up the transaction log as part of the maintenance plan and Verify the integrity of the backup when complete Database Maintenance Plan Wizard local Specify the Transaction Log Backup Plan specify the transaction log backup plan to prevent failures and operator errors Location to store the backup f
17. Open the Supporting Data Module from the Control Center Deleting a Shipper Alert N Click the drop down arrow in the Address ID field and select the consignee Click the Message tab e w Click the Clear Message Alert button Address ID 11100098 Message Message Alert Setup Process Status Allow process to continue C Do NOT allow process to continue Message Alert Text Text that appears on the shipping screen 5 Click Save SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 2 15 2 Supporting Data Shipper Handling Fees NOTE When you process shipments the handling charge displays in the Shipper Costs field of the Freight Costs tab 2 16 Handling charges are referred to as shipper charges Handling charges can be set up to be applied globally or can be set up to specific consignees There are many ways a shipper may want to apply a handling fee For example e lf the carrier is ABC and the service is GRD apply a 5 handling fee to the gross freight charge e If the carrier is ABC and the service is NAM apply a 10 handling fee to the net freight charge e Ifthe commodity 123 is ordered and the dollar amount of the order is less than 100 apply a 5 handling fee e Ifthe commodity 123 is ordered and the dollar amount of the order is between 100 and 500 apply a 10 handling fee To set up a handling fee 1 Click Setup gt Data gt Shipper Han
18. PitneyBowes SendSuite Shipping SendSuite Shipping Solutions for Desktop Shipping Administrator Guide U S English Edition Pitney Bowes in its continuing product improvement program has made every reasonable effort to eliminate errors from its manuals and software products As always our aims are quality reliability and ease of operation However Pitney Bowes assumes no liability for any such errors misuse or misapplication of its operating manuals and products This manual may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the express written consent of Pitney Bowes Inc These materials and the related software are confidential and proprietary property of Pitney Bowes Inc and may not be lent sold hired out or made available to others in any form or be disposed of by way of trade in any form without the express written consent of Pitney Bowes Inc The data used in the screen examples in this manual are fictitious unless otherwise noted and are designed solely to document proper use of the software This document SVTS9117 Rev J defines many of the features in SendSuite Shipping version 6 50 SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide SVTS9117 Rev J December 2010 Copyright Notice 2010 Pitney Bowes Inc All Rights Reserved Pitney Bowes Inc One Elmcroft Road Stamford Connecticut 06926 0700 SendSuite Shipping contains barcode components licensed from IDAutomation com Inc These products may only be used a
19. Totals 4 Type a description of the report in the Description field optional To modify the report data 1 Click the Data tab in the Custom Report Interface window Report Fields 1 2 Bill f General Data Voided Shipments Fields Label DataField Totals BillNr Consignee ConsName Chrg Terms ChargeTerms Carrier CarrierName Service Service Pro Number ProNumber Pieces TotalShipPieces Weight TotalActualVeight Zone ZoneRBN Total Cost TotalFreight SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Creating Custom Reports Modifying the Report Data Reports 4 lf you want to change the order of the data on the report a Highlight the text in the Label column and press Delete b Type anew label in the empty field c Select the data you want to appear on the report from the drop down in the Data Field column d Repeat Step a through Step c for every column you want to change If you want to delete data from the report a Highlight the text in the Data Field column b Press the Delete key on your keyboard c Highlight the text in the Label column d Press the Delete key on your keyboard If you want a column to combine data for example calculate the difference between the Gross Charges and Total Shipper Costs a Select the Complex data fields box b Click anywhere in the
20. Type Manual Carrier in the Carrier Name field Click Save and then click Close O M 2 pi Close the Carrier amp Labels folder SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 6 41 6 Tariffs Manual Rating 9 Open the Data folder 10 Open the Address table 11 Click the blank button to make a new record ol Creating the g A Address of xj Manual Carrier IMAN o o Signature Logo Address 2 Attention enone T Bill To l Intermediate Attn Title onsignee RemitTo l Gov t Agency PAPER Shipper l Dist Center l Trading Partner l Ship For l Agent l Hold At Location Address2 l Manufacturer Haz Attention Broker l Sold To l Seller Benef l Alt Return Addr Address3 Zip AltZipCode City A State y Country US Perm Temp Py County PO Phone Et 0 Ea Ext Express Carrier l International Pay Term Carrier Accounts sme Deiere close 12 Type MAN in the Address ID field 13 Type Manual Carrier in the Name field 14 Select Carrier under Address Types 15 Type MAN in the SCAC Code field on the Carrier tab 16 Click Save and then click Close 17 Close the Data folder 18 Open the Rates folder 19 Open the Tariff Setup table 6 42 SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Tariffs 6 Manual Rating 20 Scroll to the bottom of the list of tariffs Click anywhere in the last empty line
21. which is marked with a in the far left gray column loj x Tariff Header Creating the sao Ef Dae Senie Senice Description Pkg Type Tart Revision Tertio Manual Carrier Z 6 30 2002 Parcel Select DBMC USPSD0206 6 30 2002 Parcel Post Inter BMC TUSPS40206 6 30 2002 Parcel Post Intra BMC USPSI0206 6 30 2002 Parcel Post Intra BMC Local TUSPSLO206 6 30 2002 Global Priority Mail USPSIGPMO02C 6 30 2002 Int l Airmail Parcel Post SP lUSPSIPA0206 6 30 2002 Int l Economy Parcel Post SP USPSIPS0206 6 30 2002 Library USPS4LI0206 6730 2002 Media Mail Level A 5 Digit USPS48A0206 6 30 2002 Media Mail Level B BMC USP3458B0206 6 30 2002 Media Mail Not Presorted USPS4SP0206 8 1 2001 Domestic LTL WWAT101002 8 1 2001 Domestic LTL YF5000108 21 Click the Details button et Tariff Details Package Desc Rate Data Source e Dilla y LI LZ C AIRB HWT heavyweight tre ff C Binary package Z tariffs C Distance Rates table C FedEx On Site Server C CZAR C UPS CWT hundredweight C Emery Rates Server C CZAR Lite C FEDX HYT hundredweight C AIRB Ground CWT C Package Rates Table C RPS MWT multiweight CSI Rates Server Zone RBN Data Source C Zone RBN built into tariff ZIP to Zone ZIP to Zone ID Zone index C Canada ZIP to Zone Distance om Gn 22 Type MAN in the SCAC fie
22. C Lane to Zone binary file File name C CWT MWT binary data C Canada ZIP to Zone C Distance Save Delete Close Type the carrier s SCAC code in the SCAC field and press Tab Create a unique Tariff Revision ID and type it in the Tariff Revision field and press Tab When you press Tab SendSuite Shipping automatically fills in the Tariff ID Select or type the appropriate level of service for this tariff in the Service field and press Tab Optional Type a description of the service in the Service Desc field SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Tariffs 6 Creating a 7 Type the date the tariff took effect in the Eff Date field Custom Parcel 8 Optional Click the binoculars button and select the package type that this Tariff from tariff supports Scratch 9 Select Package Rates Table Package rates are used to create parcel tariffs that rate based upon a weight applied to each package 10 Select Lane to Zone Tariff Setup 11 Select or type a Lane to Zone ID NOTE You must type e lf the carrier bases its rates on the same lane to zone that another carrier the date as MM DD YY uses then you can select the other carrier s Lane to Zone ID from the drop down list e If the carrier bases its rates on a lane to zone that is not already loaded into SendSuite then you must create a new Lane to Zone ID and type it in the Lane to Zone ID field NOTE Pitney Bowes recommends that if you ar
23. C Use the default backup directory Backup file extension TRA Ex Cancel Help SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 1 17 SendSuite Database Maintenance Creating a Database Maintenance Plan 29 Select Remove files older than and change to the number of days you want to keep the backups 30 Click Next 31 From the Reports to Generate dialog box deselect all options and click Next Database Maintenance Plan Wizard local x Reports to Generate Specify the directory in which to store the reports generated by the maintenance plan e H Ween I M Send email reporto operator ES E SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide SendSuite Database Maintenance Creating a Database Maintenance Plan NOTE It is highly recommended that the backup files be saved or transferred to other locations such as a ZIP disk or other removable storage media SendSuite Shipping Server 1 35 Accept the defaults on the Maintenance History dialog box and click Next 36 Enter a Plan name For example Conquest DB Database Maintenance Plan Wizard local Wizard Plan name Completing the Database Maintenance Plan ou have completed the steps to create a database maintenance plan The plan is described below Conquest DB DATABASES ConquestDB a SERVERS local OPTIMIZATIONS Occurs every 1 week s on Sunday at 1
24. Creating OS A ete oe eee oe 3 24 Setting Properties on the Screen Tab 3 25 O A a ines E 3 25 Setting Properties on the Defaults Tab 3 28 PROCESSING EVOM i cree ea a E E 3 29 SUD Event DESCTIPHONS I A e E E ee 3 31 Exporting and Importing Screens oooooocccccconnccnccnoononnoo 3 40 Exporting Shipping Screens oooccccccocccnconoocnononnanoos 3 40 Importing SHIPPING SCreenS oooccoccccoccccccnnancononnanos 3 41 Allowing User ACCESS tra ies Eo a re ee 3 42 SMC USE CCSS 3 43 REI EAN EC OMO E E eee eo ae 3 45 4 Reports Running SendSuite Shipping Reports occcococccccconcnccooo 4 2 Running a Report in SendSuite Shipping Format 4 2 Creating and Saving Report Filters ooomcocoooo 4 2 Creating Custom REDOrn S anden A 4 4 Selecting a Report to Modify are a a a E 4 4 Modifying the Report Dala o eere ee a E 4 4 Modifying Data GrOUPS ia 4 6 MONITO ACOSO eee 4 7 Saving a CUSION REDO se A E eee 4 7 Importing External RepO NS eienenn erini eaea 4 8 NEUE NAAA A E A 4 8 Current List of Tables and Views Supported 4 8 A ee a Orme cnn Vena eae nee 4 9 Exporting a Report from Crystal Reports 4 10 Importing the Report into SendSuite Shipping 4 10 SHAG te REDOT S e E ord sete E 4 10 Administrator Guide vii Table of Contents Creating Custom Reports for the Shipping Workstation 4 11 General Report Proce
25. EN E mail Homepage pO BankID y Bank ABA Bank Acct ooo OE DE ID 0 Zone o Reference PO Dock P00 6 From the Route ID drop down list select the ID for the routing instructions you want to assign 7 Click Save 2 24 SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Supporting Data 2 Routing Routing Priority must be configured for Route IDs to function properly The priority Instructions indicates which routing instruction will be applied if a conflict occurs for example if there is a Route ID for both the Consignee and the Shipper Setting Routing Instruction Priority To set routing instruction priority 1 Open the Supporting Data module from the Control Center 2 Select Route Priority from the Setup menu Prouteenory A 15 x Charge Terms 1st Priority 2nd Priority 3rd Priority 4th Priority 5th Priority PPD SME gt consignee fo J J PPA Consignee gt Shipper Af ff COL Consignee A lJ J iy i 3BD fBil To Jf TY Sesh A oo i oo i Save Close 3 For each of the Charge Terms indicate the order in which SendSuite Shipping should apply routing instructions For example prepaid packages may use the shipper as first priority and consignee second However collect shipments may use the consignee instructions first and shipper second 4 Click Save 5 Click Close Adding a Route You can add a lookup button on the shipping screen so the user
26. F th rderHdrAwtontlict C e oea a z thlOrderHeaderConflict E thiOrderHaadermnnflintRe g Check All Uncheck All OK Cancel 3 Check the tables you want to empty when you execute this feature 4 Click OK Empty Tables After you have defined what tables to empty follow these instructions to execute this feature 1 From the Control Center open the Tools module 2 From the Database menu select Empty Customer Data 3 Select Empty 4 PB SendSuite asks you if you are sure you want to do this Click Yes to empty the data SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Tools 5 User The User Authentication screens allows you to setup the authentication method Authentication when logging into the SendSuite Shipping thin client lo x Please select Authentication Method for Sendouite Application Website PE TESTOO1 eQuest T O Interactive Authentication Allow Password Resets Windows Authentication Mindows Auto Logon Single Sign on 3rd Party Additional setup information 31d party LiserlD Token Example AUTH_LISER M Use regular expression parsed on Hi PLE Regular Exp Example JAUTH Amta PDsla 2 42 098 425C 4U7HI Auto Create User Allow Create User Default User Group f Key Exchange FP Enervpt User 10 Save Delete Close There are five authentication methods in SendSuite Shipping O No Authentication Anyone who launches the thi
27. Integration 8 CustomerlD EmployeelD OrderDate RequiredDate ShippedDate ShipYia Freight ShipName ShipAddress ShipCity ShipRegion ShipPostalCode ShipCountry MM tbiShipmentHeader SOOSOSO SSO SOO SOO SOO SOOOOOS Actual Del Date D Actual Miles Actual Ship Date AdditionalHnding AESFilingStatus AESXTNNumber Agent ID Alt Charge Amt Alt Chrage Method Alternate Carrier ID Alternate Service AltRetunAddressiD AltShipperlD AOD Appointment Nr Appt Dellivery BOL Remarks BOL Amrks Cde BOLSent BOLStatus BookingNr BrokerlD To map the fields begin by expanding your host tables Then expand the Sendsuite table to which you will map the data Drag the host field and drop it onto the SendSuite field to map the data 8 31 8 Integration ODBC Integration in SendSuite Shipping Host Field Properties 8 32 If you need to make modifications to the host field properties right click the host field and select Edit ODBC Host Field Properties E Table Name libiShiomentHeade y Field Name EM Cancel Field Type varchar S a Help Field Width 2s Field Precision This field will be treated as free text Getting data IN Strip leading and trailing characters m Existing value for field C Keep existing value Append to existing value Replace existing value Field Name This field identifies the name of the host field Do not change this
28. L Complete the Connection String The Connection String contains all the data the object will need in order to connect to the database This includes the database name SQL user password The Properties Dialog Box has a tool to help you build a Connection String The string may look something like this Provider SQLOLEDB 1 Persist Security Info False User ID conquestuser Password transcape Initial Catalog ConquestDB Identify the data you will pull onto the report You may either use an SQL statement or you may call a stored procedure Write the statement in the Source field in either the Property Toolbox or Properties Dialog Box The statement you write here will only be used when viewing the report in the designer The actual query will be made by the VBScript that runs the report Ideally the two should be the same The SQL statement may look something like this select from vReportShipmentLoads A stored procedure call may look something like this csp_EQRptExportSLl 020719TS0204 Continue designing the report using the other tools see Toolbar Buttons elsewhere in this chapter SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Reports 4 Creating Headers and Footers Custom Every report has a page header by default Any fields you place in this area will Reports for appear at the top of the every page of the report the Shipping If you want a different header on the first page of the report then
29. Order_Number ORDERS Invoice_Number Logic Operators f AND OR Add Delete Add Free Text Cancel Close Help e Free Text Using this type you are creating a manual script see Manually Writing a SQL Statement elsewhere in this chapter 8 36 SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide ODBC Integration in SendSuite Shipping Selection Criteria Integration 8 Manually Writing an SQL WHERE Clause Using Free Text There may be many reasons to use free text instead of the SendSuite tools For example if you want to select only the first few characters of a field you can place a left string command in this text box To manually write an SQL WHERE Clause using free text Click the Add Free Text button 1 tblShipmentHeader BillNr ORDERS Invoice_Numbed g B 4 Verify Conquest Fields Conquest Fields Host DSN Fields xx Cancel Help You can type the statement manually or you can use the buttons to select the fields If you type the statement manually make sure you use the SendSuite naming conventions see the example above Click OK when you have finished the statement Updating a WHERE Clause Use the WHERE free text field when a field you want to use in the selection criteria is not in the select statement To update a WHERE statement 1 2 3 4 Open the ODBC script From the Operations menu select Ed
30. This identifies the maximum number of characters that the SendsSuite Shipping database will accept for this field Field is Required If checked SendSuite Shipping will require a value for this field If no value is sent to SendSuite Shipping the system will return an error Roll Up Item This field applies when multiple line items are being sent to SendsSuite Shipping If checked SendSuite Shipping will summarize all the line items into a single line SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 8 17 8 Integration Data Mapper Mapping to tblintlLine 8 18 If you need to map date to tblIntlLine you must set up a separate Data Mapper for that data You must execute that Data Mapper separately from the Data Mapper bringing in the header information The following section explains how to set up and run this separate Data Mapper Considerations for Data on the Host File First for the purposes of international documentation you must first determine the contents of each box being shipped This data can then be imported via the data mapper and printed on any required documents The data mapper will create lines on tb intiLine based on the PackagelD field SendSuite automatically generates this number If you map to this field SendSuite will rewrite the field value For example if you have box numbers 235 236 and 237 on your host file and map these to tblintlLine PackagelD after the data mapper runs yo
31. You can select TODAY from the Default Group ID drop down This will create a new group using the current date and time For example if you select TODAY on July 14 2005 at 3 52 PM the SendSuite will create a group called 20050714 If you do not make a selection you will be prompted for a group again later If you did make a selection you will not be prompted twice SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Integration 8 Data Mapper 4 Make a selection about how SendSuite should log the data e Log errors This is the default and it will only write errors to the Running Data SendSuite activity log Mapper e Log errors and events This will write errors and events to the SendsSuite activity log e Print out log If you check this box the system will print the log once the data mapper has finished running 5 Run in attended mode Will display messages and Dialog Boxes This box is checked by default and it will display any error messages as the data mapper runs It also will display a summary when the data mapper is done If you remove the check then the data mapper runs unattended and it does not display a summary when complete When running in this mode it is a good idea to check the Print out log box Leave this unchecked to run maps from the Task Scheduler 6 Click OK SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 8 21 8 Integration Creating a DSN A data source is a flat fi
32. Zone CTONLY01 M Max Tariff WYgt 5000 Wgt Break LBS Rate Wgt Unit LBS Incremental Rate T EN Delete Line s Clear Save Delete Close 2 Type the appropriate dollar amount in the Charge column for the corresponding weight on each line item 3 Click Save then click Close 4 Complete all of the instructions in Carrier Setup elsewhere in this chapter SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 6 9 6 Tariffs Creating a Custom Parcel Tariff from Scratch Tariff Setup 6 10 Weight Rates Weight rates allow you to assign rates for a range of weights To create weight rates 1 Click the Weight Rates tab A Package Rates Details Header SCAC ESTM Tariff Revision ESTM01 i ts Service GRD Eff Date 1 2005 Detail Zone CTONLYO01 M Max Tariff Wgt 5000 Wgt Break LBS z Rate Y gt Unit LBS gt Incremental Rate Iv Delete Line s Clear Save Delete Close 2 Type the low weight for the first weight range on the first line item If the carrier charges a minimum charge then type that charge in the Min Charge field Type the full dollar amount but do not type the before the amount 4 Type the charge for that weight range in the Base Charge field Type the full dollar amount but do not type the before the amount 5 Populate the Rate field with the appropriat
33. actual new tariffs can be loaded e Service File Name This field is used to identify a data file used with the tariff This data file can contain supported postal codes country codes port codes etc 14 Click Save 15 Click Close To create the carrier address record il Open the Supporting Data module from the Control Center 2 Open the Data folder 3 Open the Address table 4 Click the Blank Current Form button on the horizontal toolbar a Address D WPXP la x ma aga r Signature Log Address Detail 1 Detail 2 Message Name Western Parcel Alias A Address Types Attention Carrier T Bill To l Intermediate Attn Tithe Consignea I Remit To FP Gov t Agency Shipper l Dist Center Trading Partner Address7 11234 Main Street Ship For l Agent F Hold At Location Address C Manufacturer E Haz Attention E Broker l Sold To FP SelleBenef C Alt Return Addr Address Zip pozio At ip Codes fC Carrier SCAC WPXP IATA International No Pay Term Consignee Shipper Ciy BEVERLY HILLS State CA Express Carrer l Country lus Perm Temp Permanent County AAA Phone A E Exi F Ext Carrer Accounts Save Delete Close 5 Type the carrier s SCAC code in the Address ID field 6 Type the carrier s name in the Name field 7 Check the Carrier box in the Address Types area of the window 8 Type or se
34. and without a user being logged into the system The user you supply for the task MUST be a member of the Administrators group and no other or some tasks in the group may not run SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 5 33 5 Tools Purging Database Records Purge Feature 5 34 You can permanently delete records from your database files by instructing SendsSuite to purge its records NOTE Once records have been purged they cannot be restored without restoring the entire database You can schedule a purge by using the Task Scheduler Use the purge feature to select the data that you want to delete from the database You will input criteria that will display specific records to delete To use the purge feature 1 From the Control Center open the Tools module 2 Select Purge Data from the Database menu PA purge pata AA 0 x rders Support Data Individual Tables Criterion Check fields to show Operator Value Logic Operator OrderNr Scheduled Ship Date y if y Account AESFilingStatus O AgentiD Order Number y AgreementNr AltShipperlD Sort by OrderNr Check All Uncheck All Preview Clear Delete Selected Delete All records found 3 Click one of the following tabs e Orders to delete orders e Shipments to delete shipments e Support Data to delete records from the Supporting Data Modul
35. e Sub Account e Sub Sub Account Type an appropriate account and description then click Save E l 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 for every account you wish to create Creating Account Sets 1 Open the SendSuite Shipping thin client and click Setup gt Data gt Account Sets Account Set 1D PB Account Set Description Pitney Bowes PBOS Account IC 6 MS P GMS Division Sub Account ID Cu st P Customer Service Department A 10 reos E Pitney Bowes Distribution Solutions Type a new Account Set ID and Description Use the lookup icons F to search for an Account ID optional Use the lookup icons to search for Sub Account and Sub Sub Account IDs 5 Click Save SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Supporting Data 2 Accounting If you configure Account Sets for accounting use the accounts can be validated Features per shipper ID This is configured on the Address record in the thin client To configure account validation 1 Open the SendSuite thin client and click Setup gt Data gt Address 2 Click the Shipper tab 3 Select an Account Validation Type from the drop down menu This field defaults to V Valid values include Account Validation V The Account Sub Account and Sub Sub Account selected must already exist as a valid relationship A blank in the account set ID field is valid X The Account Sub Account and Sub Sub Account selected must already exist as a valid re
36. eQuery Help Logout S ss E Bill Nr fi 0015 PackageGrpID Freight Consignee P Consignee Name Carrier You may change the logo as desired The new graphic you use must meet the following conditions e It must be a gif file e To look normal it must be in proportion with 180 by 44 pixels If you use a graphic of a different size it will be resized to fit into a 180x44 space For example a 360x88 file will shrink and fit in the space looking fairly normal However a 200x30 file will shrink one direction and stretch the other direction making it look too tall and slim To replace the Pitney Bowes graphic 1 Rename your logo and call it leftlogo gif or logoright gif NOTE Upon installation logoleft gif is the Pitney Bowes logo and there is no logoright gif Pitney Bowes recommends you use logoright gif for a customer s logo Copy your logo file and place it in the following directory Inetpub wwwroot eQuest Images If you are prompted to the existing gif file click Yes Users will see the graphic the next time they refresh their screens On the Shipping Workstation select the Tools menu Select Internet Options In the Temporary internet Files box click the Delete Files button Check the box to Delete all offline content Click OK to delete the temporary files Click OK to close the Internet Options window gt O29 209 sp SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide
37. etc 6 21 6 Tariffs Carrier Setup 22 To disable deficit weighting click the Def Rate CWT button Deficit Rate Hundred Weight i x Deficit Rate Number Deficit o Number Deficit Down o NOTE For some Weight Break Wgt Break Units carriers such as DHL Up Past Wot Break y Down Past WYgt y hazardous materials Hundred Weight J may also be referred 19 CWT Tieri CWT Wgt Breakt as dangerous goods CWT Tier2 CWT Wgt Break2 Def Wgt Def Wgt Break2 Airborne Per Shipment y NOTE If you do not Save Close enter this data in the Deficit Weight Hundred ns Te l Weight wind w a Type a 0 zero in the Number Deficit Up field SendSuite Shipping will b Type a 0 zero in the Number Deficit Down field always select the lowest rate regardless of the weight of the shipment 23 Click Save then click Close If you do not want SendSuite Shipping to automatically deficit down be sure to enter zeroes in the Number Deficit Up and Number Deficit Down fields c Click Save then click Close 6 22 SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Tariff Accessorials NOTE If you want to use an existing accessorial file click the drop down arrow and select the accessorial file ID Likewise once you set up the following accessorials you can use them for other carriers just by selecting this accessorial lane ID
38. information To restore the SQL database 1 Copy the backup file to the MSSQL Backup folder For example CA MSSQL7 Backup MyBackup bak 2 From the Windows Start menu click Programs gt Microsoft SQL Server gt Enterprise Manager Double click Microsoft SQL Servers Double click SQL Server Group Click the sign next to the Server Name and highlight the server name Click the sign next to the Databases folder Select ConquestDB So E SS From the Tools menu select Restore Database SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 1 23 1 SendSuite Shipping Server Restoring the SendSuite Database Restoring the SQL Database 1 24 9 Select From device Restore database General Options x Restore as database ConquestDB y Restore C Database Parameters Devices Select Devices View conte 115 Backup number Restore backup set Database complete Database differential Transaction log C File or filegroup C Read backup set information and add to backup history coca mp 10 Click the Select Devices button to specify the device and its path 11 From the Choose Restore Devices dialog box click Add 12 Select the Restore destination by clicking E to search for the file name 13 From the Backup Device Location dialog box enter the appropriate file name in the File name field and click OK For example My
39. on XML MAP vis Default Group ID X M L M a p Se tt n g S xML Shipmentin py No line item response mode Add only Header Record C Disregard Header Record C Add Detail Line to database table M Rollup Line Item by Commodity Code or by Product Skip record if record would be added to the conflict table Locked Record Behavior C Skip Record Wait E seconds carcel Hao Views From the drop down select the type of data you will bring into SendSuite The selection you make determines the database tables and fields you can map to Once you make a selection and close the setting window you cannot change your selection e XML Shipmentin This will allow you to map data to the following tables or views tolShipmentHeader vBillTo tblAddress vShipper tolAddress tolShipmentLine vConsignee tblAddress Pe e XML Shipmentin is the only view available for XML In maps Default Group ID Only enabled when XML Shipmentin is selected you can type or select a Group ID to which all shipments will be assigned SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 8 41 8 Integration XML In Integration XML Map Settings 8 42 No line item response mode If SendSuite is expecting a line item for each header your selection here will determine what the system should do if there is no line item e Add only Header Record This will add only the header record leaving a line blank
40. you can pad right so SendSuite actually sends back Dave000000 Type the character to use for padding in the Padding Character field SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Integration 8 Data Mapper To define the SendSuite Shipping field properties left click on the SendSuite field then right click on the field name Select Field Properties from the popup r menu SendSuite Shipping Field A x 7 File Edit Record Help Properties aj y al tala fon alaz 2 Table Name ftblShipmentHeader Field Type SQL_TIMESTAMP Field Name ScheduledShipDate Field Length po Default Label Bchid Ship Date Field is Required I Default Value TODAY Roll Up ltem I Translation Type y Table Name This identifies the SendSuite table that this is on Field Name This identified the field name on the SendSuite table Default Label This is the name of the field as it shows in the mapping tree Default Value If the value being transferred is NULL SendSuite Shipping will use the default value The data input must match the Field Type To use the current date type TODAY this must be in caps Translation Type If the host and SendSuite Shipping use different values then you can set up a translation Once the translation has been defined then you can select that translation from the drop down here Field Type This identifies the type of data expected by SendSuite Shipping Field Length
41. 02 Save Delete Close Use the Account Number table to set up account numbers that you can use to maintain orders and or shipping charges One may also obtain detailed or summary information by printing account reports This field corresponds to the Sub Sub Account in the thin client Currency Exchange at Currency Exchange Ae x Domestic Currency USD y Foreign Currency EUR Quote Date 07 10 05 Exchange Rate 11 25 Domestic Foreign Remit To User Save Delete Close Use the Currency Exchange table to maintain foreign currency exchange rates Currency rates are not entered for you You will need to enter the rates and keep them up to date if you want them to be useful for your international documents SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 2 33 2 Supporting Data Additional Department Supporting Efx Data Department 300 y Description Administration Data Record Date 05 03 00 Save Delete Close Use the Department table to maintain a list of your organization s departments for accounting purposes This field corresponds to the Sub Account in the thin client Distance Postal Code 06510 Country JUS gt Postal Code 101001 Country JUS gt Distance 73 Get Distance Save Delete Close The Distance table contains distance information for each set of origin and destination that your system has used to rate an LTL o
42. 1 From the Control Center open the Integration Module 2 From the File menu select New 3 Select ODBC Data Exchange and click OK ODBC Data Exchange Properties Detenpion i OK i Dais Diracion Cancel Pin 20l Selec C Oui SOlineertorWpiaie Out SOlinsed Osa SO Update Holp 006 Danin Sonica Mama Weer Paseo Find FF Use Cursor Libre Dalsbase Proparties Escape Clause Character Lions Protoc Daie Ladrel Profes DrvorValues Chancer Literal Sufie Chiaia Liora Suffer Tring used to spacity Table Alms las Comec on Sting Gear Sintement Stings Alter SELECT Aig PAGH tabip lint Hori Date end Time Eremal This map wall be used tor El Si gt 4 Enter a descriptive name for the ODBC Data Exchange Map 5 Click Find under ODBC Data Source Name Select Dala Source 7 x Fio Dista Sows Machine Dieta Source Diets Source Wema Access Hepors Shalem ARFEGGIO Semple Reports Sytem Dels source dor ARFEL EI Serpe babi AluscSiobAPRD Syvaliem CropialRie pora Sahe dBASE Pilea ar dBase Files Word heer DS Adeniti Slim MOS _Adarced_6u Syahem IMS asane Suatem J 4 A Machine Daia Source r specheio thes mechine and cannol be shared User dela sources we Epic in a wrer on this machine Sysiem dain sources con be used by l usos on tire machin ot by a piensa garant or Cancel Heig 6 From the Select Data Source dialog box click
43. 2 6 2 7 modifying 2 7 Custom Reports creating 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 7 for the shipping workstation 4 11 4 12 4 13 4 14 4 15 4 16 4 17 4 18 4 19 4 20 4 21 4 22 4 23 4 24 running the report 4 24 thin client report 4 12 4 13 4 14 4 15 4 16 4 17 4 18 4 19 4 20 4 21 4 22 defining data 4 15 grouping 4 18 headers and footers 4 17 scripting 4 20 summary fields 4 19 writing VBScript 4 23 4 24 D Database purging 5 34 5 35 5 36 Database Maintenance 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 1 11 1 12 1 13 1 14 1 15 1 16 1 1 19 1 20 1 21 1 22 backing up 1 8 1 9 1 10 1 11 1 12 1 13 1 14 1 15 1 16 1 17 1 18 1 19 1 20 database maintenance plan creating 1 8 1 9 1 10 1 11 1 12 1 13 1 14 1 15 1 16 1 17 1 18 1 19 1 20 editing 1 20 SendSuite database maintenance plan 1 13 system maintenance plan 1 9 viewing history 1 20 Database Queries advanced query 5 19 simple query 5 17 5 18 Data Mapper 8 3 8 4 8 5 8 6 8 7 8 8 8 9 8 10 8 11 8 12 8 13 8 14 8 15 8 16 8 17 8 18 8 19 8 20 8 21 host file properties 8 4 in settings 8 6 mapping fields 8 14 8 15 mapping to tblintlLine 8 18 8 19 out settings 8 11 running 8 20 8 21 settings 8 4 8 5 8 6 8 7 8 8 8 9 8 10 8 11 8 12 8 13 Data Visibility 5 6 Discounts tariff 6 26 6 27 DSN creating 8 22 8 23 8 24 8 25 verifying ODBC driver is installed 8 23 Dual Rating 2 21 E e Track data 3 2 tracking shipments 3 2 3 3 Exporting reports from
44. 3 Shipping International Document Field SendSuite Shipping Documents Source SED 26 Values IL SEDValue OR If no value is IL UnitPrice entered by the user IL ProductQuantity in SEDValue then the system creates a value based on the unit price and quantity 27 License No IL SEDLicense If there is more than one product then this code will print with the products in field 22 28 ECCN IL ECCN DI 29 Duly authorized officer none completed manually or employee none completed manually 31 Authentication none completed manually _ Date _____ SH ScheduledShipDate Telephone No vShipper ShipperPhoneNr 3 20 SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Shipping 3 Shipping While the SendSuite Shipping user interface opens in a web browser window it Screens is set up on the Administrative Workstation SendSuite Shipping has several pre loaded system templates These templates can be used as shipping screens or you can use them to create custom shipping screens Once you create a custom shipping screen you can modify it at any time on the Administrative Workstation The users will see the changes the next time they refresh the screen or click on the screen name After a screen has been configured it can be exported as a file and saved to a disk Screens that have been exported can easily be imported into the same system or on another system Creating a Custom To create a custo
45. 7 BillNr BillNr y 10079 y ActualDelDate N ActualShipDate y y AdditionalHandling O E rT AESFilingStatus AESXTNNumber Sort by M Descending E T Descending Clear Delete Save as Check All Uncheck All 7 View BillNr ScheduledShipDate 1 31 2005 erroneo renos gt records found Sum meia Sum Close If you are defining a new query criterion then a Click the drop down arrow in the Field field b Select a field you wish to look up c Click the drop down arrow in the Operator field d Select the appropriate operator e Type the value you wish to find in the Value field f Click the drop down arrow in the Sort by field g Select the field you wish to have SendSuite use to sort the records it finds h If you want SendSuite to display the records in descending order then select the checkbox to the left of Descending SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 5 17 5 Tools Simple Database Queries Tools Module Simple Query 5 18 j If you want SendSuite to save the query criterion you just defined then click the Save as button Save A Query Criterion l x Criterion Name fi 0000 lt BillNr lt H0000 Criterion and Order By BillNr gt 10000 AND BillNr lt 50000 Order by BillINr DESC z Save Cancel Click the View button 5 If you
46. Add a Task to Group Add a Task to the Group Select Task End of Day Carrier Communication Task Order Number fi Transmit data to the carrier Description ka Edit Add Close 3 Click the drop down arrow in the Select Task field to display the task drop down list Select the task you want to add to this group q A Type the task s sequence number in the Task Order Number field The sequence number specifies the order you want this task to occur in the task group Type a description of the task in the Description field Click Edit to complete the parameters for the specific task Click OK 9 Click Add to add the task to the list 10 If necessary repeat step 2 through step 9 to add more tasks to the task list o N o 11 Close the Available Task Groups window 5 24 SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Task Scheduler Schedule When Task Groups Will Run NOTE Make sure that the schedule does not conflict with any other process For example do not set the Task Scheduler to run when the database maintenance plan is running Tools 5 To schedule when task groups will run 1 Select Setup Schedulers from the TaskScheduler menu Scheduler Mame End of Day Scheduler Description Status Group Stet Re Stert FlFl FE FlFleFlole GiGo aG B G 0 0a1 6 Save Close Delete Selected Delete All Delete Scheduler Cancel 2 Click th
47. BE blShipmentHeader E blShipmentHeader 53 bIShipmentHeader PreSpecModeCode PreSpecService ChargeTerms Mode Code Service PPD Charge_Terms is blShipmentHeader eal blShipmentHeader EarliestShipDate LatestShipDate Earliest Shp Date g TODAY 1 Latest Ship Date tbiShipmentieader ble ft tbIShipmentHeader ipmentHeader Eg blShipmentHeader A ee ScheduledShipDate TODAY Ship Date 4 Yininianisaiaisalialalalalata SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 8 Save and close the shipping screen 7 Configure the events as necessary on the Events tab Shipping 3 Single Use You can adjust how users will look up certain information while using a Shipping Recipients clean To adjust the user look up options Field Edit Control l Pop 1 Open the Shipping Module from the Control Center 2 Click Setup gt Setup Field Edit Control Setup Field Edit Control x FieldID Edit Control CamerlD ID Charge Terms ID Cons State ID a Package Attribute ID ID Cancel 3 Adjust the lookup options for the following fields e CarrierlD This is the field the used to select a carrier for the shipment e ChargeTerms This is the field used to select the charge terms for the shipment such as Collect on Delivery e Cons State This field selects the recipient s state e Package Attribu
48. Click the Save button SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Supporting Data 2 Consignee Data 17 If this consignee has an account with a specific carrier then a Click the Carrier Accounts button Adding a b i Click the drop down arrow in the Payee ID field Consignee c Type the consignee s account number with that carrier in the Account Number field Carrier Accounts E x Address ID New Consignee PayeelD_ Account Number AccountType NOTE You must install E gt the carrier before set ting up its accounts See SV7TS9129 for more information on installing carriers Delete Close d Click the Save button e Click the blank record icon and repeat steps a through Step d to add any additional carrier accounts 18 Click the Save button in the Address window SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 2 5 2 Supporting Data Country Data NOTE You can over ride the number of cop les by printing the docu ments to the screen and changing the number of copies 2 6 The Country table contains all the known 2 character ISO country codes These codes link to all addresses used for shipping Most of this data is pre populated by Pitney Bowes and should not be modified You can make the following changes on the country table e You can identify which documents need to be printed for each country To do so type 1 in the field for the number
49. Country Data in Chapter 2 3 4 SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide International Documents Overview Shipping 3 Using these Instructions The pages that follow show a sample of each document Each sample document is meant to show where data appears they are not intended as an example of the type of data you should enter in a given field After each sample document is a table Each table lists the report fields and where SendSuite Shipping gets the data for each field You will see shorthand references to some tables e SH tblShipmentHeader e L tblLoad e IL tbllntlLine Single values Some document fields draw from several database fields checking each one until it finds a value For example you might see the following Document Field SendSuite Shipping Source 3 Transportation SH BookingNr Selects one Reference No L MasterTrackingNr L ProNumber SH PreSpecProNumber In this example SendSuite Shipping will look at the fields in descending order and it uses the first value it finds For example consider a shipment with the following values SendSuite Shipping Value Document Field Source SH BookingNr 12345 L MasterTrackingNr L ProNumber SH PreSpecProNumber The document will show the third value because it was the first field with a value The last database field is ignored SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 3 5 3 Shipping International Docume
50. Data Field column The Complex Data Field window appears Conquest Complex Data Field 3 o x CodAmount ProratedShipperCos Ok Cancel c Click the drop down in the left side of the Complex Data Field window and select the first field you want to use in your calculation Click the drop down in the center of the window and select or e Click the drop down in the right side of the window and select the second field you want to use in your calculation f Click OK SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 4 5 4 Reports Creating Custom Reports Modifying Data Groups 4 6 To modify data groups 1 NOTE Many SendSuite Shipping reports group data within the report so you can easily summarize data For example if the first grouping is by consignee SendSuite Shipping will total all the data for that customer If the second grouping is by shipped date SendSuite will break down each customer s data by date If a third grouping is selected for carrier SendSuite Shipping will total the carrier activity for a specific date by customer Grouping is optional If you wish you can delete the SendSuite groups by highlighting the text field and data field and pressing the Delete key on your keyboard Click the Totals tab in the Custom Report Interface window General Data Totals Select Values to Group Data By First SHIP DATE ScheduledShipDate S
51. E a a a a oa died da 2 29 Using the Accounting Fields o mecres eiin 2 29 Additional Supporting Dalta ooocccccoconcnnconocnonncnnonononnnos 2 30 SVLR COMMOURA OM A E oa ooo ae 2 30 AUO NOMOS a E IE a a ee eee 2 30 Privacy Statement and Legal Notice 2 31 PROXY S GIVET A a E E 2 31 Administrator Guide iv Table of Contents SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Workstation Configuration oooccccccccnncnococononnconononnnss 2 32 SS A ee eae enna eve 2 32 Ponpe SetU Soe essa aera ne ney etree odo 2 32 A A nes ter ad eae cee ce ern rest eae 2 33 O ae CUIENCVEXCIANGE tasca a E 2 33 DA E E rane 2 33 MIA seman tne A meters E las rule deance 2 34 PISANE Maa sara E Mem ae micas ied cue Sr me mana uirense 2 34 DIVISIO iar te era A A ere 2 35 O 2 35 EXPORTECONCO catorce Weneeserenve ss 2 36 Frega OAS racine E ne Aes cc a E T 2 36 GEOG FAO i oe e a a E E neers 2 37 ES E TE E A E E A A e enep ere 2 38 MONCTON Credi eE a eae 2 39 Mode Code a A E A 2 39 PO E A A cen Re 2 40 MONIT S EE A E E E E E e ames ev rae 2 40 UMIK CONV CRSIOIN E E a A E eee 2 40 MENTES ESCUDO E E E T 2 41 Airborne COMMISSION earan a aaee aa a e 2 41 CEI A ae A EN 2 41 Configure StreetSmart Data ooooncccconicicconnnccnonononos 2 42 ONTR OnTrac Communication oocccccooo 2 42 EANC Load EANC Rates ooccccconccccoconinccccnnnnnos 2 42 E RR 5 2 42 O ee ere eee eee eee re ee eee ee 2 43 VII A weenie aang en
52. E ne Une ae eee 8 14 Adamo Host Fields nee ce eer eee a nae 8 14 SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide xi Table of Contents Mappa Fede eee mere O e ee Ae 8 15 Host Field Properties IN oocccoocccioncncicccncnccnnccnononnns 8 16 Host Field Properties OU o a a a 8 16 SendSuite Shipping Field Properties 8 17 Mapping UE tere nant E EE mane 8 18 Considerations for Data on the Host File 8 18 Shipment Header Map vc 0 feces E E E eee 8 19 International Detail Line MAap oooccccconccccnnccccnnonooo 8 19 Runnin Data Mapper can a nono sali sse ees e motes 8 20 BETO E SIN areca ce E A A cere 8 22 Verifying that the ODBC Driver for Database Is HASTQNE A ute A E teat E ares 8 23 Creating the Dala SOUrCO aa Aaa a a a E e a 8 24 ODBC Integration in SendSuite ShIppino 8 26 Preparing for IntegratiON ooomccoconnoccnnnoconnnccnnnonos 8 26 Creating a New ODBC Map occcccoocccccccccccnoncnocononncnanonnos 8 27 ORBO TI is 8 30 Adang ME Host AS o ree 8 30 isa e EE tamara ed eh Manage seme i 8 31 Host Field Properties ooocooocococonoocconococonocacononon 8 32 SendSuite Shipping Field Properties 8 34 SOICCUON COlelia nae eee ee 8 35 Using Sendsuite Shipping Supplied Scripting Tools 8 36 Manually Writing an SQL WHERE Clause Using FC OW ONT tne arte wate BON weal Ma OU ee aden eR re teret
53. Guide Programmable Laser Scanner F196022 Contact Wedge Scanner Postage Meters A 4 SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Supported Peripherals A Manuals for A900 Electronic Postage SV50001 Model A900 Postage Meter Operating Peripherals Meter Guide B900 Post Right Postage SV50385 Model B900 Postage Meter User Meter Guide 6500 6501 AAA E100 E101 Paragon SV208SS Settings Instructions Meters SV208ST Settings Instructions DM300 SV60691 Operator Guide DM300i DM400i DM350 DM400 DM400L DM400i SV61015 Quick Reference Guide DM500 DM550 DM800 DM8001 DM900 DM1000 SV60951 Operator Guide SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide A 5 This Page Intentionally Blank A 6 SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Appendix B Version Compatibility Operating System and Upgrade Compatibility SendSuite Desktop Compatibility ooooccccconinocononnonomos SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide B Version Compatibility Operating System and Upgrade Compatibility Specific Requirements for Each SendSuite Shipping Version SendSuite Shipping Version Prior to 6 20 6 20 em 6 25 650 Estimated Call 12 2008 03 2010 06 2010 12 2010 Release Date Customer Support Compatible to Call 5 4 6 01 original 6 20 Upgrade from Customer 6 00 release and USPS 6 21 Suppo
54. Guide 3 31 3 Shipping Shipping Sub Event Description O Screens Delete Shipment Processing Events eMultiPack Auto eMultiPack Auto Close eMultipack Close eMultiPack Loop Pieces Deletes the current shipment If the shipment is part of a consolidation or if it has been manifested it cannot be deleted Starts the automatic multipack process The user must specify the expected number of pieces By default the system will continue processing pieces as part of this multipack even after the last number is reached To change this behavior use the eMultiPack Auto Close sub event This sub event automatically stops the multipack session after the specified number of packages have been processed Place this event in the eRate and Save master event following the New Shipment sub event Closes the multipack session If the user has the consolidation option on then the system attempts to consolidate the individual pieces into a hundredweight shipment If the consolidation is successful then the shipments are updated with the prorated cost The first shipment is then read back in and displayed on the screen This is the main sub event in the eAutoMultiPack master event This sub event tells the system to loop back to the first sub event in the master processing event When it detects that all pieces in a multipack have been processed it allows the master event to proceed to the next sub event In the propertie
55. Han 1 User Function Properties eUser01 Menu Menu Caption Save Update Key F2 y T Alt Tr Ctl Menu ToolBar Menu Menu ToolBar Menu Menu ToolBar Menu No No No No No Menu Sub Generate Auto Bill Number Sut Generate Tracking Number Sut Get Weight Default Scale Sub Hazardous Detail Subj IntelliShop Sub International Detail Edit Sub Load Processing Screen Defaults Sut Meter Batch Close Sub Meter Batch Open Sub Meter Batch Status Sut New Shipment Ala Chinaanant lA id Mafa v l nl Optional You can create a shortcut key for user defined processing events When you do this the user can press a key on the keyboard to execute the event instead of using the mouse to click on the event a Click the drop down arrow in the Key field to select a key that will trigger the sub events you assigned to the user configured event b If you want to add Shift Alt or Control to be pressed with the shortcut key click the check box before Shift Alt or Ctl Click the save icon on the horizontal toolbar E Click Close SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Shipping 3 Shipping Sub Event Descriptions pS ai Processing Events dd Change Saves the information in the vConsignee fields to Consignee tblAddress The Move Shipment Screen Fields to Consignee Fields parameter moves data from tb ShipmentHeader to vConsignee Add Change BillTO Saves the information in the vB
56. Instructions adding a route ID field 2 25 applying 2 24 creating 2 22 2 23 2 24 2 25 setting priority 2 25 S SCAC See Standard Carrier Alpha Codes SED 3 17 3 18 3 19 3 20 SendSuite Desktop version compatibility B 3 Shipper Alert 2 14 2 15 creating 2 14 deleting 2 15 Shipper Handling Fees 2 16 2 17 Shipping Screens 3 21 3 22 3 23 3 24 3 25 3 26 3 27 3 28 3 29 3 30 3 31 3 32 3 33 3 34 3 35 3 36 3 37 3 38 3 39 3 40 3 41 3 42 creating a custom screen 3 21 exporting and importing screens 3 40 3 41 3 42 field edit control 3 45 processing events 3 29 3 30 3 31 3 32 3 33 3 34 3 35 3 36 3 37 3 38 3 39 sub events 3 31 continue on error toggling 3 30 properties on the defaults tab 3 28 3 29 Single Sign on 3rd Party See User Authentication Single Use Recipients 3 43 3 44 3 45 Small Package Manifest in Task Scheduler 5 28 SQL Server SQL Server Agent 1 6 1 7 Standard Carrier Alpha Codes 2 13 Sub Events See Shipping Screens T Tariffs absolute minimums 6 32 6 33 accessorial incompatibility 6 34 accessorials 6 23 6 24 6 25 borrowing 6 37 6 38 6 39 6 40 clone a carrier setup 6 37 6 38 6 39 create carrier address record 6 39 6 40 carrier service days 6 28 6 29 discounts 6 26 6 27 FAK 6 30 6 31 label format 6 40 PRO numbers 6 40 rate shop groups 6 40 routing instruction 6 40 temporary increase 6 35 6 36 tracking numbers 6 40 1 4 Task Scheduler 5 20 5 21
57. MENE A ene rece ee eee 5 15 Importing Into SendSuite ana a e 5 15 Mpondo USOS io loa E ae 5 15 Simple Database Queres a aaa a a e 5 17 Tools Module Simple QU 8TIV coccccccconcconccccccccccnnccnnonnnos 5 17 Advanced Database QUerl8S oooonnccccccccocononinnccnnonononnnononos 5 19 Tools Module Advanced QuUery coooooncccccconccnccccononnnnno 5 19 Task Scheduler a eee an E rates on ie E cere 5 20 AVANDIA teen ee red repeater i err Ree 5 20 Credea TASK GQUOUPD case erase eee eee sce 5 23 Aada Task lo the Group sxc a ene eee 5 24 Schedule When Task Groups Will Run 5 25 Start the Task Scheduler ococoocooonccccoconcnnccccononoconononnnos 5 26 Modifying a Scheduler coccooooccncccconccnccconoconcnnononnnnnos 5 26 Terminating the Task Scheduler cooooocooococccccoocccncononooonoo 5 27 Setting Up Purge SNIOMON cccccccssssscnssssssecssessseenes 5 27 Small Package Manifest Setup cccoooonccncccconcnncononoonoo 5 28 Creating the Windows TaSK ooooocccccconnconccnonnonoonanos 5 29 Running Tasks From Windows Task Scheduler 5 29 Tes ing HNC A wore E tea arse t DO Purging Database Records enres aeneae ae 5 34 A E a E E A A e 5 34 Empoy Customer Data a e R E A 5 36 E E E pee na A ae 5 36 E E T ten ee Oe aire 5 36 User AUHIACTINCTUO Mee os a E e A E a A a 5 37 6 Tariffs Creating a Custom Parcel Tariff from Scratch 6 2 A S TEETE art TE ena E ee 6 2 Address TA
58. Motification 1 oe shinper pb com Email Notification 2 Save Cloze ONTR OnTrac Communication Use this screen to set your User ID and password for OnTrac communication See SVTS9129 for more information EANC Load EANC Rates Use this screen to manually download rates from Eastern Connection See SVTS9129 for more information UPS UPS Communication Use the UPS Communication to setup the desired connection method to UPS This can be either direct Internet access or dial up UPS Commission Use UPS Commission to put the system in production giving the system the ability to ship UPS and transmit revenue files UPS DDU Basic Load This is used under special circumstances where the customer negotiates basic contract rates with UPS Engineering Is involved in creating files that are loaded by a Service Representative UPS DDU PO Box Load This is used under special circumstances where the customer negotiates basic contract rates with UPS Engineering Is involved in creating files that are loaded by a Service Representative UPS Lane Load This is used under special circumstances where the customer negotiates basic contract rates with UPS Engineering Is involved in creating files that are loaded by a Service Representative SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Additional Supporting Data Carrier amp Labels NOTE Delivery Confirmation is configured during carrier installation Rate
59. Name field identify all the fields on 3 Modify the properties for the field See Host Field Properties In in the the data file regardless next section of this chapter of whether you will map 4 Click Add them NOTE You must 5 Repeat these steps until all the fields have been added Existing Map lf you are adding host fields to an existing map click on the existing field that the new field will follow then select Host Fields gt Add a Host field 8 14 SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Integration 8 Data Mapper EXAMPLE Below is a line of sample data to be imported via the data mapper NE ag Mapping the Fields 1101 4614 JOSE DIAZ THE BIG HAT S25 W MATIN ST Suite 754 DALLAS TX 15203 Us he 0 Mapping Fields To map the fields begin by expanding your host records Then expand the SendSuite table to which you will map the data 2 Consignee ID To map a field click and drag the host field onto the SendSuite Conquest field If you mapped the field successfully the host field icon and the SendSuite field icon change color Also in the SendSuite pane the host field name appears next to the SendSuite field name PB TMS Integration DMComma MAP a 0 x N ale Edt Yew Operations Host ells Tables Map Window tel la asal S e x Gy 1al Gal 2 IH ost Fields Conquest Fields B Shipment Header and Shipment Line tblCommodity Orde
60. SQL WHERE clause use the SendSuite Selection Criteria tool 1 2 3 On the SendSuite Integration window highlight a Host table On the SendSuite Integration window highlight a SendSuite Conquest table Open the Selection Criteria window From the Operations menu select Edit Selection Criteria OR Click on the Edit Selection Criteria button on the ODBC Toolbar Selection Criteria First Parameter Second Parameter s ODBC Fields Operator Type m Low Expression Value Prompt User l gt C Constant i gt tolShipmentHeader ScheduledDelDate lt C Conquest Field z tblShipmentHeader ScheduledShipDate lt tblShipmentHeader SealNr IS NULL C ODBC Field tblShipmentHeader ShipForlD IS NOT NULL High Expression Value tblShipmentHeader ShipperConsRelated LIKE c tblShiomentHeader ShipperlD NOT LIKE MOLEN t r Sh BETWEEN tblShipmentHeader ShipToFaxWNumber NOT BETWEEN tbiShipmentHeader ShipToFaxMumber2 y IN tblShipmentHeader ShipToPhone NOT IN y tblShipmentHeader SignatureDelivery iblShinmentHeaderl SinaleShinment Bd i Logic Criteria tblShipmentHeader ShipperlD PROMPT USER Logic Operators AND COR Add Update Edit Delete Add Free Text E Tame A Write a WHERE clause using Free Text e You can use the SendSuite supplied tools to write a script see Using SendSuite supplied script
61. SVTS9117 Rev J Tariffs 6 To set up accessorials that your carriers support AA AN 10 11 12 13 14 SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Open the Supporting Data module from the Control Center Double click the Carrier amp Labels folder Double click the Rates folder Double click Carrier Setup Click in the line that has the carrier tariff you want to modify Click the Details button Click in the Accessorial Lanes ID field and type a unique ID for the accessorial file Click Save Click Close Click the Accessorial Lanes tab Click the Details button A Accessorial Lanes Accessorial Lane ID ESTMACCO 1 yv Country lus State CT City Low Origin HighOrigin Low Dest fp High Dest gt Effective Date 01 01 05 Expiration Date i Accessorial Support ID ESTMACCO1 Save Delete Close Type any information about the lane in which these accessorials apply For example if the accessorials you are about to define apply only to deliveries in California select that state If your accessorials apply to all delivery destinations leave all the white fields blank Type the effective date of the accessorials Type or select the file with the accessorial information in the Accessorial Support ID field e If these are new accessorial parameters type a new and unique name in this field and continue following this procedure e If you are using and existi
62. SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Carrier Setup NOTE Typing an ID will activate a tab on the main carrier profile screen For example if you type an ID for Discount Lanes but you do not type an ID for FAK Lanes only the Discount tab will be activated NOTE For some carriers such as DHL hazardous materials may also be referred to as dangerous goods NOTE You must type or select an ID in this field if the tariff is an FAK tariff SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 2i Tariffs 6 In the Supplemental Data area type unique IDs for any of the other data in the carrier profile Accessorial Lanes Use this to set up the ancillary costs carriers charge for services such as deliver confirmation hazardous materials fuel surcharges insurance weekend delivery oversize packages etc SendSuite will default these as NS Not Supported unless you set them up See Tariff Accessorials elsewhere in this chapter for instructions to set up accessorial costs Discount Lanes Use this to set up the discounts you have negotiated with your carriers See Tariff Discounts elsewhere in this chapter for instructions to set up carrier discounts Service Days Lanes Use this to tell SendSuite how soon a package will get to its destination using this tariff For example if this is a second day tariff then SendSuite needs to know that it cannot be used for overnight delivery
63. Script Import Parameters Script Type E Export Script Destination Script Code CONEXP Source Script Filename CVASCENTIASCENT CONS EXPORT EXX 7 Click File gt Export DB Data 8 Select CONEXP from the Export Code drop down menu 9 Ensure the Export File name is C consignee txt 10 Click OK FM eExport Consignee Data ES X Export Code Filter Code L La T Eaa PiS MEMS sos sasooeess Create Append Mode From consignee Mame FO To consignee Mame PO From Consignee Code J To Consiqnee Code J 11 Click OK at the confirmation prompt SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Integration 8 Importing Data 12 In Windows Explorer navigate to CA and open consignee txt in Notepad From Ascent e Verify the data was exported properly The file should look similar to the graphic below 4 consignee txt Notepad 3 E ol x File Edit Format Help rt in Addr T e yw TIEN temporary customers nn nn nn nn nn nn m e Uce nn nn nn ou nn nn po I g ess BPT Family Dollar 116 Crown Street New Haven CT 06510 203 555 5555 Data WILTON Al s Hardware 44 Danbury Road wilton CT 06897 203 555 1234 Importing the Ascent Data into SendSuite Shipping 1 Transfer the consignee txt file generated on your Ascent computer to your SendSuite server Place the file in C Inser
64. SendSuite Shipping Server 1 SendSuite As acritical system in your operation it is important that you regularly maintain Database the SendSuite Database This includes backing up the data optimizing the A storage of the data and truncating the transaction log Maintenance You can schedule a backup of the entire database and the transaction log The frequency of this backup is a decision your company must make based on your shipping volume and data storage policies You also may want to perform a one time backup prior to applying a rate change or a software update Performing a one time backup is also a good idea before purging records from the database All SendSuite installations should have the following e Abackup of the Master Database e Adatabase maintenance plan including a schedule for the plan e Make sure that MS SQL Server Agent is running and set it to automatically start e A Database Maintenance Plan to back up and truncate the Transaction Log e The SQL Server backup of the transaction log truncates the log Without truncation the transaction log can grow to an enormous size So even if you back up the entire drive nightly you will still want to have a SQL Server plan backup and truncate the transaction log See Understanding the Transaction Log on page 1 21 SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 1 5 1 SendSuite Shipping Server SendSuite The SQL Server Agent must be running for any sched
65. Shipping Administrator Guide Integration 8 Data Mapper Host File Properties e File Type Specify how the records are organized on the host file The Data Map Settings fields to the right will change based on your selection e Separate Header Detail and Trailer Lines In this host file each header record is followed by one or more detail lines Each line begins with a character that identifies what type of record it is The last detail record is followed by a trailing record indicating that the first header record has been completed The next record will be a new header Header Detail and Trailer Line ID In these fields type the character that identifies the line see the sample below H BILL1234 CONS1234 ADDRESS1 L 1 PIECE PRODUCTI T EOF Host File Properties File Type Header Line ID JH Separate Header Detail and Trailer Lines Separate Header and Detail Lines Detail Line ID D C Separate Header and Detail related by a key Combined Header and Detail related by a key Trailer Line ID fil Trailing Leading character to be removed from fields e g double quotes Separate Header and Detail Lines In this host file each header record is followed by one or more detail lines Each line begins with a character that identifies what type of record it is H BILL1234 CONS1234 ADDRESS1 L 1 PIECE PRODUCTI Host File Properties File Type Header Line ID JH Separate Heade
66. Shipping Administrator Guide l 5 PitneyBowes 1 Elmcroft Road Stamford Connecticut 06926 0700 www pb com PB Form SVTS9117 Rev J 12 2010 2010 Pitney Bowes Inc All Rights Reserved Printed in the USA kSVTS9117REVJX X
67. a 4 fixed length format You use these fields to tell Host Date and Time Format y ES SendSuite where the data is in on the file Refer to the following example 1234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123 BILL456 CONSID123 AUTOMOTIVE REPAIR SPECIALISTS 123 MAIN ST BILL789 CONS 733 JOES AUTOBODY 4 N 8TH e Position Type the number of the column where the data starts F or example the consignee names above start at column 23 e Width Indicate how many characters might be in that field For example the consignee ID field above contains up to 10 characters e Precision Defines how many decimal places a field uses Strip spaces from field after reading it This is checked by default and it will remove any blank space from a field This can be useful if the host system always outputs the maximum number of character for a field padding the data with spaces To define the host field properties left click on the host tag then right click on the tag Select Edit from the popup menu All the properties are the same as what is shown in Host Field Properties In in the previous section of this chapter with the following difference Pad field before writing it out Using these radio dial buttons you can add characters to the left or the right of the data you are sending back to the host For example if SendSuite is sending back Dave but the host system expects 10 characters
68. and click Next Database Maintenance Plan Wizard local Write reportto a text file in directory CAMSSQLBACKUP Delete text report files older than E Week s y M Send e mail reportto operator Reports to Generate Specify the directory in which to store the reports generated by the maintenance plan New Operator 7 1 12 SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide SendSuite Database Maintenance Creating a Database Maintenance Plan NOTE It is highly recommended that the backup file be saved or transferred to other locations such as a ZIP disk or other removable storage media NOTE This plan will back up the SendSuite database as well as the transaction log SendSuite Shipping Server 1 34 Accept the defaults on the Maintenance History dialog box and click Next 35 Enter a Plan name For example System Database Maintenance Plan Wizard local _ x Completing the Database Maintenance Plan Wizard EA ou have completed the steps to create a database maintenance Eoo plan The plan is described below Flan name Syster DATABASES All Databases OPTIMIZATIONS Occurs every 1 week s on Sunday at 1 00 00 AM Perform the following actions Reorganize data and index pages changing tt y Cancel Help 36 Scroll through the screen to review the summary 37 Click Finish The following mes
69. e Disregard Header Record This will skip that record and go on to the next e Add Detail Line to database table This will add the header record and create a dummy line record as well Rollup Line Item by Commodity Code or by Product By default SendSuite will add each tb ShipmentLine as a separate record If you select this box SendSuite will consolidate multiple lines where the commodity or product code is the same For example SendSuite will create one line with 7 pieces from a host file with the following lines 123456 123456 Skip record if record would be added to the conflict table SendSuite will not overwrite or update existing records in the database Instead duplicate records are added to tb ShipmentHeaderConflict If you select this box SendSuite will skip the duplicate record and it will not add it to the database Locked Record Behavior Records are locked when they are in use by another application or user If SendSuite encounters a locked record your selection here determines what the system will do e Skip Record The record is skipped and not added to the database e Wait The system will retry after waiting the number of seconds you specify If the record is still locked the system will wait again until the record is unlocked SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Integration 8 XM L In PB TMS Integration XML Test XML E Ioj x in te
70. field Enter the freight cost in the Manual Rated Freight Cost field Enter the pro number in the Manual Rated Pro Number field A ot a E Click Manual Rating to execute the scripts and other sub events associated with this processing event e The Carrier ID is set to MAN e The shipment is rated e The tblLoad is updated with the freight cost and pro number e A Bill of Lading will display on screen if added as a sub event e The shipment is saved and you are ready to rate another shipment SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 6 51 6 Tariffs Zero Rate A zero rate carrier provides a useful way of logging shipments in cases where Carrier there are no shipping charges for example if you are using your own truck to make a delivery Follow the below instructions to create your own LTL zero rated carrier Creating the SCAC To create the SCAC 1 Open the SendSuite Supporting Data module 2 Open Carrier amp Labels gt SCAC Codes 3 Click the New button AscAC Codes x MAC Ceri Ver Paper MAC Cert Ver EFile MAC Ceri Ver Label Save Delete Close 4 Type ZERO in the SCAC field 5 Save and close the SCAC setup Creating the Tariff Setting Up the Tariff To set up the tariff 1 Open the SendSuite Supporting Data module 2 Open Carrier amp Labels gt Rates gt Tariff Setup 3 Click the New Record line and click Details F rt Bie E ia E 4 Select ZE
71. field SendSuite will default to Y Select the tariff to be used in this profile from the drop down in the Tariff ID field and then press Tab Other fields are automatically populated when you press Tab Optional Select the method by which your discounts will be applied from the drop down in the Discount Application field e Actual Weight The discount is applied using the actual weight of the shipment e Rated Weight The discount is applied using the billed weight of the shipment This would use the deficit weight or DIM weight instead of the actual weight e Billable A R The discount is applied behind the scenes for accounting purposes Select how SendSuite will rate multiple piece shipments from the drop down in the Rate Per Piece or Ship field e Rate Per Piece The rate will be calculated for every piece in the shipment For example for a shipment of three five pound packages SendSuite will rate each package individually to come up with the total freight for the shipment e Rate Per Shipment The rate will be calculated based on the weight of the shipment as a whole For example a shipment of three five pound packages will be rated as one 15 pound package Using this method will usually result in lower freight costs than the Rate Per Piece method 20 Select the type of tariff being used from the drop down in the Rate Type field If you make no selection SendSuite Shipping will default to Standard
72. gt Change XML Map Properties XML MAP Settings General In Direction e in C Out Server XML File Properties Name URL Browse Edit Save XML file after processing Batch Files Pre executed FO Browse Postexecuted o Browse Script y Host Date and Time Format y el coca rete General Tab Direction Sets the way the data will flow e In Data coming into the SendSuite database e Out Data going out of SendSuite to an XML file Server XML File Properties e Name URL required Type the source file you may also browse for the file see below e Browse Click this button to search for the file you want to use e Edit Click this button to open the file you selected using Notepad Save XML after processing This feature saves the XML file and does not delete it e Batch Files Type or browse to select an exe com or bat file to process before or after the mapping For example to run a process on the host that creates the XML data e Conditional Logic Script From the drop down you can select a VBScript to run at the time the map is running The script conditional logic will run for each record as it is processed e Host Date and Time Format From the drop down you can select a date and time translation SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Integration 8 XML In In Tab nteg rat
73. import Click the Export Selected Screens button Click Close SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Shipping 3 Shipping Importing Shipping Screens Screens 1 You must close any screens you have open in this Shipping module on the Administrative Workstation Exporting and 2 From the File menu select Import Screen Importing Screens Cook Inc eTraining Screen ES O eTraininaScreen2 ES O Test PP Select All Deselect All Close Successfully imported screen Cook Inc Successfully imported screen eT raining Screen 3 Click the Browse button Browse then browse for the file you want to NOTE If the adtg import Name the file at this time contains multiple screens you can 4 Click Open choose only the ones 5 Check the boxes next to the screens you want to export you want to import by placing a checkmark next to them 6 Click the Import Selected Screens button SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 3 41 3 Shipping Shipping Screens Exporting and Importing Screens Allowing User Access 3 42 7 If you are importing a screen that has the same name as a screen already in the system you will be asked what you want to do with the screen in the system 210 x There is already a screen called Cook Inc How would you like to import it f Don t import it Overnmrite Cook Imc Callit Cook Inc001 L Don t impor
74. information for each individual line on the table SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide International 7 COMMERCTAL INVOICE Docu ments Invoice Number 10058 Charge Terms PPD Invoice Date 23 Sep 2002 Trade Terms CFR Commercial ee Terms Wet 30 Invoice Pitney Bowes Shipping 10800 Lyndal Avenue South MINNEAPOLIS MN 55420 French Destination 123 Rue Paris RF4 FR FRANCE AuniPh one atin pho neF rane Sold To Name 101 Sold to Dr MINNEAPOLIS MN 55406 AumPhone Sold To Aun 612 835 4000 Pitney Bowes Shipping 10800 Lyndal Avenue South 123 Financial MINNEAPOLIS MN BEVERLY HILLS CA 90210 JUS UNITED STATES US UNITED STATES Aun Phone 952 885 7100 Aun Phone 213 555 1212 Total Gross Weight Total Volume SOLES 227 KILOS DOCE ODMA Department Ruling PRODUCT NUMBER DESCRIPTION International Product Description number 2 Teil 1 International Product Descriptio This hereby certified thar this invoice shows the acral price of the goods described that no Payable In USD other invoboe has been or will be issued and thal all particulars are true and correct Total Product These commodities technology or sofware were exported from the United Sises in accordance with the Export Administration Regulations Diversion contrary to U S Law is prohibited Authorized Signature SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 1 of 1
75. is located in the Tools Module The Query feature is always read only so it does not matter whether you check Read Write or Read Only Allows you to permanently delete data records from your SendSuite database tables This feature is located in the Tools Module The following options allow you to empty customer data L Customize select the tables from the SendSuite database that you want to empty Admin Admin Admin Admin O Empty select the tables to empty all customer data in the customized table list Allows you to specify all addresses needed on your packing and shipping documents including those of your consignees and your own organization and carriers This feature is located in the Supporting Data Module Allows you to set up how SendSuite will generate automatic bill numbers invoice numbers and order numbers This feature is located in the Supporting Data Module Allows you to modify carrier profiles that were loaded during data loading This feature is located in the Supporting Data Module Stores the commodity codes and freight classes The Commodity Table provides a general description of the type of goods This feature is located in the Supporting Data Module Stores distance information for use with distance based LTL and truckload shipping rates This feature is located in the Supporting Data Module Admin Admin Admin Admin Admin SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administ
76. is not used for custom manual carriers Use this field when you want to duplicate the algorithm used for a small package carrier such as UPS In that case you would type the file name of the binary file that the carrier uses in this field 6 24 SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Tariff Accessorials Tariffs 6 19 Click Save then click Close on the Accessorial Setup window 20 Repeat step 16 through step 19 for every accessorial charge supported by the carrier 21 Click Save then click Close on the Accessorial Support window 22 Repeat Step 14 through Step 21 for each unique accessorial lane 23 Click Close on the Accessorial Lanes window A Carrier Setup FAR Seis Ascessoriallncomp Tariff Increase Carrier Profile Accessorial Lanes Absolute Minimums Discounts Accessorial Lane ID ESTMACCO1 Country State city Low Orig High Orig Low Dest High Dest Ef Date Exp Date Support ID gt us eT 1 1 2005 ESTMACCOI Ka Accessorial Support Details Delete 24 Repeat step 5 through step 23 for every tariff that supports accessorial charges SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 6 25 6 Tariffs Tariff Discounts NOTE If you want to use an existing discount file click the drop down arrow and select the discount file ID Likewise once you set up the following discounts you can use them for other carriers just by
77. left of the first record press and hold the S key and then click the gray area to the left of the last record SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 5 35 5 Tools Purging Database Records Empty Customer Data NOTE This type of purge is not recommended because all data will be deleted Some tables contain very important information that you must keep For example tolAddress contains records for carriers and your shipper ID Using this feature you would delete carrier information that is necessary to rate shipments NOTE All data in the tables you selected will be deleted The system does not discriminate based on date type of data etc 5 36 This feature allows you to specify the tables you want to purge Unlike the purge feature this feature will delete all the data on a table When using this feature you first define the tables that will be emptied then you execute the data purge Customize To define the tables you want to empty 1 From the Control Center open the Tools module 2 From the Database menu select Empty Customer Data gt Customize Customize Empty Table List E x Empty Check Table Nama E tbl oad E tbiLeg thi TL Manifest E thlkManifastContig E tblManitestDocuments C tblManitestLog a JblManilestPickup E C tbManfesthucue o F tbiManifastUpdata WA a thIMFT Can ValidateE rors Error table for manifest valudate O tblOrderHdrAhw
78. modify shipping sub events Running XML Once the shipping screen has been set up the XML integration is executed using the sub events on the screen SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Conditional Logic Scripting NOTE Scripts are can be edited run and parsed on the SendSuite server However on an admin station that is not the server the field tree will not be displayed and the Parse Script feature will not function Integration 8 SendSuite is designed to perform specific tasks When circumstances dictate you can write conditional logic scripts to perform actions that are not part of the system design There are two versions of Conditional Logic e SendSuite toolset e Microsoft Visual Basic Scripting VBScript interface in SendSuite The type of script you use depends on where in the application you want to use e Shipment Processing uses VBScript e Data Mapper integration uses the SendSuite toolset e XML integration uses VBScript SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 8 57 8 Integration Conditional 1 From the Control Center select the Integration module Logic Scripting 2 Click the New button 3 Select Conditional Logic SendSuite l _ gt Shipping Toolset ee BIE Bla s 2 6 gt x 8 soja Ge 2 Description B This map will be used for am fields f 4 Briefly explain what the script is for in the Description field 5 Inthe
79. name unless you are connecting to an Access database where the field names contain spaces Field Type In most cases SendSuite automatically reads the type of data expected from the host database Sometimes however you must manually set this field All fields require a data type Field Width This field defines how many characters or bytes are allowed in the field Field Precision This field is enabled only when you are working with number or currency data types This field will be treated as free text If selected text in the Field Name will be used in the select statement The syntax should be valid for the host database Getting data IN Use these fields to define how data is brought into SendSuite These fields will only be enabled when the Data Exchange Properties are set to In SQL Select e Strip leading and training characters If the data in the host table contains a special character before or after the data then type that character in this field For example data in a field may begin and end with a space e Existing value for field If the SendSuite table already contains a value for this field then you can tell the system what to do with that information e Keep existing value The new value will be ignored e Append to existing value The new information will be added to the field For example if the field contains 123 and a new value of 456 is being appended then the field will c
80. not validate whether SendSuite will use the script correctly or that the user will be able to execute the script on their client workstation The script should be thoroughly tested with the SendSuite function that is using it Select Operations gt Parse Script to validate the script Attaching the Script to a Shipping Screen A script that has been written for shipment processing must be added to the shipping screen See Processing Events in Chapter 3 Attaching a Script to an Integration Map A script that has been written for an integration map must be added to the map properties See Data Mapper elsewhere in this chapter SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 8 61 8 Integration Importing Data From Ascent Importing Address Data 8 62 SendSuite Shipping can import existing address data from an Ascent system using the Data Mapper Pitney Bowes includes Data Maps for importing Ascent data on your SendSuite Shipping DVD Use the instructions below to import Ascent data into SendSuite Shipping Extracting the Data From Ascent To extract the data from Ascent 1 On your Ascent computer insert your SendSuite Shipping DVD into your DVD CD ROM drive Open Ascent Setup Click File gt Import Script Select DB Export Script Name the script CONEXP in the Destination Script Code field Click LJ and navigate to your DVD CD ROM drive Select ASCENT CONS EXPORT EXX Click OK Or pi e ES O
81. now edit each individual user e Right click on a Shipper ID and click Properties Create a New User Create a New Group Display Users Data Visibility Test Group Create Add a New User to Group Test C amp Shipper1 amp Shipper2 amp Shipper3 Shipper5 Admin Shipper1 Shipper2 Shipper3 Shipperd UPSINTL 8 Users with no assigned password will log in with password SendSuite Shipping then prompts the user to type a new password Pitney Bowes Change User Password User ID Shipper2 Current Password locevcece New Password Re Type New Password SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Simple Database Queries Tools Module Simple Query Tools 5 You can make simple SendSuite database queries from the Tools module To make a simple query of a SendSuite database from the Tools module 1 2 3 Select Query Database from the Database menu Click the drop down arrow in the Select table field Use one of the following methods to select the database fields listed in Check fields to show that you wish SendSuite to display e Click the box to the left of the corresponding database fields you wish to display e Click the Check All button AA Query Database E iol x Select table tbiShipmentHeader E 1 T Select an Existing Criterion New Criterion Check fields to show Field Operator Value Logic Operator
82. of copies see below When you do this there is no need to check the document boxes on the shipping screen The system will look at vConsignee ConsiSOCountryCode and relate that to the flag on tb Country e You can specify the number of copies of each document you want to print This process only works with if the Print International Docs event or sub event is set to print to the printer See Processing Events in Chapter 3 of this guide SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Supporting Data 2 Country Data To modify country data o On the Administrative Workstation open the Supporting Data module o ing Country gt Double click the Data folder 3 Double click Country 4 Select the country e Type the 2 digit ISO country code in the field provided then press Tab OR e From the drop down select the country you want to modify AA Country i E l0 xi Country 2 Letter ISO Code T gt Country Name ITALY 3 Digit Code 380 3 Letter Code TA Currency Code ITA Currency Name EURO CS Currency Symbol e Record Date 02 1088 of Copies Documents Required Commercial Invoice Certificate of Origin Detail SED NAFTA Ti i Save Delete Close 5 Inthe of Copies Documents Required box type the default number of copies for each type of document 6 Click Save SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 2 7 2 Supporting Data
83. pages fill updating requires more time Reorganize your data and index El pages to improve performance Update statistics used by query optimizer Sample Remove unused space from database files vehen It grows beyond fia 26 Of the data space ae Change 12 Click Next 13 If you have made changes click OK and then click Next 14 From the Database Integrity Check dialog box leave the default settings selected Do not make any changes to the options on this dialog box Amount ot iree space to remain after shrink schedule Occurs every 1 week s on Sunday at 1 00 00 AM 15 If necessary click Change and modify when the activity is to occur The default is every Sunday at 12 00 AM 16 Click Next 17 If you have made changes click OK and then click Next SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide SendSuite Database Maintenance Creating a Database Maintenance Plan SendSuite Shipping Server 1 18 Accept the defaults on the Specify the Database Backup Plan dialog box 19 If necessary click Change and modify when the activity is to occur The default is every Sunday at 2 00 AM once the database optimization and integrity checks have completed 20 Click Next 21 If you have made changes click OK and then click Next 22 From the Specify Backup Disk Directory select Use this directory The default is C MSSQL BACKUP 23 Click the ellipsis to navigate to an
84. selecting this Discount lane ID 6 26 To set up carrier discounts NO o o a o a 10 11 12 13 14 Open the Supporting Data module from the Control Center Double click the Carrier amp Labels folder Double click the Rates folder Double click Carrier Setup Click in the line that has the tariff you want to discount Click the Details button Click in the Discount Lanes ID field and type a unique ID for the discount file Click Save Click Close Click the Discount tab Click the Details button lola Discount Lane ESTMDLO1 yv Country lus gt State Cr y ity NEWHAVEN o amp Low Origin sigh Origin Low Dest fT High Dest fT Effective Date 01 01 05 Expiration Date ff Zone Po Charge Terms Interline Direct Comm Res Po Disc Parameters ID ESTMDLAA Save Delete Close Type any information about the lane in which this discount applies For example if the discount you are about to define applies only to deliveries in California select that state lf your discounts apply to all delivery destinations leave all the white fields blank Type the effective date of the discount Type or select the file with the discount information in the Disc Parameters ID field e If these are new discount parameters then type a new and unique name in this field and continue following this procedure e If you are using an existing discount parameter then skip to
85. step 18 SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Tariffs 6 Tariff Discounts 15 Click the Discount Parameters button x Discount Parameter ID ESTMDLAA Minimum Discount 112 50 Base Discount 09 65 Weight Based Discounts 4 Delete Line s Clear Save Delete Close 16 Type information regarding the discount When typing discount percentages type the number without the sign For example if your discount is 63 2 type 63 2 in the Discount field a Ifthe carrier gives you a minimum percentage discount type that number in the Minimum Discount field b Ifthe carrier gives you the same percentage for all weights and gives you an incremental discount as weight goes up type the base discount in the Base Discount field c Ifthe discounts vary by weight type the weights and discounts in the Weight Based Discounts Type the percentage discount in the Discount column and type maximum weight for the discount in the Wat Break column 17 Click Save then click Close on the Discount Parameters window 18 Click Save then click Close on the Discount Lanes window SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 6 27 6 Tariffs Carrier Service Days NOTE If you want to use an existing service file click the drop down arrow and select the service file ID Likewise once you set up the following service day la
86. the Machine Data Source tab SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Integration 8 Creating a DSN 7 Click New xl Select a type of data source C User Data Source Applies to this machine only Creating the Data Source System Data Source Applies to this machine only Selecting System Data Source creates a data source which is specificto this machine and usable by any user who logs onto this machine 8 From the Create New Data Source dialog box select System Data Source and click Next Create New Data Source i x Select a driver for which you want to set up a data source Microsoft Excel Treiber xls 4 00 62 Microsoft FoxPro YFP Driver dbf 6 01 86 Microsoft ODBC Driver for Oracle 2 00 00 Microsoft ODBC for Oracle 2 575 Microsoft Paradox Driver db sonez Microsoft Paradox Treiber db 4 00 62 Microsoft SQL Server 2000 85 Microsoft Text Driver bd csv 4 00 62 Microsoft Text Treiber bd csv 4 00 62 Microsoft Visual FoxPro Driver 60 a b NOTE The DSN setup from this point will vary by the driver chosen 9 Select the ODBC driver to use Be certain to select the right driver for the database you are using The driver you use should match the database type 10 Once you have named the DSN and selected the database you will return to the SendSuite ODBC Data Exchange Properties window SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Adm
87. the New Record line the first blank line at the end of the list that is marked with a 6 Click the Details button A Carrier Profile Details E joj x Carrier Shipper Shipper PB a Effective 01 01 05 Expiration Date 7 Carrier ESTM Reporting SCAC ESTM Matching service required on shipment N Zip Digits Required 5 Allow Consolidation N Tariff Tariff ID ESTMO010105 y Tariff ESTMO1 Service GRD Discount Application Package Type s pa Rate Per Piece or Ship P Rate Type E Supplemental Data Accessorial Lanes ID v Absolute Min Lanes ID v Effective Date 01 01 05 Discount Lanes Accessorial Incompatibility ID NOTE If you have Service Days Lanes ID z Tariff Increase ID multiple shipper IDs that FAK Lanes ID Service File Name will use this carrier then you must set up each shipper individually WT Save Delete Close 7 Click the binoculars button to the right of the Shipper field and select the shipper from list A 8 Type or select the carrier in the Carrier field and then press Tab NOTE If you type a Y 9 Select the service from the drop down in the Service field in the Matching Service 10 Required on Shipment field the shipping If you want to use this carrier when rate shopping type an N in the Matching Service Required on Shipment field operator must speci
88. the carrier s web site No data from the carrier s web site is saved in the SendSuite Shipping database XML File Link In Brings data in using an XML File Link map set up in the Integration module XML Flle Link Out Sends data out using an XML File Link map set up in the Integration module 3 38 SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Shipping 3 shipping Screens XML In Round Trip XML In Round Trip imports data posted to SendSuite Shipping through the B2B XML Round Trip interface This uses an XML map setup through the Integration module Select the map name from the drop down list Processing Events XML Out Round Trip XML Out Round Trip returns data from SendSuite Shipping to another application through the B2B XML Round Trip interface This uses an XML map setup through the Integration module Select the map name from the drop down list XML Out This This write the shipment information out to an Shipment XML file based on the map you set up in the Integration Module XML Rate Quote Generates an XML rate quote See SV7S9131 for more details SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 3 39 3 Shipping Shipping Screens Exporting and Importing Screens NOTE SendSuite Shipping saves the file with an adtg extension After you save the file you can move it to a new location copy it to a floppy disk etc 3 40 Screens can be exported to a file that is s
89. these fields you must tell SendSuite Shipping how to write the data out Data Map Settings Combine header and detail lines If you select this box SendSuite Shipping will write out the header and line information on one line If you leave this box unchecked then SendSuite will write out separate header and detail lines If you do this then you must indicate how the header and detail lines are related e Line Identification What you type in these fields will appear at the beginning of every line If you leave a field blank SendSuite will not put a character at the front of the line For example if you want the bill number in the first column then leave this field blank You might get something like this BILL769 F BDX NAM LL Lodo Ly ads 04 BIEL LOL LORO OOO If you did not check the Combine box then you can use these fields to distinguish header and detail lines For example if you type H in the Load Stop Shipment Header field and D in the Shipment Detail Line ID field then your file might look something like this H BILL123 FEDX GRD 1165245412 D 1 5 235 0 1 H BILL345 YFST LTL 9825652 D 52 1053 2 1 e Trailing Leading character to be added to fields e g double quotes lf you need to add leading or trailing characters to the line written out by SendSuite Shipping type that character in this field 8 12 SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Data Mapper Data Map Settings Int
90. to do if it finds an existing record in the database You can set different properties for different tables For example you can set the properties for tolShipmentHeader to Update and set the properties for tblShipmentLine to Replace To set the table properties 1 Left click on the SendSuite table then right click on the table and select Table Properties Choose the radio dial button next to the Duplicate Record behavior you want Skip Record The information in the record being imported is not loaded into the SendSuite database Update Record Any new information on the record being imported is saved in the SendSuite database Fields that have not changed are left alone Replace Record The record being imported overwrites the existing record in the database If you set this behavior on tblShipmentHeader it will rewrite all the tolShipmentLine records as well Prompt User If the mapper encounters an existing record the user will be given a choice whether to replace the existing record update the existing record delete the existing record see below or skip the incoming record Delete Record This deletes the existing record and does not import the new record Click OK SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Data Mapper Data Map Settings Integration 8 Out Tab Views From the drop down select the type of data you will send out of SendSuite The selection you make de
91. to make a new record Ol Address ID LHFG Signature Logo Address 5 Name Long Horn Freight Alias Atenian o c Address Types i M Carrier l Bill To T Intermediate Attn Title l Consignee J RemitTo l Gov t Agency ER A l Shipper l Dist Center J Trading Partner i l Ship For l Agent Hold At Location Address2 I Manufacturer Haz Attention Broker l Sold To l Seller Benef f Alt Return Addr Carrier Shipper SCAC ILHFG Express Carrier l IATA Country lus gt Perm Temp County Phone Ext Fax ly Et 0 International No Pay Term Carrier Accounts Save Delete Close Type the new carrier s SCAC code in the Address ID field Type the new carrier s name in the Name field Check the box in front of Carrier Type the new carrier s SCAC code in the SCAC Code field on the Carrier tab Does the new carrier have a IATA code If it does then type the two three letter IATA code in the IATA field If not leave that field blank Does the carrier carry international shipments If so then select Yes in the International field If not select No in that field Does the carrier have payment terms If so type the number of the carrier s payment terms for example 10 days or 30 days in the Pay Term field If not leave the field blank Click Save then click Close Close the Data folder SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide
92. want Windows to run and then schedule itfor a convenient time Click Mest to continue Scheduled Task Wirard Click the program you want Windows to run Tosee more programs click Browse a Accessibility Wizard 5 1 2600 2160 x a Pe ents fi Adobe Download Manager 20 0 43 gT Adobe Reader 7 0 El Backup 5 1 2600 2180 x Bar Code Library Setup ur Calculator R1 SAO A here gt fl enct gt Cancel 7 Navigate to C Program Files Pitney Bowes SendSuite Shipping e Legacy users should navigate to C Program Files PBTranscape Conquest SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 5 29 5 Tools Task Scheduler 8 Select ppTMSTaskScheduler exe 9 Click Open 10 Add the name of the group to the name of the scheduled task For example Running Tasks pbTMSTaskScheduler Nightly From Windows Scheduled Task Wizard Task Scheduler Type a name forthis task The task name can be the same name as the program name ei O Li O A T p h abi Maol askoacheduler aja aSKOC Her 11 Select how often the task should run Daily Weekly Monthly etc then click Next 12 Set the Start time and Start date for the task and indicate whether it should run Every Day on Weekdays or on another schedule 13 Click Next Scheduled Task Wizard select the time and day you want this task to start 3001 44 days 5 30 SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping
93. want to use a query criterion already saved in SendSuite then Qo 5 p C xX isting Criterion 10000 lt BillNr lt 50000 E Cinli Ne nents mbn lana Manet Click the box to the left of Select an Existing Criterion Click the drop down arrow in the Select an Existing Criterion field Select the saved query criterion you wish to use Click the View button SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Advanced Database Queries Tools Module Advanced Query Tools 5 You can make advanced SendSuite Shipping database queries from the Tools module Advanced database queries allow you to add a logic operator s to add additional query criteria To make an advanced query of a SendSuite database from the Tools module 1 Select Query Database from the Database menu 2 Click the drop down arrow in the Select table field 3 Use one of the following methods to select the database fields listed in Check fields to show that you wish SendSuite Shipping to display e Click the box to the left of the corresponding database fields you wish to display e Click the Check All button Click the drop down arrow in the Field field Select a field you wish to look up Click the drop down arrow in the Operator field Select the appropriate operator Type the value you wish to find in the Value field O 0 o EE Repeat step 4 through step 8 until you have added all of the necessary query criteria
94. you must insert Workstation a report header To insert a report header or footer Creating a New 2 Right click in the body of th desi ind Thin Client Report Right click in the boay ot the report design window 2 From the pop up menu select Insert then select Report Header Footer ReportHeader El PageFooter Fage Footer P Page Footer E ints at the battor of alt pages clio Toe em r a r Po A PA SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 4 17 4 Reports Creating Custom Reports for the Shipping Workstation Creating a New Thin Client Report 4 18 Grouping If you have data that has some common element then you can group that information together and have the report provide you with a subtotal For example you can create a group for different shippers so that one report can show you totals for each shipper and then give you one grand total at the end To insert a group Right click in the body of the report design window 2 From the pop up menu select Insert then select Group Header Footer Report Header Prints on the first page only Page Header Prints on all pages Label Text 10003 Label t t 4614 Group ltem Label Weight 153258 s00 15530 140 Summary Data Text 1800 Report Footer
95. you to access the End of Day menu category PlanningOperation Allows access to the Shipment Planning menu category Shipping on the Shipping Workstation Setupintegration Allows you to set up integration in various places within Admin SendsSuite This feature is located in the Integration Module Runintegration Allows you to run integration such as Data Mapper ODBC and Conditional Logic This feature is located in the Integration Module DeleteShipment Use the Shipments tab from the Purge Data window to delete shipments This feature is located in the Tools Module SetupTaskScheduler Allows the automated execution of defined tasks on a one time periodic or continuous schedule This feature is located in the Tools Module LaunchTaskScheduler Launches the task scheduler option and begins processing tasks that you schedule This feature is located in the Tools Module SetupSystem Allows you to perform system setup functions Both eTMSSupportingData Allows you to enable disable the Supporting Data icon Shipping on the thin client Read Only is not supported for this function eTMSShipmentProcessing Allows you to enable disable the Shipment Processing icon on the thin client Read Only is not supported for this function eTMSIntegration Allows you to enable disable the Integration icon on the Shipping thin client Read Only is not supported for this function eTMSeQuery Allows you to enable disable the eQuery icon on the Shipp
96. 0 600 6 01 Yes ves Yes Yes 602 603 610 620 650 No No No No SendSuite Address Verification engine compatibility Carrier Service UCU uploads are incompatible due a change in the SSS DB architecture Therefore if the previous version of the UCU is used v5 20 with v5 26 and SSS compatibility will be maintained 6 Large Flat Rate Box will not work 7 The New Technology Release SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide B 3 This Page Intentionally Blank B 4 SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping I Index A Accessorials tariff 6 23 6 24 6 25 File Name field 6 24 Accounting 2 28 2 29 account validation 2 29 account visibility 5 7 reports 4 25 4 26 Ascent importing data from 8 62 8 63 8 64 B Batch Rating 2 26 2 27 batch labeling 2 27 groups 2 26 plan shipments 2 26 2 27 BOL remark codes 2 12 Borrowing a Tariff 6 37 6 38 6 39 6 40 C Carrier log See Zero Rate Carrier Carrier Setup 6 19 6 20 6 21 6 22 Certificate of Origin 3 11 3 12 3 13 Commercial Invoice 3 7 3 8 3 9 3 10 Commodity Data 2 8 adding a commodity code 2 8 Company Logo 1 4 Conditional Logic 8 57 8 58 8 59 8 60 8 61 operations 8 59 toolset 8 58 VB script 8 60 attaching to an integration map 8 61 attaching to a shipping screen 8 61 parsing 8 61 Consignee Data 2 4 2 5 Continue on Error See Shipping Screens Country Data
97. 00 00 AM Perform the following actions Reorganize data and index pages changing tt y Finish i Cancel Help 37 Scroll through the screen to review the summary 38 Click Finish The following message is displayed Successfully created the maintenance plan SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 1 SendSuite Shipping Server SendSuite Editing the Database Maintenance Plan Database 1 From the Windows Start menu click Programs gt Microsoft SQL Server gt Maintenance Enterprise Manager 2 Double click Microsoft SQL Servers Creating a 3 Double click SQL Server Group Database Maintenance Plan 4 Click your PC name to expand the folder 5 Click Management to expand the folder 6 Right click Database Maintenance Plans The plan displays in the right pane 7 Right click the plan and select Properties The plan is displayed for editing Anything selected during setup can be changed on this screen Viewing History of the Database Maintenance Plan 1 From the Windows Start menu click Programs gt Microsoft SQL Server gt Enterprise Manager Double click Microsoft SQL Servers Double click SQL Server Group Click your PC name to expand the folder Click Management to expand the folder SS AL SS e Right click Database Maintenance Plans The plan displays in the right pane 7 Right click the plan and select Maintenance Plan History This is useful for troubleshoot
98. 17 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Product Data Adding a Product Supporting Data 2 Product information is used when printing export documentation Product fields are found on tb ShipmentLine and tblintiLine Product information can be stored in SendSuite in tb Product The data in this table is linked to the tables used in shipping You can set up your integration with SendSuite to map data directly to tblProduct but it is not necessary to do so All export documents will print using the data on tblIntlLine Adding product information to SendSuite is optional Adding these records allows you to quickly insert information into shipping lines when you are processing a shipment When you select a product other line item fields may populate automatically saving time and minimizing data entry errors When processing international shipments a great deal of product information is required By populating the product table you can save valuable time To add a product while in the Supporting Data module 1 Open the Data folder in the Supporting Data Selection window 2 Double click Product 3 Click the blank record icon El 4 Type the product name or number in the Product field A Product E oj xj Miscellaneous 1 Miscellaneous 2 Picture Product 140 Catalog 1 40 00011111 SKU 8234757934 Manufacturer y UPC 2894578345 Alt Product Po EAN 5837589345 Commodity Code 39670 St
99. 4 000 00 29 750 00 33 750 00 10 00 20 00 3 Shipping International Documents Document SendSuite Shipping Field Source Invoice Number SH BIlINr SH ScheduledShipDate pace Terms phein p Charge Terms L sT one SH ChargeTerms Ship To name vUltimateCons Selects one address etc vAgent If no selection is made in SH UltimateConsID then the system populates vUltimateCons with information from vConsignee Sold To name vSold To address etc Vendor name vExportAlternateShipper If no selection is made in address etc SH AltShipperlD then the system populates vExportAlternateShipper with information from vShipper zre address etc arte address etc ee o AO Mmo Service L Service one SH PreSpecService Port of Export SH PortOfExportName For shipments to Canada only IL ProductQuantity lines A a Weight Total Volume SH TotalVolume Total Quantity Sum IL ProductQuantity is the sum of all the lines 3 8 SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Shipping International Document SendSuite Shipping Documents Field Source Commercial Pro Number Invoice L MasterTrackingNr L ProNr SH PreSpecProNumber If this is a multipiece shipment then the system looks at Master TrackingNr Otherwise it selects one of the others Country of SH CountryOf Transhipment For shipments to Canada TransShipment only Department SH De
100. 5 22 5 23 5 24 5 25 5 26 5 27 5 28 5 29 5 30 5 31 5 32 5 33 available tasks 5 20 5 21 5 22 5 23 creating a task group 5 23 adding tasks 5 24 modifying 5 26 running from Windows 5 29 5 30 5 31 5 32 5 33 small package manifest 5 28 starting 5 26 terminating 5 27 Thin Client Report See Reports Tracking Numbers 2 18 2 19 Transaction Log 1 21 U Upgrading version compatibility B 2 User Authentication 5 37 5 38 5 39 Users adding to a group 5 8 assigning individual user rights to 5 9 data visibility 5 6 defaults 5 5 importing 5 15 5 16 properties and permissions 5 5 5 6 5 7 5 8 5 9 setting up 5 4 V VB Script attaching to an integration map 8 61 attaching to a shipping screen 8 61 importing script 4 23 parsing 8 61 writing 4 23 4 24 Version compatibility operating system B 2 upgrading B 2 with SendSuite Desktop B 3 W Windows Authentication See User Authentication X XML Integration 8 38 8 39 8 40 8 41 8 42 8 43 8 44 8 45 8 46 8 47 File Link 8 55 8 56 integration in 8 38 8 39 8 40 8 41 8 42 8 43 8 44 8 45 8 46 8 47 host field properties 8 46 mapping fields 8 43 8 44 8 45 map settings 8 40 8 41 8 42 SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide integration out 8 48 8 49 8 50 8 51 8 52 8 53 8 04 mapping the fields 8 51 8 52 8 53 map settings 8 49 8 50 8 51 Z Zero Rate Carrier 6 52 6 53 6 54 6 55 6 56 SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite
101. A A 2 24 Setting Routing Instruction Priority oooonccoooo oo 2 25 Adding a Route ID Field to the Shipment Processing SEA E E E E E ee eree ee ena eine eres 2 25 A E reer er E ree ne ree 2 26 GrOUR reread aa eee 2 26 Pan O ano tee lee ee 2 26 DIGIC MEQ C e Ea eran eee 2 27 ACCOMMMG CAT S T E E T antec A teaser E ys 2 28 Configuring Accounts and Account Sets ccccoocccccoo 2 28 Creating ACCOUNTS A E heen e ieee eee 2 28 Administrator Guide 2 1 Supporting Data Creating Account Sets a A a a a E E E 2 28 O A a accents a E E E 2 29 Using the Accounting Fields ooooooooccccccccccinccccccnnnconanoss 2 29 Additional Supporting Qata aa aE a A E a e 2 30 SVSICMIC OM OUNANON Aa e E A anon E 2 30 AUO NONDE A A oe ae ie N T 2 30 Privacy Statement and Legal Notice 2 31 POVO O 2 31 Workstation Configuration ooocccccocconcconocoononnconononnnss 2 32 EMS O e E erneere 2 32 Perper SOU acs enteras ee ee A a 2 32 E MICK OSTU A redeem a eee ae 2 33 ACCO Gd axe oa oso ethane anced Ze Cunrency Exenange ada ca daa eterna er 2 33 Pala PE E ne Pern ere ee E eee 2 33 Delors giggle gears reer ree ech eee rere rere ree eres 2 34 DISTANCE APRA OOO 2 34 ESO A o A AA N 2 35 BOCK OUS A ce sateaite E e E neo eroraa tne tanar 2 35 EXPO LICENCO E sat E a easee eee eee 2 36 FEO ClASS mma aaa E 2 36 O 2 37 ATS alee eee peers ee Sere mre rane eae en eee eee ener 2 38 Lello AU A tine renee
102. ATES CUSTOMS SERVICE Paperwork Reducton oe NORTH AMERICAN FREE TRADE AGREEMENT NAFTA Certificate Certificate of Origin of Origin MCPR 121 11 121 32 BLANKET PERCH CS Maurie L EXPORTER MAME AND ADORESS Pitney Bowes Shipping 10800 Lyndal Avenue South MINNEAPOLIS MN DRA ee US UNITED STATES FROM ADC MA cacon TAX IDENTIFICATION NUMBER TO 555221111 1 PROOUICER NAME AND ACORESS Al IMPORTER NAME AND ADDRESS o Sold To Name 101 Sold to Dr Sa MINNEAPOLIS MN 55408 di US UNITED STATES TAX IDENTIFICATION NUMBER TAX IDENTIFICATION MAER 8883377 A io DESCRIPTION OF GOCE a a CRIN Bill Me 10058 Inti101 MX International Product Descriptio Inthig2 JP Intemational Product Description number 2 ICertafy Thai oes Seta o THE INFORMATION ON THIS DOCUMENT IS TRUE AND ACCURATE ANID ASSUME THE RESPONSIBILITY FOR PROVING SUCH REPRESENTATIONS UNDERSTAND THAT I AM LIABLE POR ANY FALSE STATEMENTS FOR MATERIAL OMISSION MADE ON IN CONMECTION WITH THIS DOCUMENT AGREE TO MAINTAIN AND PRESENT UPON REQUEST BOCUMENTATIOA NECESSARY TO SUPPORT THIS CERTIFICATE AND TO INFORM IN WRITING ALL PERSONS TO WHOM THE CERTIFICATE WAS GIVEN OF ANY CHANGES THAT WOULD AFFECT THE ACCURACY OR VALIDITY OF THIS CERTIFICATE THE GOODS ORHHNATED IN THE TERRITORY OF ONE OR MORE OF THE PARTIES AND IMPLY WITH THE ORIGIN REQUIREMENTS it i Al ao IN THE NORTH AMERICAN FREE TRADE AGREEMENT AND UNLESS SPECIFICALLY EXEMPTED IN ARTICLE 411 OR ANNEX 401 THERE HAS BEEN NO F
103. Administrator Guide Tools 5 Task Scheduler 14 Enter a user name and password confirm the password then click Next Scheduled Task Wizard xj Enter the name and password of a user The task will run as ifitwere started by that user Running Tasks From Windows Task Scheduler Enter the username Enter the password Confirm password Ifa password is not entered scheduled tasks might not run Scheduled Task Wizard ou have successtully scheduled the following task B opbTMSTaskScheduler Nightly Windows will perform this task At S00 PM every day starting 10 26 2006 Click Finish to add this task to your windows schedule 16 Click Finish SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 5 31 5 Tools Task Scheduler Running Tasks From Windows Task Scheduler 5 32 17 Type the name of the task group in the Run box afterthe final quotation mark For example C Program Files Pitney Bowes SendSuite Shipping pb TMS TaskScheduler exe Nightly NOTE If the name of the task group contains spaces the name must also be enclosed in double quotes For example C Program Files Pitney Bowes SendSuite Shipping pb TMS TaskScheduler exe End Of Day pbTMSTaskScheduler Nightly Task Schedule Settings Security CAWINDOWS Tasks pbTMSTaskScheduler Nightly job Browse Start in C Program Files PBTranscape Conquest Comments
104. BN field 40 Type Lbs in the Wgt Break Unit field and then press Tab 41 Type 0 zero for a low weight and 99999 for a high weight 42 Type 90000 in the Min Charge field 6 44 SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Manual Rating Creating the Manual Carrier 43 Type 1 the Rate field 44 Click Save and then click Close 45 Close the Tariff Setup 46 Open Carrier Setup 47 Click in the last line in the table Tariffs 6 AA Carrier Setup Accessorial Incomp Carrier Profile Accessorial Lanes Absolute Minimums Discounts Shipper ID CarrierID EftDate Exp Date ScAC Package Type Tariff ID E UPS 1okex IEP Exp Date o UPS 10KBX UPELBO201 UPS fiy f2002 UPS 25KBX IEP UPEHBOZ201 usPs_ 6 30 2002 usps LTR PM USPS10206 usps Pm USPSPO206 po uses po JarpD_ usPs40206 po uses po JarD_ usPsio20 Pp uses TCM USPSDOZOG po uses po sssp__ USPSASPOZO6 po uses ssPa USPS4SA0206 o uses poo ssPe a UsPS4sB0206 PCPS TCSP USPS4BPO206 po uses po gt gt gt fue usPS4LIo206 PCPS J6erpD usPsLO206 PCPS CPA USPSIPAO20S po uses TCSP SC USPSIPSO206 po uses CSIP USPSIGPMO206 WPXP_ 1if1 20058 SY Pak LL Cs YF5000108 30 2002 30 2002 30 2002 30 2002 30 2002 30 2002 30 2002 Ea U oo Qu o Po o o ro Allow Consolidation ly Tariff IMANI Service me Discount Application Rate P
105. Backup bak The Device name should display on the Choose Restore Destination dialog box 14 Click OK 15 From the Choose Restore Devices dialog box click OK SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Restoring the SendSuite Database Restoring the SQL Database SendSuite Shipping Server 1 16 Click the Options tab and review the restore options Restore database X General Options l Ejecttapes if any after restoring each backup Prompt before restoring each backup Force restore over existing database Read trom media Restore database files as Logical file name Move to physical file name Recovery completion state Leave database operational No additional transaction logs can be restored C Leave database nonoperational but able to restore additional transaction logs C Leave database read only and able to restore additional transaction logs Undo file CAProgram Files Microsoft SOL Serve MSSOMBACKUPAUNDO_ cancer Ho 17 Click OK The Restore process begins When the backup process is complete the following message is displayed Restore of database ConquestDB completed successfully 18 Click OK to clear the message box 19 From the Tools menu select SQL Query Analyzer 20 Click the Open button 21 Find DBSync sal 22 This file resets the users on the ConquestDB and Master databases The file can be found in C
106. C COLOn eae ee area 6 3 SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide ix Table of Contents SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping TAS CU A O SHUR rnc etc a Acie eC eee 6 4 Tani Header 1 aD rs a r Aa E tea E en sak eae an arene 6 4 ZOnE RBN TAO weeds cetera tance O 6 5 lage oko at Be 6 emanate E A mate nee Aa E rye mene 6 9 Creating a Custom LTL Tariff from Scratch ooomccc o 6 11 SCAC Code TE ee E ane ae N 6 11 Adaress Record A ee ot ee ene ese ae AT 6 12 ANTE SeU ee a a ee ee wn er ea ee teen 6 13 Tan Header TaD see A een et ae eee 6 13 LON TAO A 6 14 PACSI DEE a a A A mere E Creer yom 6 17 Cann o STUD EAE T a ee A E E E dia 6 19 TA AGCCSSONIGIS Steet A a AE E A E A ET 6 23 Ta WDISCOUMIS a hetero 6 26 Carnero envice Days TE ee cee ea Sa nomena nomen ea eer cae aa 6 28 AIT AAI E T reste ce neyctaviee ene aoe E eeis er oe eee 6 30 Tarif Absolute MiniMUMmS oa ee 6 32 Tariff Accessorial Incompatibility coooonccconiccconnoconnnoo oo 6 34 Temporary Tariff Increase ooocccccncccononoccnoneocnnonanoncanonenon 6 35 NN dete nae fete tence Weenie nla E ties 6 37 Clone a Carner Slip ox na 6 37 Create the Carrier Address Record coooccoccocononooo o 6 39 Set Up Carrier PRO Numbers or Tracking Numbers 6 40 Selector Create a Label a ses tee 6 40 Add Carrier to Rate Shop Group and or Routing Instr 6 40 E aaun e e sacs a a atau sae ay ie A eaten es 6 41 Creating the Manual Carrier
107. Center J Trading Partner l Ship For T Agent l Hold At Location Address2 l Manufacturer l Haz Attention Broker l Sold To M Seller Benef T Alt Return Addr Alt Zip Code Carrier Shipper SCAC lESTM y Express Carrier l IATA Country lus y Perm Temp Permanent County Phone f Ext Fax f Ext International No Pay Term Carrier Accounts Save Delete Close Type the new carrier s SCAC code in the Address ID field Type the new carrier s name in the Name field Select the Carrier checkbox Type the new carrier s SCAC Code in the SCAC Code field on the Carrier tab Does the new carrier have an IATA code If it does then type the two to three letter IATA code in the IATA field If not leave that field blank Does the carrier carry international shipments If so select Yes in the International field If not select No in that field Does the carrier have payment terms If so type the number of the carrier s payment terms for example 10 days or 30 days in the Pay Term field If not leave the field blank Select Express Carrier if this carrier considers itself express Click Save then click Close Close the Data folder SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 6 3 6 Tariffs Creating a Custom Parcel Tariff from Scratch Tariff Setup ee NOTE From this point on we will refer to the line marked with a as the Ne
108. Close a Type the low origin ZIP code in the Low Origin field b Type the high origin ZIP code in the High Origin field the high and low origins can be the same c Type the low destination ZIP code in the Low Destination field d Type the high destination ZIP code in the High Destination field the high and low destinations can be the same e Create a Zone RBN code and type it in the Zone RBN field f Click Save then click Close SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Creating a Custom LTL Tariff from Scratch Tariff Setup NOTE If your carrier has different rates for different freight classes then you must create a rate for each of those freight classes If the rate is for FAK then be sure to complete the FAK instructions found in Chapter 7 Tariffs 6 Rates Tab You must create rates that support every Zone RBN that you created while in the Zone RBN tab You can make individual rates for each Zone RBN or you can create a rate that applies to a range of Zones RBNs You just must be certain that every Zone RBN has a rate that supports it You must also create a rate that supports every freight class If the carrier does not specify different rates for different freight classes then you can create an FAK rate If you decide to create an FAK rate then you must also complete the instructions to create an FAK record see Tariff FAK elsewhere in this chapter In the Tariff Setup wi
109. Coe ig eb Sg SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 3 17 3 Shipping International Documents SED 3 18 1a Principle Party 1b USPPI EIN IRS or ID Number vShipper ShipperIRSNR vShipper SS 1c Parties to Transaction SH ShipperConsRelated Document Field SendSuite Shipping Source 2 Date of Exportation SH ScheduledShipDate Selects one SH ActualShipDate 3 Transportation Reference No 4a Ultimate Consignee or FTZ No 7 Country of Ultimate Destination 9 Mode of Transport 10 Exporting Carrier SH BookingNr Selects one L MasterTrackingNr L ProNumber SH PreSpecProNumber vUltimateCons If no selection is made in SH UltimateConslID then the system populates vUltimateCons with information from vConsignee 4b Intermediate vintermediate Consignee 5 ForwardingAgent vAgent 6 Point state of Origin vShipper ShipperState Selects one SH FtzNr vUltimateCons If no selection ConsCountryName is made in SH UltimateConslID then the system populates vUltimateCons with information from vConsignee 8 Loading Pier SH LoadingPier A L Service Selects one then SH PreSpecService converts the value to Air OCN etc SH VesselVoyageNr If the mode of vCarrier Name transport has an OCN value then the system uses VesselVoyageNr Otherwise it uses vCarrier Name SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Internatio
110. Commodity Data Adding a Commodity Code 2 8 The commodity code is stored in tb Commodity The commodity code is related to a value on tb lFreightClass SendSuite uses the freight class to query LTL tariffs In order to use LTL class tariffs each line on the shipping screen must have a commodity code When SendSuite prints the bill of lading it references tb Commodity by the Commodity Code then imports the description and freight class to the bill of lading The commodity code does not appear on the bill of lading If you want the code to appear then you can make it part of the Description To add a commodity while in the Supporting Data module 1 2 3 4 Open the Data folder in the Supporting Data Selection window Double click Commodity Click the blank record icon Ll Populate the following fields e Commodity Code e Description Hazard Info e Freight Class e Division PA commodity eee l x Commodity Commodity Code oo X Cargo Air Only M Description Hazard Commodity Code 100 a El Freight Class 100 y Division DMT y Department s00 y Account 98765 NMFC Record Date 04 16 04 Hazardous Hazardous No 7 Haz Class Description 2 Pack Group 7 UN ID o y Accessible Dangerous Goods No y Contact DOT Label Type OOOO Save Delete Close If necessary populate the other fields listed in the Commodity window Click Save SVTS91
111. Creating a Custom LTL Tariff from Scratch Tariff Setup NOTE From this point on we will refer to the line marked with a as the New Recoro line AAA NOTE Pitney Bowes recommends that you use the carriers SCAC code followed by a number for the tariff revision For example if Joe s Delivery s SCAC is JOES then type JOES1 as the Tariff Revision ID A Tariffs 6 To set up a Carrier s tariff 1 Open the Supporting Data module from the Control Center Open the Carrier amp Labels folder Open the Rates folder Double click Tariff Setup to display the Tariff Setup window Complete the instructions listed below to enter the correct data on the following tabs e Tariff header tab e Zone RBN tab e Rates tab pl a IN Tariff Header Tab Under the Tariff Header tab of the Tariff Setup window 1 Scroll to the bottom of the list of tariffs Click anywhere in the last empty line which is marked with a in the far left gray column Rate Data Source c 2may LILAZ R s Class Rates table C AIRB HYT heavyweight Binary package Z tariffs Distance Rates table C FedEx On Site Server C CZAR C UPS CWT hundredweight C Emery Rates Server C CZAR Lite C FEDX HYT hundredweight C AIRB Ground CWT C Package Rates Table C RPS MWT multiweight C CSI Rates Server Zone RBN Data Source C Zone RBN built into tariff C ZIP to Zone ZIP to Zone ID Zone index E LHFGLTL
112. Double click Create a New User Add a New User x Welcome to the User Creation wizard It allows you to 3 create a new user for this application What is the Login ID of the new user UShipper What is the real name of the new user Joe Shipper Password Confirm Password Akk You can include a comment for the new user Add Cancel Type the user s Login ID and Password The Real Name is optional Comments are also optional Most comments you input are plain text that can only be seen by the administrator Click Add SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Configuring Groups and Users Editing the User Properties and Permissions EXAMPLE In the example to the right the User has the following Account visibility options e The User can view all Account Set IDs e The User can view all Account IDs The default on the shipping screen is GMS e The User can only view the Sub Account IDs that are in the GMS Finance Account Visibility Group e The User can only view the Sub Sub Account IDs that are in the PBDS Cargo and PBDS Shipping Account Visibility Groups NOTE By leaving any of the Default drop downs blank the user will have to select a screen or value for that field Tools 5 To display the User Properties dialog box 1 Right click on the user or group you just created 2 Select Properties Setting the User s Defaults On the Genera
113. E This filter can be selected the next time the report is run by clicking the drop down arrow next to the Selection ID field SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Type the name of the filter Click the OK button Reports 4 optional Use the Preview button to generate the report using the entered criteria optional Use the Test Filter button to display the raw report data below the selection fields 4 3 4 Reports Creating Custom Reports Selecting a Report to Modify NOTE You can only modify the data normally appearing on a report For example since the Shipment Activity report does not have order information on it you cannot get the customers purchase order number on that report Rk Modifying the Report Data NOTE The Fields column lists how the data will appear on the report The odd numbers represent the column labels and the even numbers represent the data fields To change the order of information on the report you must change the contents of the Label and Data Field columns 4 4 You can modify the column layout data selection and total columns for any of Sendsuite s standard reports To select a report to modify 1 Open the Reports module from the Control Center 2 Click Custom gt Crystal Report on the menu bar 3 Click the drop down arrow in the Report Name field and select the report you want to modify General
114. EE E thet 2 39 MOOG COO Gnas ee ce aed eae 2 39 KORU ope E A EA rere ree thera re reer eric 2 40 o meee neha earns 2 40 NACO E Ol semana een Ceres AE 2 40 Maeso cla os ios eae nee ee 2 41 Airborne COMMISSION a a a a E a e 2 41 RA a e R E E E AA a 2 41 Configure StreetSmart Data oooccciconnncccocnnocconon 2 42 ONTR OnTrac COMMUNICATION ooccccoooo 2 42 EANC Load EANG Ae cesar eee ee 2 42 SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 2 2 Supporting Data UR An e AP A 2 42 BE A AE O 2 43 E A a E e es 2 43 Camer SSUP E a a tat O 2 43 Binary Carmer DAA vcr war E a needs ar 2 43 cd 2 43 A aman E aires A 2 44 PADO o EE N dae ca meas ntsc 2 44 ale SOD GhOUS ad coo ae 2 45 HON IIS IUCN e ean tee 2 45 NU A A came ian tedn aekeeeans 2 45 Shipment Planning S tup ccccccssssssccecsssnssseeesssaeeees 2 45 E eria A a a a a a ndasd 2 46 B ra Seng a E E A a E E A E eas 2 46 2 3 SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 2 Supporting Data Consignee Data Adding a Consignee 2 4 In SendSuite the Consignee represents the party that the shipment is going to Consignee information is stored in tblAddress The information also may display on the shipping screen although the shipping screen is using vConsignee Complete the following steps to add a consignee while in the Supporting Data module To add a consignee AL A A A ES 14 Open the Data folder i
115. Feld a a a E eed E A ate 2 10 International Products n r e e a 2 11 UA A aoe anne e ee te E E 2 12 AQUINO a Remark COJE r ae Aa E a ee 2 12 Administrator Guide iii Table of Contents SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Standard Carrier Alpha Codes SCAC coocccccoconcccconococoncnnnos 2 13 SS A eh rece ene ete Cn eee ne orate 2 14 Creating a Shipper Alere o a a a A E a 2 14 Deleting a Shipper Aler E A a a a E 2 15 SmpperAanding ECCS to Serer te a E 2 16 Setting uo PRO Numbers and Tracking Numbers 2 18 Pale SNOP GOURS A E a ee E een E A eee 2 20 Creating Rate Shop GrOUDS o e r aa aa a a 2 20 QURANI srs A E A E ee PaaS nanote ene 2 21 Routing MSU CUONS Aee A muse E A E cnehan enact 2 22 Setting up Routing InStructiONS ccoooocccncccoononnnonos 2 22 Applying Routing Instructions to a Consignee Agent or A O 2 24 Setting Routing Instruction Priority ococccocoom o o 2 25 Adding a Route ID Field to the Shipment Processing O 7 E POE E A sas mar dramna E 2 25 BACA ee A tie nate E Tian Pee Monae ec ectea eax earns 2 26 6 0 ocean tere rine cee Penryn meer mene nee pny een pees eres ene 2 26 Rian SNIPEN E he Os ee Ore ee ee aed E AT 2 26 BI GICING Y tex cet fa coer et een oe ean A a Rear AN 2 27 ACCOUMUNG FONU OS E were arcu rien incre a rs 2 28 Configuring Accounts and Account Sets cccooccc oo 2 28 Cr mar aA e oer E eee ee 2 28 Creating Account Sets T a a ee e 2 28 Accoun VANCAUOM a a
116. GOD AM S e ad declaedVkel AA a A a Ship DatefroDAY Sasa Se SS Shipper item FitDesc cc El ets ee eee ee one ee a e e e e a e e e ame a la am ames amme ammi ae ame amo amo ammi ammi ame ame amejaa ae a a a a a a a a a a a e 7 Save your changes SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Tariffs 6 Manual Rating This allows you to enter any carrier and have the rates associated with the tariff set up for manual rates Processing a To process a shipment using manual rates Shipment Using 1 In the SendSuite thin client open the custom shipping screen you created in Manual Rates the previous section in this chapter 2 Select or create a shipment ES SendSuite Shipping Actions Setup Reports eQuery Help Line tems Remarks special Services FreightCosts Address Information Camier PackageGrpID Freight Consignee Name Merigold Technolo Carrier Address 595 E King Stret service city CHICAGO P State JIL Pp Zip 60601 Carrier Del of Jo H Country US PR F PRO mr Charge Terms PPD id attention Rick Peterson zone Date Req Phone 5555555555 Billable wt COD Amt 0 00 Declared value 0 00 Ship A 0 24 2006 Gross Charges Cst Of Gds Sold 0 00 Item Frt Desc EAS MOTTA AA le NX Type the carrier in the Carrier field Select LTL from the Service drop down menu Type an appropriate Shipper in the Shipper
117. General Instructions NOTE Make sure that you choose the same SendSuite table for the host field properties on the parent node matches the table used selected for the view 8 48 When preparing XML Out Integration in SendSuite you will follow this general set of instructions There is considerable detail when completing these steps so refer to the pages that follow for more detail The following steps are required unless noted otherwise 1 2 3 4 From the Control Center open the Integration module From the File menu select New or click the New button Select XML Data Exchange from the list of file types then click OK Set up the map properties see XML Map Settings elsewhere in this chapter for more information a For the direction select Out b Identify the XML file that the data will be going to c If applicable identify any Batch Files that will run with the map d If applicable identify a conditional logic VB Script that will run with the map e Select the view that will be used this determines the SendSuite tables that can be mapped to or from f Identify the Selection Criteria that will be used to select the data going out Map the fields see Mapping the Fields elsewhere in this chapter for more information Modify the Host Field Properties see Host Field Properties XML Out elsewhere in this chapter for more information a For each parent node select the SendSuite table tha
118. Headers Custom Errors hen connecting to this resource the content should come from A directory located on this computer A share located on another computer Aredirection to a URL Local Path CAinetpub wwwrootleQuest Browse Script source access i Log visits IY Read M Index this resource Iv Write Directory browsing Application Settings Application name eQuest Remove starting point lt Detault Web site gt eQuest Execute Permissions Scripts only Application Protection Low MIS Process crea SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide IIS Settings Time Out NOTE Do NOT remove the checkmark next to Enable session state The user must maintain a session in order to communicate with the SendSuite Shipping components SSS SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 8 On the App Options tab change the Session timeout Application Configuration Apa iy 1 3 1 SendSuite Shipping Server IIS Settings Logo NOTE lf users do not see the new logo they may need to clear the old one from their cache They can do this by deleting their tempo rary Internet files from Internet Explorer To delete these files follow the instructions to the right 1 4 In the upper left corner of all screens a logo is displayed The Pitney Bowes logo is automatically installed with the product Shipping Actions Setup Reports
119. If the host file uses a delimiter other than any in the list select Custom Defined e Delimiter This field is enabled only for Custom Defined formats Type the character that is used to mark each new field in the host file SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Data Mapper Data Map Settings Integration 8 Release Type the character that is used to distinguish a character from a delimiter This field is most commonly used when the host file is comma delimited but some records in the host file contain commas The release character precedes the character that is part of the data set For example consider the following address record 10800 Lyndale Ave South Suite 300 Bloomington MN 55420 If you want to read the suite number as part of the address you need to tell SendSuite to ignore the comma or it will think that information is supposed to go in the next field In this case the text file should read 10800 Lyndale Ave South Suite 300 Bloomington MN 55420 where the release character is This preserves the suite number as part of the address record Without the release the Data Map would interpret that data as belonging to the next field making the suite number the city the city would then be in the state field the state in the ZIP and so on Save host file after processing You can use this feature to track of the data being received or sent out of the system After SendS
120. Integration D at a M al p pe r PB TMS Integration DMComma MAP NE 0 x pa File Edit View Operations Host Fields Tables Map Window Help 591 x gaml al se rx HE Ga 2 Ma p p n g t h e H ost Fields Conquest Fields E B Shipment Header and Shipment Line E tblCommodity Fi e I d S E Order tblFreightClass E consID tbiPayor cct nothing tbiProduct E Name tbliShipmentHeade B Address tbiShipmentLine E nothing2 Account B city amp Bill tem Number B state Bil Number gt Order E zip D Commodity Code gt commodity E country e Container Count B phone Y CstDfGds Sold A carier Y Department B servuce Division B pieces SY DiyicewWeight BB commodity Y Hazardous Anty E nothing3 Y Hazardous Unit y Height e Host Item Nr 7 ltem Frt Desc D LabPack amp Length Y LtCreditRef Nr Y DuterBoxCount Oversized Package Type SD Pallet Count pe Price Gds Sold Y Product Nr Y RecordDate y Shippable Pieces D gt pieces Volume Weight Width FEB User Fields FEB vAltShipper Fa b Ready m 2 Adding Host Fields New Map When creating a map for the first time the first thing you must do is define the fields on the ASCII file See the example on page 8 15 for a line of sample data along with each element s corresponding field To add host fields 1 From the Host Fields menu select Add a Host Field 2 Type the name you want to use for the host field in the
121. It also will clear the ActualShipDate field Simulate trip sub event Undo Rates This removes routes and rates that were set by the Rate Shipment event deletes the associated record from tibLoad and re saves the shipment If a tracking or PRO number was assigned to the shipment when it was rated that number is removed The next time the shipment is rated a new tracking or PRO number will be generated If the shipment has been manifested the user will not be allowed to perform this sub event Validate Manifest This checks to make sure all the fields needed Fields for manifesting are complete If a field required is not complete then the system prompts the user Verify Account ID Reads from tb Division and verifies the AccountID exists in the table Verify Sub Account Reads from tblDepartment and verifies the ID SubAccountlD exists in the table Verify Sub Sub Reads from tblAccount and verifies the Account ID SubSubAccountID exists in the table Void Post Manifest This feature allows you to void a UPS shipment after the manifest has been transmitted The sub event will take the use to myups com where you can logon and void the package The sub event makes no changes to the data in SendSuite Shipping Void Online Postage This feature is not supported at this time Void Shipment This marks the shipment as Voided A shipment cannot be unvoided Web Track This uses an internet connection to track the shipment on
122. Lanes Absolute Min Lane ID PBODFL9912 y Country lus State FL City p Low Origin HighOrigin Low Dest High Dest po Effective Date 01 01 05 Expiration Date i Weight Unit LBS Jirect Interline D m Minimum Charges Ls Nr Minimum Charge Weight i 10 00 100 2 150 00 500 1000 Delete Line s Clear Save Delete Close 12 Type any information about the lane in which these minimums apply For example if the minimums apply only to deliveries in California then select that state If your minimums apply to all delivery destinations leave all the white fields blank 6 32 SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Tariffs 6 Tariff Absolute 13 Type the effective date of the minimums in the Effective Date field Minimums 14 Click the drop down arrow in the Weight Unit field and select the unit of measure you will use for the weight breaks 15 Type information regarding the minimums a Type the lowest weight at which the minimum charge will be assessed in the Weight column b Type the minimum charge for any shipment greater than that weight in the Minimum Charge column c Repeat these steps for all minimums defined by the carrier NOTE Direct vs Interline selections Direct indicates the carrier will ship the package the entire distance This is the default for SendSuite Shipping Interline indicates that the c
123. Model J670 Printer Product Reference Manual SV60077 PL Model J670 Printer Product Parts List SV60079 Model J670 Printer Operating Guide SV60442 Model J676 Printer User s Manual J680 High Speed Forms SV60111 Model J680 Printer Printer Product Reference Manual SV60111 PL Model J680 Printer Product Parts List SV60110 Model J680 Printer Operating Guide J683 Laser Printer SV60465 J683 User s Guide J685 Laser Printer with Duplex Unit Label Printers J693 Datamax Label SV60824 J693 Operator s Manual Printer J695 Datamax Label Printer 1E05 Zebra 200 DPI SV61120 Printer Instructions Printer 1E08 Zebra 200 DPI Printer SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide A 3 A Supported Peripherals Manuals for Scales Peripherals Tabletop Scale V11695 Install Instructions Scale amp Parts Manual JN6X JN60 JN64 150 SV60621 JN6X Scale Service Manual los Rollertop Scale JO6X J060 J064 200 SV60155 Model J064 Scale Product Reference los Rollertop Scale Manual SV60155 PL Model J064 Product Parts List J070 J075 100 lbs SV60045 J070 J075 Scale Product Reference Tabletop Scale Manual SV60045 PL J070 J075 Scale Product Parts Reference Guide JN75 100 lbs Tabletop SV60552 JN75 Scale Service Manual J075 N75 Toledo 2038 2138 1000 lbs Scale Mettler Toledo 2158 Lynx Floor Scale Scanners J765 Non Contact SV60651 Install
124. N State CT Country lus gt Min Sec Axiometric GeoUpdate Save Delete Close The Geograph table contains the geographic coordinates for all zip codes in the United States Use this information to calculate distance based rates You can modify a set of pre populated coordinates To have SendSuite calculate distances to Canada or Mexico manually enter the postal code and coordinates on this window Then go to the Distance window and have SendSuite load the distance from the PC Miler data file Geograph Batch Update Use this table to load updates from a Geograph Update file into your SendSuite system Updates will periodically be provided to you SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 2 37 2 Supporting Data Additional HTS Supporting lojx Data HTS ID 1234555655 7 Data HTS Description Computer Equipment El HTS Quantity EACH HTS Quantity ECON Validated License Effective ini Expiration Date i Update Date if Record Date 04 04 00 Save Delete Close A harmonized code is like an international commodity code The shipper should be familiar with their HTS codes All products being exported to another country must be assigned their appropriate Harmonized Tariff Schedule HTS number as defined by the International Standards Organization ISO The first six digits of the HTS number serves as a common identification for the product in all countries Th
125. OM pb_ tolReportFilterFieldList SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Importing External Reports Availability of Data NOTE Some views pull data from tables that are not currently in use For example if you were to use vExportSLl you would get no data on your report because your system is not populating data in these fields Reports 4 Data Available Each table or view contains different information Some of the common tables and views are explained below L vReportShipmentLoads This view contains the information about a carrier s load It contains the Shipment Header Load and associated address information O vReportShipmentLines The view contains the physical properties of the shipping goods and includes the multiple shipments linked to the Bill Number It contains the Shipment Header Shipment Line Load Cost SWOG and address information O tbiStatusHeader This table contains information for the status of shipments that are checked by e Track CL vShipper The view combines information form tblAddress and tblCountry CO vReportShipments This view contains the Shipment Header and associated address information OO vConsignee The view combines information form tblAddress and tbICountry O vShipFor The view combines information form tblAddress and tblICountry The Ship For address is a location such as a retail store where the goods will be forwarded by the
126. Prints only onthelast Grand Total Label page but prints before the page footer Usually used for grand totals Usually used to hold page numbers copyright etc Page Vertical lines used in the Borders created Detail section They line using the Shape tool up with the shaped used This border was applied in the Group Header and to the Text Box using Footer sections the Format menu SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Creating Custom Reports for the Shipping Workstation Creating a New Thin Client Report Reports 4 Summary Fields In the footers you can summarize your data by applying the following functions O Sum O Count O Maximum O Average O Minimum O Variance To apply a summary create a text box in a footer and then modify the settings in the Property Toolbox In the SummaryFunc field select the type of summary you want to print Summar Func 0 ddSFSum Summary far Our GroupHeader 1 summaryRunning 2 ddsR All Summary Type 3 ddSMSubTotal If the summary is for a group select the group name in the SummaryGroup field Otherwise leave this field blank If you want a total on each page select an option from the SummaryRunning drop down You must make a selection from this drop down E If you want the running total to reflect just the current group select 1 ddSRGroup E If you want the running total to reflect the values from all groups select 2 ddSRAIl From the Summ
127. Program Files PBTranscape Conquest CQAttach Open the file and execute it 22 Close the Query Analyzer and Enterprise Manager SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 1 25 This Page Intentionally Blank 1 26 SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Supporting Data SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Consigne E DRA tooo Da eee 2 4 AGING Gi CONSIONCE a eto eine ea eae 2 4 COUNTY Ofc hike meee rte eee er nce mer nee ery ener eer E eer eer 2 6 Modifying Country Dala a E E E N E 2 7 COMMON DUA oa ee e So 2 8 Adding a Commodity COJE ccccoooonccncccooncnncnoonononnnos 2 8 Produce DAIT E E a E E e A 2 9 AMO A Rodut ma a a e DE E a E E 2 9 Produc Fields a a E E ee E 2 10 International ProdUCtS ii aeree aei 2 11 Remak C A ee ea A E e A eerie 2 12 Adding a Remark Code Iaa a EE e Ee 2 12 Standard Carrier Alpha Codes SCAC oocccccocociccconcoccnnnonoos 2 13 SITIOS MN o 2 14 Creating a Shipper Alert i Ae a a e ea Aa aa 2 14 Deleting a Shipper Alert ooooccccccccnconccccononoconononnnnnos 2 15 Shipper Handling Feesn aa aoai a e E ae 2 16 Setting Up PRO Numbers and Tracking Numbers 2 18 Rale SHO GOUDSE E T a a A a 2 20 Creating Rate Shop GrOUDS mon aa aaa a a A E 2 20 QUA RAUNO E E E rere E E reer E rere Te 2 21 FOUNO MASTRUCHOMS al E E A eos 2 22 Setting Up Routing INStructiONS ooooccccooonnconcononoonooo 2 22 Applying Routing Instructions to a Consignee Agent or A
128. RO from the SCAC drop down menu Tanti petanta Package Type s Package Desc Rale Dala Source Binary LTL Z taritis C AIRB HWT heavyweight C Binary package Z taritis Distance Ral FedEx On Site Server FT CZAR C UPS CWT hundredweight C Emery Rates Server C CZAR Lite C FEDX HWT hundredweight r AIRE Ground CWT C Package Rates Table RPS MWT multiweight CSI Rates Server Zone RBN Data Source Lane to Zone Lane to Zone ID Lane to Zone binary ile File name C Canada ZIP to Zone c Distance Rate Precision Weight Precision Sane a ee 6 52 SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Zero Rate Carrier 6 Creating the Tariff 7 8 9 a Tariffs 6 Tab to the Tariff Revision field and type ZERO Tab to the Service field The Tariff ID field should auto populate Select LTL as a service Type Zero Rate in the Description field Set the Eff Date to the beginning of the calendar year 01 01 06 Select Class Rates table under Rate Data Source 10 Select ZIP to Zone under Zone RBN Data Source a Type ZERO in the Zip to Zone ID field b Type 1 for the Zone index 11 Save and close the Tariff Details screen Setting the Zone Details To set the zone details 1 SS On the Tariff Setup screen select the ZERO tariff and click the Zone RBN tab Click Details Select ZERO from the ZIP to Zone ID drop down menu i 2TP to Z
129. Routing Instructions NOTE You can use a descriptive term such as Oversized or just a letter or number a b c or 1 2 etc 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Supporting Data 2 Type the label Populate the following fields e Criterion Click the drop down list and select the field SendSuite Shipping should look for when applying the routing instruction NOTE If you select Default as the criterion do not tab past the Units field If you do tab past the Units field SendSuite Shipping will force you to select a specific carrier and will not allow you to default to all carriers If you accidentally tab into the next fields you will get a series of error messages Click OK to exit these messages Then delete the line you created and start again e Units Select the unit of measurement to use if applicable e Low Val Enter the lowest value for which you want this instruction to be used to rate shipments e High Val Enter the highest value for which you want this instruction to be used to rate shipments if applicable Click the cursor in the Action field Click the drop down arrow in the Action field and select one of the following actions e G The Go to Label refers to another line in your routing instructions e C The Assign Carrier assigns a specific carrier or service e R The Rate Shop Group assigns a rate shop group e The Call for Instructions displays a
130. STINATION ECS ODE OF TRANSPORT poo i n 14 CARRIER IDENTIFICATION CODE 15 SHIPMENT REFERENCE NO load pier air UPS 10058 fat EXPORTING CARRIER TL MORT ow ORT 14 ENTRY NUMBER 17 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS United Parcel Service port of export See Below o O xo 12 PORT OF UNLOADING Were and air andy 4 E i EN OSD CODE ATED EXPORT TRACTION See Below re m se port of unloading M STHEDULE B DESCRIPTO OF COMIC se riunn 11 34 VALLES US dr DF l felling prin or cenit non prep on hl an mm 7 4 000 F i WIN VehickTitkeNr vehicle hos Licenselah CPT CRA DW F OERE KOLESE EXCEFTIOS PYMBDLAJUTAOREZATION 2 ECON hen pir SEE ABOVE PA 0504441 D Daly salad officer on empleos The LAPPI sheeda the karde nueve ascos k a aa BL cent dad ll Hakimni made and all torreon contained Paini ane brug aad porel and Hal har read and forwarding apm for cp omi ad cuicos pes e a documen HA banh bn ir Corre y os Fil Ca da Papo Diesin makorner dul cord al criminal peralta pacho head ca sabana Else or lada siemens hor n Ealing lo prosida he poquedod information of for PL poo 19 0 Sod 22 UDC Sor dbl AUSE Sec 1004 SL App Aii tg Confidential For ese ately for oficial setos e SURE St oh uN Export akipaza ane ade do imepartio Ber US Cities Das 1 AUTHENTICATIOS Wen rogard 23 Sep 2002 mapa o a O Fila ona mea os prnl Wey nti portadas bs nd tem Era aude cl o lp Coros Pret Dira cl Belay el cn Dnt Er Te
131. SendSuite will default delivery days to 0 unless you set them up See Carrier Service Days elsewhere in this chapter for instructions to set up carrier service days FAK Lanes Use this to set up freight of all kinds arrangements you have negotiated with your carriers See Tariff FAK elsewhere in this chapter for instructions to set up an FAK lane Absolute Min Lanes Use this to set up the minimum charge or weight your carrier requires For example an LTL carrier s tariff may go as low as 50 pounds but the carrier has told you they will not come to your warehouse unless you have 1 000 pounds to ship See Tariff Absolute Minimums elsewhere in this chapter for instructions to set up absolute minimum charges Accessorial Incompatibility Use this to tell SendSuite what accessorials cannot go together For example your carrier may support both inside delivery and hazardous materials but they will not support inside delivery of hazardous materials See Tariff Accessorial Incompatibility elsewhere in this chapter for instructions to set up accessorial incompatibility Tariff Increase Use this to set up temporary tariff increases until the actual new tariffs can be loaded See Temporary Tariff Increase elsewhere in this chapter for instructions to enter a tariff increase Service File Name This field is used to identify a data file used with the tariff This data file can contain supported postal codes country codes port codes
132. ShipmentLine as a separate record If you check this box SendSuite will consolidate multiple lines where the commodity or product code is the same For example SendSuite Shipping will create one line with 7 pieces from a host file with the following lines Skip record if record would be added to the conflict table SendSuite Shipping will not overwrite or update existing records in the database Instead duplicate records are added to tblShipmentHeaderConflict If you select this box SendSuite Shipping will skip the duplicate record and it will not add it to the database You can also control this behavior by setting the SendSuite Table properties see SendSuite Table Properties In in the next section of this chapter Locked Record Behavior Records are locked when they are in use by another application or user If SendSuite encounters a locked record your selection here determines what the system will do e Skip Record The record is skipped and not added to the database e Prompt User SendSuite will prompt the user to take action e Wait The system will retry after waiting the number of seconds you specify If the record is still locked the system will wait again until the record is unlocked SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 8 9 8 Integration Data Mapper Data Map Settings 8 10 SendSuite Table Properties In When importing data into SendSuite you can tell the system what
133. This map will be used for field choose the function that you will use NOTE Using the This the script for When you make a selection you will be able to use the script map will be used only for that function For example if you Data Mapper Shipment In you will for field for Shipment not be able to use the script with Shipment Processing screen P ing i lete OS A all cad 6 Begin writing the script by selecting an item from the Operations menu see below 7 Click the Save button and give the script a name This is the name you will see when you select the script from a drop down 8 58 SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Conditional Logic Scripting Conditional Logic Operations Operations Window Help Add Set Yalue Instruction Add Execute Command Instruction Add Comparison Test Instruction Add Message Box Instruction Add Skip Record Instruction Add Conditional I O instruction Add Display Field Value Instruction Add Jump Instruction Add Stop Script Instruction Add Link Table Instruction Add Abort Execution Instruction Run Data Mapper Host Date and Time Formats Host Integration B2B Interface Skip Record Stop Script What it does Set Value Assigns a value to a field Execute Command Runs an external exe com or bat Comparison Test Creates an IF statement Omits the current record A ee A ue during run time S dl in the script
134. URTHER PRODUCTION GR OPERATION OUTSIDE THE TERRITORIES 04 THE PARTIES AND THIS CERTIFICATE CONSISTS or_1_ paces INCLUDING ALL ATTACHMENTS 3 14 SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide International Documents NAFTA Certificate of Origin 1 Exporter 2 Blanket Period 4 Importer 5 Description of Goods HR Tariff Classification Number 7 Preference Criteria IL NAFTALeve 9 Net Cost SH NAFTAEffectiveDate SH NAFTAExpirationDate SH IntIMfg Type vManufacturer vSoldTo vUltimateCons vAgent SH BIlINr IL ProductNr IL ProductDescription IL HTSNr IL NAFTAPrefCrit IL INAFTANetCost IL NAFTANetBeginDate IL LNAFTANetEndDate 10 Country of IL CountryMfg Origin SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Shipping 3 Document Field SendSuite Shipping Source vExportAlternateShipper If no selection is made in SH AltShipperlD then the system populates vExportAlternateShipper with information from vShipper Prints both These dates are necessary only when you are printing one certificate that will cover all shipments during the blanket period If no selection is made in SH ManufacturerlD then the system prints Same on the document Selects one If no selection is made in SH UltimateConsID then the system populates vUltimateCons with information from vConsignee Prints all The HTS number is a 10 d
135. WEIGHT am Kilos ql The undersigned Owner or Agent does hereby declare for the above named shipper the goods as described above were shipped on the above date and consigned as indicated and are products of MX Dated at MINNEAPOLIS on 9 23 2002 Sworn to before me this on 9 23 2002 SIGNATURE OF OWNER OR AGENT The MINNEAPOLIS Chamber of Commerce a recognized Chamber of Commerce under the laws of the State of MN has examined the manufacturer s invoice or shipper s affidavit concerning the origin of the merchandise and according to the best of its knowledge and belief finds that the products named originated in MX Secretary SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 3 Shipping International Documents Document Field SendSuite Shipping Source a OF vShipper Origin 3 Consigned To vUltimateCons Selects one VAgent If no selection is made in SH UltimateConsiID then the system populates vUltimateCons with information from vConsignee 4 Notify Party vintermediate Intermediate Consignee 5 Document SH BookingNr Number 5A B L or AWB L MasterTrackingNr If this is a multipiece Number L ProNr shipment then the SH PreSpecProNumber system looks at Master TrackingNr Otherwise it selects one of the others 6 Exporter SH BIlINr Prints both Reference SH RefNr 7 Forwarding Agent 8 Point of Origin or vShipper ShipperState Selects one FTZ Number SH FTZNr 9 Domestic SHRemark
136. a Zone SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 2 43 2 Supporting Data Additional Supporting Data Rates NOTE Commonly used package types are loaded during installation and should not need modification 2 44 The following fields are located on each tab e Carrier ID From the drop down list select the LTL Carrier whose rates and zip to zone are stored in a proprietary Binary format e Tariff The identifier under which a set of rates are stored in SendSuite The Tariff ID may differ from the tariff name in the Tariff field which is defined by the carrier e Effective Date The date that the rates for this carrier and tariff become effective e Expiration Date The date after which the discount lane will no longer be used The Binary Z Tariff header information is located on the Tariff tab or US Canada Zone tab The Interline and Service tabs have an additional button Update Points This allows you to modify the values previously configured in the system This should only be done in special circumstances Logistics Services periodically receives updates from the carriers and provides updates to the customers Any modifications should be sent using e mail to Logistics Services Package Type ate Package Type a x Package Type Box Description Carrier specific box Save Delete Close Use this window to setup your package type codes A package type is an identifier fo
137. ackable Yes Palletized Yes Production Date EE Te Bo Product Shelf Life ff Unit Price 3000 gt EACH Expraton Date ff Qty Per Shippable Piece 0 Quantity Unit KG Save Delete Close Input other fields as necessary see Chapter 2 of this guide 6 Click Save SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 2 9 2 Supporting Data Product Data Product Fields The only required field to input a product is the Product field The following fields will be brought over to the shipping line when the product number is entered in the shipment processing screen To bring these fields over the shipment processing screen must be set up to retrieve information from tblProduct See Field Properties in Chapter 3 of this guide tolProduct tolShipmentLine ltemDescription CommodityCode CommodityCode Adding a Product 2 10 SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Supporting Data 2 Product Data International Products For international shipments the following fields will be brought over into shipping if the product number is input in the International Detail window Weight NetWeight this is the product of product weight quantity Adding a Product SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 2 11 2 Supporting Data Remark Codes Adding a Remark Code 2 12 On the shipping screen SendSuite you can type a code that will import remarks to print
138. ag and pressing the D key Since the parent tag will be used for each data record in your XML file you must change its properties To change the parent tag s properties 1 Left click on the tag 2 Right click on the tag SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 8 43 8 Integration XML In 3 Select Edit Integration Tag order s Type Character y Cancel Mapping the XML Node Type ELEMENT Help Fields Width fio Precision o Default Value Qualifier Properties M Is a qualifier field Qualifier Value SHIPMENTHEADER 7 Identifies the key forthe parent node M Identifies the XML Document Pad Field before writing it out Prefix and Suffix Strings Wo padding Prefix C Pad lett Padding Character Mi Pad right aume V Strip spaces from field after reading it F Add field asrootnode 4 Click the drop down arrow next to Map this field to Conquest table and select the table primary table you are mapping to or from e g ShipmentHeader Load etc See Host Field Properties XML In elsewhere in this chapter Existing Map lf you are adding host fields to an existing map select XML Fields gt Add a XML field If you select Create XML Tree View you will destroy your old tree and you must remap all the fields again 8 44 SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide XML In Integration Mapping the Fields NOTE D
139. al Select a default shipping screen for the user under the Default Shipping Startup Screen drop down menu This screen will appear automatically when the user logs in to SendSuite SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 5 5 5 Tools Configuring Groups and Users Editing the User Properties and Permissions NOTE By leaving any of the Selected fields blank the user can access all data for that selection For example if you leave Selected Processing Screens blank the user will be able to access every shipping screen available in SendSuite User Data Visibility 1 Click DV to change which screens and field values are visible to the User or Group on the shipping screen i Data Visibility Configuration Available Shipment Owner IDs CALI 10 X Selected Shipment Owner IDs PB A A Ae Le by Available Address Owner IDs Selected Address Owner IDs EA A ES el A Available Processing Screens Selected Processing Screens leATL_PIC_Lookup DE Test Screen eAlternateCarrierTemplate eConsigneeExpressDemo eConsigneeExpress Training eCSR eCustomerService TrackingScreen eExistingShipmentExpress Template elnternational Template eLTL Template x eConsigneeExpress Template eDesktopShipping eFreightQueryTemplate The Available Shipment Owner IDs field lists the available shippers stored in the system The Selected Shipment Owner IDs field lists what shippers the us
140. andard Report Printer J670 J676 Forms Printer J680 High Speed Forms Printer J683 Laser Printer J685 Laser Printer with Duplex Unit Label Printers J693 Datamax Printer J695 Datamax Printer 1E05 Zebra 200 DPI Printer 1E08 Zebra 200 DPI Printer Scales ExpressCube Scale A217 A218 A219 Tabletop Scale JN50 JN55 Rollertop Scale JN6X JN60 JN64 150 Ibs Rollertop Scale JO6X J060 J064 200 Ibs Rollertop Scale J070 J075 100 lbs Tabletop Scale JN75 100 lbs Tabletop Scale Toledo 2038 2138 1000 lbs Scale Meitler Toledo 2158 Lynx Floor Scale Scanners J765 Non Contact Programmable Laser Scanner F 196022 Contact Wedge Scanner Postage Meters A 2 A900 Electronic Postage Meter B900 Post Right Postage Meter 6500 6501 E100 101 Paragon Meters NOTE The above meters are supported via legacy PBIO and are not available for purchase DM300 DM1000 Postage Meters SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Supported Peripherals A Manuals for The tables below list all relevant manuals for setting up and operating SendSuite Peripherals compatable peripherals if available Forms Printers J624 Laser Printer J630 J632 Standard SV60262 Model J630 Printer Product Reference Report Printer Manual SV60262 PL Model J630 Printer Parts Reference Guide SV60257 Model J630 Printer Operating Guide SV60538 Model J632 Printer Operating Guide J670 J676 Forms Printer SV60077
141. anges of one pound Follow these instructions to enter the rates a f Type a low weight and a high weight for the first weight range on the first line item If the carrier charges a minimum charge then type that charge in the Min Charge field Type the full dollar amount but do not type the before the amount Type the charge for that weight range in the Base Charge field Type the full dollar amount but do not type the before the amount Populate the Rate field with the appropriate value If you want the rate to be the exact dollar amount that you typed in the Base Charge field then type a 0 in the Rate field If you want a dollar amount added to the Base Charge type that value in the Rate field Repeat these steps for each weight range Each weight range goes on a separate line item Click Save and then click Close Complete all of the instructions in Carrier Setup in the next section of this chapter SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Tariffs 6 Carrier Setup After loading or creating a tariff you must define how those rates will be used in your shipping operations The Carrier Setup form allows you to specify such parameters as discounts supported accessorials and service days To set up a carrier 1 Open the Supporting Data module from the Control Center 2 Open the Carrier amp Labels folder 3 Open the Rates folder 4 Open Carrier Setup 5 Click in
142. ap The setup of the tblintlLine Data Mapper follows the same general process described in General Instructions on page 8 3 When choosing the view select Shipment Line Detail In Add the host fields following the instructions for Adding Host Fields elsewhere in this chapter SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 8 19 8 Integration Data Mapper Data Mapper can be run manually from the Integration module lt also can be run automatically in Task Scheduler To run the data mapper from Task Running Data Mapper 1 Scheduler see Task Scheduler in Chapter 5 From the Operations menu select Run Data Mapper OR Click the Run Data Mapper button Data Mapper Parameters E xi Map Name CompliancelN Default Group ID User Name admin pele Log errors C Log errors and events f Print outlog V Run in attended mode Will display messages and Dialog Boxes cancer Hae 2 Onthe Data Mapper Parameters window select the mapper you want to run from the Map Name drop down 3 For Data Mapper In only you can select a planning group to assign the shipments to 8 20 You can type an existing group in the Default Group ID field You can select NOW from the Default Group ID drop down This will create a new group using the current date and time For example if you select NOW on July 14 2005 at 3 52 PM the SendSuite will create a group called 200507141532
143. arrier will not carry the shipment the entire way but may offer to take it part of the way In this case some restrictions or features such as tariff absolute minimums may not apply 16 Click Save then click Close on the Absolute Minimum Lanes window SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 6 33 6 Tariffs Tariff Accessorial Incompatibility NOTE If you want to use an existing incompatibility file click the drop down arrow and select that file ID Likewise once you set up the following incompatibilities you can use them for other carriers just by selecting this Accessorial Incompatibility ID 6 34 Some accessorials cannot be combined For example a carrier may support Saturday delivery and COD but they do not collect COD on Saturday To tell SendSuite Shipping which accessorials cannot be combined ae wa Sf S 10 11 12 13 14 15 Open the Supporting Data module from the Control Center Double click the Carrier amp Labels folder Double click the Rates folder Double click Carrier Setup Click in the line that has the carrier tariff you want to modify Click the Details button Click in the Accessorial Incompatibility ID field and type a unique ID for the accessorial file Click Save Click Close Click the Accessorial Incomp tab Click the Details button A Accessorial Incompatibility Details Accessorial Incompatibility ID ESTMAIO1 Exp
144. ary Type drop down select the type of summary you want to print You must make a selection from this drop down NW Use a Grand Total in the report footer NW Use a Sub Total for a group footer E Use a Page Count in the page footer SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 4 19 4 Reports Creating Custom Reports for the Shipping Workstation Creating a New Thin Client Report NOTE The script runs on the server meaning that the time it prints on the report is the time on the server 4 20 Scripting on the Report You can run VBScript within the report These scripts can be used for a variety of purposes including assigning a value to a field This includes printing a date and time on the report If ActiveReports encounters an error the component may lock on the server Therefore you must build the following script into your ActiveReport Select the scripting tool 43 From the Object drop down select ActiveReports Document Delete the existing text From the Events drop down select OnError a SY YT In the sub routine body type the following CancelDisplay True Script Editor mi OM _ xi Object ActiveReports Document Events OnError z Sub OnError Number Description Scode Source HelpFile HelpContext CancelDisplay ancelDisplay True End Sub Close 6 Close the scripting window For other scripts follow these general instructions 1 To assign a script sel
145. ata al Privacy Statement and EnterinaClearing values in the fields will enable disable the application to conditionally display a Privacy Statement and Legal Notice link Privacy Statement URL and web page e Example http server fsendsulte Common privacy statment htm Legal Notice URL and web page AAA Example http server Sendsulte Commonleqgal_notice htm gese When values are entered into the URLs for the Privacy Statement or Legal Notice fields the system will display links in the top right of the thin client screen to allow the user to navigate to these pages for reference Proxy Server al Proxy Server Setup Proxy User ID Fromy Password From Server Mame Proxy Server Port Proxy Server Type None El FTP Passive False FIP Transfer Mode ASCII que _ Proxy Server configuration supports the use of different proxy and tunnelling methods for carrier communication such as USPS FTP SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 2 31 2 Supporting Data Additional Supporting Data Workstation Configuration 2 32 Email Setup x 0 HEED no_rephapb com From Email Address Jro_reply pb com O To Email Address joe shipper pb com Iser ID jo00t sh Password is sendsuite UAL hito pbtesi001 eQuest S5L Lagin asp SendSuite LIRL Port 25 SMTP Authenticate None SMTP Use SSL False Save Close If you setup password r
146. ata module from the Control Center Double click the Carrier amp Labels folder Double click the Rates folder Double click Carrier Setup Click in the line that has the carrier tariff that you will temporarily increase Click the Details button Click in the Tariff increase ID field and type a unique ID for the tariff increase file 8 Click Save 9 Click Close 10 Click the Tariff Increase tab 11 Click the Details button MA Tariff Increase Details loj x Tariff Increase ID ESTMTIO1 Z Adjustment 01 01 05 Percent Rate 5 Rate Type B gt Percent Minimum Minimum Type Percent Abs Minimum Abs Minimum Type Py Percent TL Rate TL Rate Type tS ee NS TL Weight TL Weight Units Save Delete Close 12 Type the effective date for the change in the Adjustment Date field 13 Type the percent of the increase as a whole number in the Percent Rate field For example if the rate has increased by 5 type 5 in the Percent Rate field SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 6 35 6 Tariffs Temporary 14 Click the drop down arrow in the Rate Type field and indicate how this rate Tariff Increase increase will be handled with others you have input e Base Percent This percentage will be calculated on the original tariff and will ignore any other tariff increase you entered e Cumulative This percentage will be added to other tariff increases you have e
147. ately Click Save SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 5 25 5 Tools Task Scheduler Start the Task Scheduler NOTE If the Task Scheduler stops abnormally e g someone unplugs the machine running it you must follow these steps to restart the scheduler The Task Scheduler does not automatically start when you restart the machine Modifying a Scheduler 5 26 Tasks you schedule will not begin processing until you launch the task scheduler option To start the Task Scheduler 1 Select Launch a Scheduler from the TaskScheduler menu Select A Scheduler End of Day z Cancel 2 Click the drop down arrow in the Launch a Scheduler field and select the task to be launched 3 Click Launch 4 Leave Task Scheduler open and minimize the Tools module The tasks will continue to run until you stop the scheduler 5 If you want to stop the scheduler click Terminate alol xi Status Waiting Scheduler End of Day Task In Group Started At 6 To restart the Task Scheduler follow the steps above You can create new task groups add tasks to existing groups and change the schedule on which the scheduler runs by following the instructions on the previous pages Note that once you create a task you cannot modify it If you want to modify the properties of a task or change the order in which tasks run you must delete them and re add them to the task group lf you
148. ates a PRO number or tracking number for all your shipments you must set up PRO numbers or tracking numbers for every carrier 2 18 To input your carrier PRO numbers and tracking numbers 1 Open the Supporting Data module from the Control Center 2 Open the Carrier amp Labels folder 3 Double click Pro Numbers A Pro Numbers Shipper ID 23 Carrier ID AIRB Check Digit Algorithm 201 _ Check Digit Divisor 7 a ee Service DEFAULT Prefix Block in Use f Suffix l6 Block One p Block Two Beginning 246891193 Beginning Ending 246941193 Ending Current 246891943 Current Warning Warning Seq Length lo Seq Length lo Roll Over Roll over to other block Roll Over Stop Delete Close If you are inputting PRO numbers for a new carrier follow these steps a Click the New button 1 Click the binoculars button and select the shipper Type or select the carrier ID in the Carrier ID field Type or select the service that the pro numbers will to in the Service field o 209 5 Click the drop down arrow in the Check Digit Algorithm field and select the configuration that meets your carrier and service NOTE If you do not need PRO numbers or tracking numbers for this carrier then select No pro number for this carrier service You may save the record at this point do not complete the rest of the fields If you dete
149. ation from the database and replace what you see on the screen Return Service Generates a return label during shipment Shipment processing The shipper s address is used as the ship to address and the consignee s address is used as the return address Note that you must select the appropriate Return Shipment option on the Special Services tab to assess the proper charges for this feature Save Shipment Saves the data on the shipping screen to the database saves the pTable values to the database Script Conditional Runs a conditional logic script written in VBScript Logic that you set up in the Integration Module You select the script in the Sub Event Property box Set Consignee This sends the perm temp flag to the tblAddress Defaults This event is designed to be used after the ODBC In sub event and prior to the Add Change Consignee sub event Set Focus to Search This places the cursor on the Search box on the shipping screen Set Shipment Sets the defaults for a shipment It can be used Defaults to override the values read in the database ona read shipment 3 36 SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Shipping 3 Shipping Screens Shipment Form This prints the Shipment Request Form Processing Events On the Sub Event Properties check the box to print the documents directly to the printer If the box is unchecked then the user will see a preview of the document and will have to click
150. aunch the batch e Track process click the Start EOD button SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 3 3 3 Shipping International SendSuite Shipping will print export documentation from the shipping Documents workstation No configuration is required on the Administrative Workstation but this document describes what data is used to produce the documents Overview SendSuite Shipping can print four international documents e Commercial Invoice e Shipper s Export Declaration SED e Certificate of Origin e NAFTA Certificate The documents require product details You can load much of this information in tolProduct Those products can then be selected during shipping See Product Data in Chapter 2 These documents may require more information than will fit on a standard shipping screen You may want to consider creating a separate screen for the entry of international shipping information See Shipping Screens in Chapter 3 When a shipment is processed SendSuite Shipping uses fields from tblIntlLine to complete some of the documentation You can map data to this table using the SendSuite Shipping Data Mapper but you cannot map to this table using ODBC or XML For more information on mapping data see Mapping to tblintlLine in Chapter 8 When the documents are printed from the shipping screen the default number of copies is 1 To set a different default number change the properties for each country on tblCountry See
151. aved to disk Exporting files can be useful for many reasons including L Creating an backup copy of the screen When you modify a custom screen and save it using the same name there is no record of the original screen By exporting the original screen you have a copy that you can revert back to if necessary O Assisting Pitney Bowes support staff with troubleshooting If you encounter a problem with the system there may be an issue with a custom screen A Pitney Bowes representative may be able to diagnose the problem by importing a custom screen on another system If the problem is corrected by modifying the screen then the new screen can be easily imported Exporting Shipping Screens 1 You must close any screens you have open in this Shipping module on the Administrative Workstation From the File menu select Export Screen xi File to export to Screens to export O BC Inc O Admin s Events 11 44 37 AM O O eShip Request ES O eShip Request 2 ES O eShipCo ES PloTesioma Canann ce Select All Deselect All Export Selected Scree Click the Browse button Browse then browse to where you want to save the export file Name the file at this time Check the boxes next to the screens you want to export NOTE If you choose more than one screen the system will save all the screens in the same adtg file When you are importing screens you have the option of which ones in the adig file you want to
152. blShipmentHeader PreSpect Service Table tolShipmentHeader 0 M j O E blShipmentHeader ChargeTe PPD Charge Table tblShipmentHeader O M O O i blShipmentHeader EarliestSt Earliest Table tb ShipmentHeader O E oO O _ tblShipmentHeader LatestShi TOD Latest Table tblShipmentHeader O O Oj O IShinmentHeader Schedule TOM Shin Tahle thiShinmentHeader A rm rm Iv 2 Change the field properties on the screen Default Value When the New Values depend on the field with Default or Set Some fields are just text Shipment Defaults fields some fields have event is performed this specific values that you must value will be placed in choose from a drop down the field In date fields you can use a relative date by typing TODAY then you can add or subtract days For example to default tomorrow s date in a field type TODAY 1 User Label This is what will appear Although this is a 256 on the shipping screen character field the label This is the same should be brief The user label that can screen will resize itself to be configured using accommodate the text the properties on the screen Source This tells you where the system is getting the data for the field Source Table If the Source is set to Table this tells your table the system is getting the data for the field 3 28 SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Shipping Screens Setting Properties on the Defaults Tab Proces
153. can be simple text files with a txt extension Integration 8 XML File Link integration allows you to use the shipping screen to perform the XML In and XML Out data transfers Instead of always looking at the same XML file XML file link uses a key field from the shipping screen to identify the XML file to read For example if the user wants to process order 4567 the user types that number on the shipping screen performs the XML File Link In event and Sendsuite looks for a file called 4567 XML From an operator s viewpoint XML File Link behaves very much like ODBC integration The operator scans a bar code and a single shipment comes in In order to use this method of integration the host system must write a unique XML file for every shipment that will be processed To set up the XML File Link In integration map follow the same general instructions for setting up a batch map See General Instructions elsewhere in this chapter After setting up the map properties you must configure the map for XML File Link following these instructions 1 Click on the Map menu and select File Link Setup 2 Inthe Directory Name field type or browse for the directory where the XML documents will be stored The directory must be accessible from the server on either a local or mapped drive 3 In the File Extension field type the extension used on the files in this directory r In the File Name From box locate and click on the SendSuit
154. can select a ID Field to route manually See Configure the Appearance of the Shipping Screen in Chapter Processing Screen SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 2 25 2 Supporting Data Batch Rating Groups Plan Shipments 2 26 While most packages or shipment are processed one at a time there may be a need to process a group of packages all at once SendSuite Shipping supports this need with its Batch Rating Feature Batch Rating can be done the following ways e ltcan be done on the Shipping Workstation e Interactive batch rating can be done through the use of a script e It can be done as part of a scheduled task on the Administrative Workstation See Task Scheduler in Chapter 5 of this guide This document provides an explanation of what happens during the batch rating process To rate shipments in a batch they must first be grouped When you create a group a new record is written to tb Group The Group ID is also saved with the shipments on tb ShipmentHeader tblLoad and tbIStop When you execute the batch rating feature it rates each shipment individually Please note the following conditions e It does not pick up any routing instructions e It will rate and save multipiece parcel shipments as a single shipment instead of using the MultiPack feature e If there is a pre specified carrier or service it will use that information for example if the shipment was saved with a NAM servi
155. cannot place a prompt on browser client This option can be helpful when testing a script in the Integration module but it cannot be used in production e Constant When you choose this type you must type a value in the Low Expression Value box When you do this the system will always select the same record This option can be helpful when testing a script in the Integration module e Conquest Field Use this feature to compare the host field to a SendsSuite For example if the user types an order number in the tbIShipmentHeader ConfigCharSeven field on the shipping screen the you would select this type This is a standard method of selecting records to import into SendSuite e ODBC Field Use this feature to compare one host field to another The main use of this type is when you are selecting records from multiple tables and you need to create a relationship between the tables For example if you want to select OrderHeader OrderNumber and you need line items from OrderLine OrderNumber then you will use this type Your selection criteria might look like the following Selection Criteria First Parameter Second Parameter s DDEC Fields Operator Type Prompt User Constant C Conquest Field ORDERS Invoice_Number ODBC Field High Expression Value Free Text SSS ORDERS Invoice_Number tblShipmentHeader ConfigCharSeven AND Order_Lines
156. ce then it will be rated using a NAM service Once the shipments have been rated it will attempt to consolidate shipments going to the same destination It will attempt this consolidation when there is no pre specified carrier or when the shipments have a common carrier Consider the following examples e Three shipments with no pre specified carriers were grouped and rated One shipment was routed using Courier A the second was routed using Courier B and the third was routed using Freight Carrier C The system determined that it is more cost effective to combine all the shipments into one shipment using Freight Carrier C so the first two shipments are re rated and combined with the third shipment e Three shipments were grouped each having Freight Carrier D already specified The system routed and rated them individually then it re routed and re rated them as a single shipment combining their weight and pieces to achieve a volume discount SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Supporting Data 2 Batch Rating e Three shipments were grouped One shipment had Courier A as a pre specified carrier the second and third shipment had no specified carrier The Plan Shipments system routed the first shipment using the pre specified carrier The second shipment is routed using Courier B and the third shipment is routed using Courier C The system then determined that the second and third shipments could be shipped more
157. cel carriers Admin Admin Admin Admin O Manifest Numbers tab This tab allows you to set up sequence numbers for manifests This feature is located in the Supporting Data Module Allows you to set up and maintain your product Admin database This feature is located in the Supporting Data Module Use this feature to set up the PRO number format and number range for each shipper carrier combination This feature is located in the Supporting Data Module Tariff Setup is where the rates and zones of the system actually reside Logistics Services configures these tables and the data loading process populates the data into the SendSuite system However you may need to use these tables to enter programmable rates This feature is located in the Supporting Data Module Use the Custom Report Interface window to create your own SendSuite Reports This feature is located in the Reports Module Use Shipment Processing to rate shipments and generate carrier approved shipping documents and labels This feature is located on the Shipping Workstation Admin Admin Admin Shipping a 5 Tools User Properties Dialog Box Permissions Tab Feature Deseripton Aplies o SetupShipmentProcessing Use the Shipment Processing Setup to define Admin processes screen layouts field defaults and processing events for the Shipment Processing window This feature is located in the Shipping Module EndOfDay Allows
158. ch Integration As above SendSuite imports the data in a single batch When each shipment is processed the data is sent back to the XML file so the records are updated in real time one record at a time e Separate Batch Integration As above SendSuite imports data in batch but each client integrates with a different XML file e Single file integration The operator provides SendSuite with a shipment number SendSuite looks for an XML file with that number in the title SendSuite imports data from that file processes it and sends the data back to the same file It is important to review the XML file structure and data before creating the XML map in the SendSuite You must know which tags will contain the data coming into or going out of SendSuite Some XML files may contain multiple records Only one record is necessary when setting up the mapping in SendSuite so try to obtain a copy of the XML file with only one record or you can edit the file to include only one record It is important to verify that the XML file is structured properly before mapping it One way to test an XML file structure is to get a copy of an XML file and drag it into a Web browser If the data shows in the browser window then the basic XML structure is good and the file can be used If the page cannot be displayed then the XML structure is bad and you must obtain a new XML file Other software may be used to parse the XML file for validity but
159. ck session this data will appear on the new shipment in the multipack Source Read only See Setting Properties on the Defaults Tab on the next page Source Table Read only See Setting Properties on the Defaults Tab on the next page SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide read only Although you can remove the checkmark on some fields it will still be a read only field e g TotalFreight Read only fields on the screen will have a yellow background Check this box to keep the value from one shipment to the next Check this box to keep the value from one shipment to the next 3 27 3 Shipping 10 x Shipping To set properties on the Defaults tab Screens 1 Click the Defaults tab z Defaults Setting Properties Restrict View on the Defaults panies Tab gt itblShipmentHeader GroupID Group Table sal blShipmentHeader LoadiD Load Table tbiShipmentHeader E Oj oO blShipmentHesder BilliNr Invoice Table tbIShipmentHeader a E Ol M ai blShipmentHeader ShipperlC PB Shippel Table thlShipmentHeader O M O M E blShipmentHeader ShipForlC Ship Table tbIShipmentHeader E OM Oo O fblShipmentHeader Consigne Consigi Table tbiShipmentHeader f Iv E M E blShipmentHeader BillTolD BillTo Table tolShipmentHeader IC M E O fblShipmentHeader PreSpech Mode Table tbiShipmentHeader O M Oo O m
160. ckage Manifest Setup NOTE Due to how some of the carriers are configured you may need to set up multiple tasks to make sure you have manifested for all services NOTE Always Send causes an email notification to be sent with every communication attempt If the system makes repeated attempts multiple emails will be generated Select only during troubleshooting 5 28 This task runs the end of day manifest for the date and carrier you select This task can be used as a forced close automatically manifesting all shipments for a particular day While the task prepares the manifest and places the electronic document in the queue for transmission it does not print any of the documents The manifest documents can be printed from the End of Day Small Package Reprint feature on the Shipping Workstation If you want to transmit the manifest the same day that it was prepared then you will want to include the End of Day Carrier Communication task in the same group with the Small Package Manifest task Make sure that the Carrier Communication task is ordered to follow the Manifest task To set up small package manifesting 1 Follow the steps earlier in this chapter to create and add the task to the group 2 Select the Small Package Manifest feature 3 Click the Edit button x Carrier ID Shipper ID USPS PB Criteria V Relative Date to the Start Time Scheduled Ship Date From To Actual Ship Da
161. cost effectively using Freight Carrier D so it re routes and re rates them The first shipment is not consolidated because it had a pre specified carrier Batch Labeling Once the shipments have been routed and rated you can print the labels ina batch This process is done on the shipping screen by running a VBScript as a processing event See Writing a Script in Chapter 8 of this guide for information on VBScripts and see Processing Events in Chapter 3 of this guide for a description of how to create the shipping event SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 2 27 2 Supporting Data Accounting Features Configuring Accounts and Account Sets NOTE Account Sets must be associated with a valid Account ID Sub Accounts and Sub Sub Accounts are optional 2 28 SendSuite Shipping includes accounting features that allow you to create accounts for tracking and reporting purposes Account Sets defines the relationship between Accounts Sub Accounts and Sub Sub Accounts With this relationship the you can have a hierarchical relationship between these fields as defined by the Account Set Creating Accounts You must create Accounts and optional Sub Accounts and Sub Sub Accounts before creating Account Sets Use the Instructions below to create Accounts Sub Accounts and Sub Sub Accounts To create accounts 1 Open the SendSuite Shipping thin client and click Setup gt Data and select either e Account
162. count Application field optional e Actual Weight The discount is applied using the actual weight of the Clone a Carrier shipment Setup e Rated Weight The discount is applied using the billed weight of the shipment This would use the deficit weight or DIM weight instead of the actual weight e Billable A R The discount is applied behind the scenes for accounting purposes 11 Select how the discount will be applied on a per shipment basis from the drop down in the Rate Per Piece or Ship field optional Rate Per Piece The discount will be calculated and applied for every piece in the shipment e Rate Per Shipment The discount will be calculated and applied to the shipment as a whole 12 Select B Borrowed Rates for the type of tariff being used from the drop down in the Rate Type field 13 In the Supplemental Data area type unique IDs for any of the other data in the carrier profile NOTE Typing an ID will activate a tab on the main carrier profile screen For example if you type an ID for Discount Lanes but you do not type an ID for FAK Lanes only the Discount tab will be activated e Accessorial Lanes Use this to set up the ancillary costs that carriers charge for services such as deliver confirmation hazardous materials carriers such as DHL hazardous materials fuel surcharges insurance weekend delivery oversize packages etc may also be referred to SendSuite will de
163. crystal reports 4 10 screens 3 40 3 41 3 42 F Field Edit Control 3 45 8 1 9 1 10 17 1 18 SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide G Graphic Labels file information 7 8 windows font size 7 7 Groups configuring 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 5 5 6 5 7 5 8 5 9 5 14 5 15 5 16 importing users to 5 15 5 16 Importing Ascent data 8 62 8 63 8 64 external reports 4 8 4 9 4 10 screens 3 40 3 41 3 42 Importing Users 5 15 5 16 Integration Data Mapper 8 3 8 4 8 5 8 6 8 7 8 8 8 9 8 10 8 11 8 12 8 13 8 14 8 15 8 16 8 17 8 18 8 19 8 20 8 21 ODBC 8 26 8 27 8 28 8 29 8 30 8 31 8 32 8 33 8 34 8 35 8 36 8 37 XML 8 38 8 39 8 40 8 41 8 42 8 43 8 44 8 45 8 46 8 47 Interactive Authentication See User Authentication International Documents 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 9 3 10 3 11 3 12 3 13 3 14 3 15 3 16 3 17 3 18 3 19 3 20 certificate of origin 3 11 3 12 3 13 commercial invoice 3 7 3 8 3 9 3 10 NAFTA certificate of origin 3 14 3 15 3 16 SED 3 17 3 18 3 19 3 20 K Key Exchange See User Authentication L Logo See Company Logo LTL Tariff address record 6 12 creating custom tariff from scratch 6 11 6 12 6 13 6 14 6 15 6 16 6 17 6 18 SCAC code 6 11 tariff setup 6 13 6 14 6 15 6 16 6 17 6 18 Manual Rating 6 41 6 42 6 43 6 44 6 45 6 46 6 47 6 48 6 49 6 50 6 51 creating 6 44 creating the VB script associating the VB scr
164. cts that carrier more often than it selects Fred s Using the rate shop group feature you can make Joe s rates look 10 less expensive than Fred s The routing cost will not display on the screen for the user To set up dual rating 1 Follow the instructions in Chapter 2 to set up the rate shop group 2 If you want the routing cost to be based on a flat amount type that amount in the Penalty field For example if you want Joe s to look 10 cheaper than Fred s type 10 in the Penalty field 3 If you want the routing cost to be based on a percentage type that percentage in the Penalty field For example if you want Joe s to look 10 cheaper than Fred s type 10 in the Penalty field SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 2 21 2 Supporting Data Routing Instructions Setting Up Routing Instructions NOTE The label lines need to be in order from the first one you want to check to the last one SendSuite Shipping will stop when it reaches the first true condition in the routing instruction 2 22 Routing instructions specify how shipments will be routed and rated for a particular shipper agent consignee bill to or ship for parties You can use routing instructions to select carriers and rates You can specify the priority for determining which routing ID to assign to a shipment based on charge terms by setting up route priorities You can also add a field to your shipment processing scre
165. customer O vBillTo The view combines information form tblAddress and tblCountry OU tblProduct This table contains information about products stored in the database This table may or may not contain data depending on whether you have chosen to store data in this table For example when exporting products you must provide product detail which is stored in tb intiLine Storing that information in tb Product is optional OU vCarrierDeliveryDetailRpt This view contains information for the Carrier Performance Analysis Detail Report O vCarrierDeliverySummRpt This view contains information for the Carrier Performance Analysis Summary Report SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 4 9 4 Reports Importing External Reports Exporting a Report from Crystal Reports Importing the Report into SendSuite Shipping NOTE When the report is imported a copy is placed in the Conquest Rpt directory Using the Report 4 10 You must also save the report format so that SendSuite formats the document correctly To export a report from crystal reports 1 In Crystal Reports from the File menu verify that Save Data with Report is NOT selected 2 From the File menu select Print 3 From the Print menu select Export 4 From the Format drop down list select Report Definition 5 From the Destination drop down list select Disk File 6 Click OK 7 Save the export file txt in the sa
166. d Process Package Status Purge Group Loads Shipments Purge Shipment SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide The shipments must have a GroupID See Batch Rating in Chapter 2 You must set up criteria telling SendSuite which shipments to delete See Purge Shipments Setup elsewhere in this Chapter 5 21 5 Tools Task Scheduler Available Tasks 5 22 Feature whatitDoes Deletes the status of Purge Status Purge Time In Transit Remove Routes and Rates Run a Batch or Executable File Remove Temporary Data and Files Shipment Planning Small Package Manifest packages that have been tracked This task is best used with e Track For example you track packages print reports then delete the shipment status so those packages do nat print on the report again Purges cached time in transit data stored in SendsSuite Shipping This will undo the routing This shipments must have and rating on a group of a common group ID as shipments assigned by the Shipment Planning feature See Batch Rating in Chapter 2 This feature runs an You must have the external executable file executable file set up on the schedule you set up For example you can run a batch file that moves a text file from one directory to another Removes data and carrier files manifests labels etc stored by carrier component These items are still available from SendsSuite Ship
167. d Ship Date fronar w 20 3 frobav xlo CarrierfAACT y Latest Delivery none Y none y Y Consignee GERMANY X Origin Zip Code Shipper PB M Destin Zip Code Service NFO Charge Terms Mode Config One y Config Two Last Modified By admin Config Three Last Modified 02 1 8 99 12 00 00 AM Save Delete Close Default Settings la Consolidation Defaults Truck Defaults Weight Unit CWT gt Max Weight Unit LBS y Volume Unit CF m Max Weight 40000 Linear Unit Fry Max Volume Unit CF y Max Volume 2800 Distance Unit Mi y Deliver nae Dn 3 Prorate Algorithm B Pro Number D y ao Y El Default Charge Terms PPD y Batch Rating Defaults UPS Online Delivery 0 Zj ae MV Save Costs For Collect l Generate Decision Report 7 Save Costs For Third V Generate Summary Report Use USPS Online Delivery Information v gt Generate Error Report E de hae Sonar ASISTEN UM FTP or Shared Directory 5S y UPS OnLine Time in Transit Server Name WV Use Cache server Port Number 20 00 TestMode Reports Path C Test Production A opt FTP Password USPS OnLine Time in Transit Shared Directory i ServerFedEx Reports El Y Use Cache Non Express Cache Bo Expiration Days 30 Save Close Use Default Settings to set Shipment Planning defaults which include Consolidation Batch Rating Truck and Shipment Defaults Also FedEx server settings are set here 2 46 SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuit
168. d Type SQL_VARCHAR Field Name BIN Field Length Pe Default Label Bill Number Field is Required I Default Value PA Roll Up ltem I Translation Type y Table Name This identifies the SendSuite table that this is on Field Name This identified the field name on the SendSuite table Default Label This is the name of the field as it shows in the mapping tree Default Value If the value being transferred is NULL the SendSuite will use the default value The data input must match the Field Type To use the current date type TODAY this must be in caps Translation Type If the host and SendSuite use different values then you can set up a translation Once the translation has been defined then you can select that translation from the drop down here Field Type This identifies the type of data expected by SendSuite Field Length This identifies the maximum number of characters that the SendSuite database will accept for this field Field is Required If checked SendSuite will require a value for this field If a null value is sent to SendSuite the system will return an error Roll Up Item This field applies when multiple line items are being sent to SendSuite lf checked SendSuite will summarize all the line items into a single line SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide ODBC Integration in SendSuite Shipping Selection Criteria Integration 8 To write the
169. d be in the following location C Program Files PB Transcape Conquest Data Exchange The text file must be comma delimited and use ins and del actions to insert and delete records on a single line The action is followed by the Shipper ID User Name and the password for the user The text below is an example of a UserlInfo txt file User ID ins Shipperl User Name ins Shipper2 Joe Shipper ins Shipper3 Bob Stanley xyz 7 Password ins Shipper4 Ray Knight IMS ohnippero calvin Schiraldi del Shipper4 In this example the Shipper4 entry is deleted and not imported into SendSuite Shipper1 has no User Name this can be added later Importing Into SendSuite 1 Open the Tools module 2 Click Security gt Users Groups 3 Right click an existing group Alternatively create a new Group See Setting Up Groups page 5 2 4 Click Import Users Seep gt Delete group Admin Properties 5 Click Yes at the prompt SendSuite Admin Tools Do you really want to process User Impon file for Group Test Group No SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 5 15 5 Tools Configuring Groups and Users Importing Users 5 16 A prompt displays indicating a successful import Click OK The User Import file for Group Test Group has been processed The Shipper IDs from your UserlInfo txt file now display under the selected Group e You can
170. dling Fees HE Pitney Bowes SendSuite searney men E Shippin Actions Setu Reports Logout pping p p E Shipper 10 P Consignee 10 P E Handling 10 Apply For Min Handling Charge Add Mode DetailDeletelGoto Tag Criteria nits TT Yalue TT Value He PERRET I 2 Click the Lookup icon 4 next to the Shipper ID and select the appropriate shipper record NOTE A series of records can be entered so that different handling charges can be assessed to different consignees This indicates that this is the global handling charge to be applied to all consignees There can be only one global record for each shipper For a global record you do not select a Consignee ID If you want to make the handling charge consignee specific from the Consignee ID list select the consignee 3 Type a name in the Handling ID field If appropriate enter a Minimum Handling Charge The minimum handling charge is applied if the shipment doesn t meet the select criteria specified SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Shipper Handling Fees NOTE You can also specify handling charges to be a percentage of the cost of goods instead of a flat dollar amount Supporting Data 2 From the Apply For drop down list select the application type e P criteria and action evaluated per piece e S criteria and action evaluated for shipment totals After entering the header informa
171. dress1 4 Pieces Host File Properties File Type Ke y Column fi C Separate Header Detail and Trailer Lines Separate Header and Detail Lines C Separate Header and Detail related by a key O A A Trailing Leading character to be removed from fields e g double quotes a Trailing Leading character to be removed from fields e g double quotes If the lines have some character at the beginning or the end then you indicate what that is in this field For example some host systems place double quotes at the beginning and end of each line SendSuite will strip those off if you type the double quotes in this field Default Group ID Only enabled when Shipment In is selected you can type or select a Group ID to which all shipments will be assigned No line item response mode If SendSuite is expecting a line item for each header your selection here will determine what the system should do if there is no line item Add only Header Record This will add only the header record leaving a line blank Disregard Header Record This will skip that record and go on to the next Add Detail Line to database table This will add the header record and create a dummy line record as well SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Data Mapper Data Map Settings Integration 8 Rollup Line Item by Commodity Code or by Product By default SendSuite Shipping will add each tblOrderLine or tbl
172. e Shipping Administrator Guide Shipping o Gane eee eer oe ce eterna nee ne eee 3 2 LDA lear ate ee EO OEE RES ACE TE INE IRAE APMC ALE Tea OEE 3 2 TRACKING ORDENS ee ale hoe ree ee eee 3 2 International Documents soseer enaena EEEa aaa meee 3 4 e AE 3 4 Using these Instructions occccoconccoconcncononnnonononnnnos 3 5 SINGE iaa 3 5 MDO VUE sue e E a e E sealed sate Queenan E ne 3 6 Calculated Valles I a ae a a a E EE E 3 6 MOO EINO S E E E a A a E o ccna 3 6 CORMNMONCIA NIV OIC e ea E 3 7 AA UNO a a aE A E E eres 3 11 NAFTA Certificate Of OrIQiD a a Aaa a A a 3 14 o E i E A eee eee 3 17 ls OCES A AA a E E E reaeanee 3 21 Creating a Custom Screen a aa a E a a 3 21 Configuring the Appearance of the Shipping Screen 3 22 Pelete olds ase ede AE E ee ele ne 3 23 Aa FEIS AE eter arene nr ete rata enter ne rey eee 3 23 MOVES a Aeneas ant E 3 23 Changing the Field Labels cocooooccoccommo 3 24 CheaunG FOUK A a A ee ee e 3 24 Setting Properties on the Screen Tab 3 25 EN simee 2 reredr E E a es 3 25 Setting Properties on the Defaults Tab o 3 28 Processing VEINS ea tence aden mek snes eran eee 3 29 Sub Event DescriptiONS S A E E a SS Exporting and Importing Screens oooooocccccoccccncnooononooo 3 40 Exporting Shipping Screens oococcccoccccnccnoocoononnooooos 3 40 Importing Shipping SCreenS ooocccccccocccnccnooonononnoos 3 41 Allowing User ACCESS aeiee na ee
173. e e Individual Tables to select from all the databases in the system 4 If you selected Support Data or Individual Tables tab a Click the drop down arrow in the Select table field b Select the appropriate table c Click the drop down arrow in the Field field 5 Select a field you wish to use to look up records that will be purged 6 Click the drop down arrow in the Operator field 7 Select the appropriate operator SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Tools 5 Purging 8 Select the appropriate value by typing the value you wish to find in the Value Database field Records 9 Add additional criteria to locate records if necessary To add additional criteria Purge Feature a Click the drop down arrow in the Logic Operator field b Select the appropriate logic operator c Repeat Step 5 through Step 9 10 Click the drop down arrow in the Sort by field 11 Select the field you wish to have SendSuite use to sort the records it finds 12 Click the Preview button 13 If you want to purge all the records displayed click the Delete All button NOTE To select multiple records you 14 If you want to purge only selected records must press and hold the a Click in the gray area to the left of the displayed record to highlight the C key while you click on record you want to delete the gray areas to the left l to delete If you want to select a group of sequential records click the gray area to the
174. e 8 3 8 Integration Data Mapper Data Map Settings 8 4 The Data Mapper Settings window appears immediately when you create a new map To modify the settings for an existing map select Map gt Change Map Properties Gonoral ii Direction Trensachon Elo fesicr f jn m Comm efter geth iangan Gut 0 Comm ater the whole operon is completed Ho mico L Drowa Ea Dolimnar Aninas xl M Sare hod hile ciar procesan Each Files Pro mencinod Ergit P shniitu d eooo Browse Condbhoral Lege a Hoel Dale and Tene Formal zd General Tab Direction Sets the way the data will flow e In Data coming into the SendSuite database e Out Data going out of SendSuite Transaction Behavior This sets when the records will be loaded into the SendSuite database e Commit after each transaction If selected each record will be written immediately to the database after it is read e Commit after the whole operation is completed If selected SendSuite will wait until all the records have been read before updating the database Host File Properties e Name Type the source file for In or the export file for Out you may also browse for the file see below e Browse Click this button to search for the file you want to use e Edit Click this button to open the file you selected The file will be opened with Notepad e File Format Select the format that the data is in
175. e 8 37 Updating a WHERE ClauSe ccccccececsseeesssneeeeens 8 37 AVES HITC OV QU OV o ina Deere tare cree at Area eee eal eg eae 8 38 O 8 38 ENCISO oi 8 39 MAE Map SO UNOS E E ci 8 40 ETE cad a a a viet canis ceva taice aetna 8 40 SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide xii Table of Contents Server XML File Properties ooooocccccoocoooooooo0oo 8 40 A E E T wereiame ns 8 41 Mapping NECIOS manos a arse E E ree riaenc ash 8 43 Adang E A sarincrceuaatantarsrneotasds Wie oats 8 43 MAD OIIGHRAICIGS atacado ete E E 8 45 Host Field Properties XML INL ccciccccssesscenssesensessenes 8 46 SendSuite Shipping Field Properties 8 47 Generals WUCHORMS 2 22 oe 8 48 XMM a OPS UNOS E E a A casa rennin E renee 8 49 General Tan are saree eee ieee eee eee eee 8 49 OUTO A ie eee oy ere 8 50 Mapping Ne Fielda o 8 51 Adama OSOS e er ad 8 51 XMZOUT NANO taaan Eire tara ear iss omer MAPPING tme O AA E irre 8 53 Mapping Ielas TE E o ance 8 53 SendSuite Shipping Field Properties 8 54 AVES gralo n FELINE a a E A E a E cas 8 55 FICCI A a E E E O 8 55 Modifying the Shipping Screen for XML File Link 8 56 Conditional Logic ScriptiNg o cocococcccnccooocnnononoononnnnnos 8 57 SendSuite Shipping TOOISET ooooccoccccccoonconnccnnooooos 8 58 Conditional Logic Operations occcoooconnccncccconononnnonnnonos 8 59 VBScript Conditional L
176. e ODBC Administrator Before setting up the ODBC Data Exchange the following steps must be completed e Verify that the host application is installed e Verify that the ODBC Driver for the target database is installed e Create a Data Source Name 8 22 SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Integration 8 Creating a DSN To verify that the ODBC driver is installed 1 From the Windows menu select Settings 2 From the Settings menu select Control Panel Verifying that 3 From the Control Panel double click the Administrative Tools icon the ODBC Driver 4 Double click the Data Sources ODBC icon for Database Is 5 Click the Drivers tab to display a list of drivers and the specific version Installed as 1 0DBC Data Source Administrator o q xl NOTE The ODBC Data User DSN System DSN File DSN Drivers Tracing Connection Pooling About Source Administrator ODBC Drivers that are installed on your system dialog box shows the Mame Version Compan a different data sources Adaptive Server Anywhere 7 0 Not marked Not marked f Driver da Microsoft para arquivas texto Mix csv 4 00 600 00 Microsoft Corporati and their ODBC drivers Driver do Microsoft Access mdb 4 00 6200 00 Microsoft Corporat These data sources can Driver do Microsoft dBase dbfi 4 00 6200 00 Microsoft Corporati Driver do Microsoft Exceli xls 4 00 6200 00 Microsoft Corporat be used to conn
177. e US Census Bureau maintains statistics about the import and export of commodities between the US and other countries Schedule B HTS numbers can be located on the Census Bureau s web site http www census gov foreign trade schedules b 2 38 SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Additional Supporting Data Data Supporting Data 2 Letter of Credit A Letter Of Credit E lolx Reference Nr 5465794943 Credit Info Account Nr 01 00546579 003 l Confirmation Required Amount 500 00 Currency Name Pound V Approximate Amount Amount 500 00 Expiration Country UNITED KINGDOM X Expiration Date 01 01 07 Consignee Address Beneficiary Address Consignee ID FLMA X Beneficiary ID X Address Name Micro Abacus Computers Address Name Address Line 1 14528 Babcock St NE Address Line 1 A Address Line 2 12 Address Line 2 SS Address Line 3 SSS ees Address Line 3 City PALMBAY State Ft Zip Code 829052825 Zip Code 0 Country lus Country E Save Delete Close Use the Letter of Credit table to store detailed information about each consignee letter of credit A letter of credit verifies that funds will be available for goods and or shipping costs Each letter must be saved under a unique alpha numeric reference number Mode Code et Mode Code E E lolx Mode Code AIR gt Description Air Freight Save De
178. e accessorials required 14 If the carrier has defined specific rest days then fill in the Rest Day fields oe ot A A NOTE SendSuite Shipping automatically assumes that Saturday and Sunday are rest days and the trucks are not moving To change that select the days then select the Rest Day Transit checkbox SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Carrier Service 15 Type the number of service days for this lane in the Delivery Days field Days 16 Specify a delivery time optional 17 Click Save then click Close on the Service Days Lanes window 18 Click in the next line down and repeat step 11 through step 17 for each additional lane you want to define SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 6 29 6 Tariffs Tariff FAK NOTE If you want to use an existing FAK file click the drop down arrow and select that file ID Likewise once you set up the following FAK you can use them for other carriers just by selecting this FAK Lanes ID 6 30 A freight of all kinds FAK agreement changes the way SendSuite Shipping rates shipments A standard FAK causes all commodities to be rated the same regardless of the actual freight class A detailed FAK is used to map one or more freight classes to an alternative freight class If you have FAK agreements with your carriers use these instructions to set them up Sao Fo NPM oe DP a 12 13 14 Open the Supporting Data
179. e any length However if you make the value strictly numerical it must be 8 digits long d Click Save then click Close SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 6 15 6 Tariffs Creating a Custom LTL Tariff from Scratch Tariff Setup 6 16 ZIP Code lf the carrier s origin and destination points are within a range of ZIP codes then you can use the ZIP code option This option is the one that is the most used because you can specify a range of cities based on their ZIP codes NOTE Be aware that sometimes a ZIP code found within a range of ZIP codes may be in a different zone than the rest of the ZIP codes For example in the ZIP code range of 55400 55500 the ZIP code 55420 might be in Zone 2 while the other ZIP codes might be in Zone 1 If this situation occurs you must be sure to single out the ZIP code that falls outside of the zone range and assign it to its own line item In this situation there would actually be 3 separate line items for the 2 ranges of ZIP codes and for the individual ZIP code out of the zone The first range would be defined as 55400 55419 Then the ZIP code 55420 would be on its own line item Finally the third line item would be the range of 55421 55500 Lane ToZone A O x Zone ID LHFGLTL y Country lus gt State e MY Low Origin 73301 HighOrigin 78201 Low Dest 73301 OO High Dest 78201 WeightLimit Zone RBN LHFGLTLS gt Save Delete
180. e browser See SV7S9146 for more information on the Delivery Information screen Allows access to Shipping gt Return Receipt Catalog through the browser See SV7S9146 for more information on the Return Receipt Catalog screen eTMSPkgAttributes Allows access to Setup gt Data gt Package Attributes Shipping through the browser eTMSAccountVisibility Allows access to Setup gt Data gt Accounting Visibility Shipping Groups through the browser eTMSMeterSetup Allows access to Setup gt Data gt Meter Setup through Shipping the browser eTMSAccountSets Allows access to Setup gt Data gt Account Sets Shipping through the browser Shipping eTMSCatalog Shipping Q SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 5 1 5 Tools Configuring Groups and Users Security Permissions 5 14 Administrative Workstation Permissions The following permissions apply to the Administrative Workstation and or the Shipping Workstation Obsolete Permissions The following permissions are obsolete Feature Description 2222 SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Configuring Groups and Users Importing Users Action oe gt NOTE lf no password is imported for the user SendSuite will assign the user a default password of password Tools 5 You can import users into SendSuite into a group through a text file The Text File The text file must be named Userlnfo txt an
181. e creating a new Lane to Zone ID that you 12 Click Save then click Close base the name on the SCAC and the service Zone RBN Tab For example Joe s l Delivery s Lane to Zone You establish all the zones that a carrier delivers to when you complete the Zone ID for ground service RBN tab If a carrier delivers to a number of zones then you will create multiple might be JOESGRD lines on the Zone RBN tab Repeat the steps listed below for each Zone RBN that the carrier supports NOTE A Zone RBN Rate Base Number is an identifier for range of areas For example a carrier may charge 5 for every zip code from Minneapolis 55420 to Chicago 60609 The carrier may also specify that every zip code from Minneapolis to Chicago has a Zone RBN of 12345 By assigning a Zone RBN the charge does not have to be entered for every zip code between Minneapolis and Chicago In the Tariff Setup window 1 Click the Zone RBN tab 2 Click in the New Record line 3 Click the Details button 4 Type or select the two letter ISO country code in the Country field for example US 5 Enter the data necessary for rating depending on the way the carrier determines its rates You must select one of the following methods and complete the instructions in that section to correctly enter the Lane to Zone data e State e City and State e ZIP Code SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 6 5 6 Tariffs Creating a Cust
182. e cuane ars Menneencemnan sa came 2 43 IS A ee ene eee aee ae eae eee 2 43 ESAS 2 43 Administrator Guide V Table of Contents UO E DR ere OCR na net E rR rere ETN ten 2 43 FRACKAGO A VOC amines doi A ere anne cient 2 44 LECT CS eke a E Aa 2 44 Fale SOD GIOU Dn ence er eee ee ee 2 45 ROUNO NMS MUCHOS Upload E notes 2 45 A A cere area tea A neers 2 45 Shipment Planning S StI E a E E 2 45 SCICCHON CHICK AE E oe anes E ees 2 46 Perault Sends Ge aa ares oe ane ee 2 46 3 Shipping E MACKE E ene ere mene nee enn ene nee a rere eee 3 2 A rece E 3 2 TVACHINOUSINDII CIS selon e202 anotada 3 2 International DOCU Ene eects E canoso ee eens ee 3 4 OV CV ICV ia ee E MARE re Ben CN NEE A Uae OEE 3 4 USING hese IASTUCHONS io een ee 3 5 SHMACIO VALES tr a tent Are Men dio ro 3 5 MDI DIC Values al od E 3 6 EA Valles a a esse E eee cern eee 3 6 VEC HED OS ince terete in tanenaG arn E E teenanes 3 6 Commercial INVOICC ea eee er eae Cae 3 7 CORIICAIC OF OOIE de ee are 3 11 NAETA CenitiCate OF ONGUN et eee 3 14 Sy Bee eee eee ee eee eee E E 3 17 SMUD SCLC CIIS sera ree ae lee ee vee ee ee re 3 21 Creating a CUSTOM Sreem a a aa a a 3 21 Configuring the Appearance of the Shipping Screen 3 22 BA ESE E cee E E E N 3 23 AIRF EILS e ah Al eee RY caes 3 23 O 3 23 SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide vi Table of Contents SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Changing the Field Labels ococcccccconcnncooo 3 24
183. e done SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 5 7 Configuring Groups and Users Editing the User Properties and Permissions 5 8 Adding a User to a Group Groups eliminate the need to configure user rights individually To assign a User to a Group 1 2 3 4 Click the Membership tab Click the Add button Select the group Click Add User Properties Member of user group SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Configuring Groups and Users Editing the User Properties and Permissions TIP To quickly give the user read and write access to all features click the Check All Read Write button See the security permissions table on the next several pages for descriptions of each security permission This is strongly discouraged since most users should not have all the available rights Tools 5 Assigning Individual User Rights Use the following permissions to assign rights to the user regardless of what group the user is a member of 1 Click the Permissions tab 2 Select the checkboxes to the left of the features to assign the individual s permissions User Properties E x Membership Permissions Permissions of the user Shipper Through 4 ProductAdministration ServerDatabaseMaintenance QueryDatabase PurgeData EmptyCustomerData SupportDataAddress SupportDataAutoNumbers SupportDataCarrierSetup SupportDataCommodity Supp
184. e drop down arrow in the Scheduler Name field and select the appropriate task scheduler 3 Click the drop down arrow in the Group Name field and select the appropriate group name You can run more than one task group in a task schedule 4 Complete each of the following for each task group Start Time You can type in 12 hour or 24 hour format For example if you want a group to start at 10 30 every night you can type 10 30 PM or you can type 22 30 Re Start Every Mins If the group needs to run more than once during the day type the number of minutes between the times it launches For example if a group runs at 8 00 PM and you want to run it again at 10 00 PM the type 120 in this field Effective Duration Hours If you entered something in the Re Start field then you must indicate how many times the system should run that group For example if a group runs at 8 00 PM and you want to run it again at 10 00 PM and then stop the type 2 in this field Days Mon Sun Check the days you want the group to run Catch Up When you launch the Task Scheduler it will wait until it reaches the Start Time to run the task group For example if you set up a group to run at 2 00 AM and launch the scheduler at 10 00 AM it will wait until the next day to run that group If you select this checkbox the Task Scheduler will not wait to run a group In the example above it will run that group immedi
185. e field that will be used to select the XML file For example if the user types the bill number into the ConfigCharEight field on the shipping screen then open tbIShipmentHeader and select ConfigCharEight Click OK to save this setup 6 Setup the shipping screen See Modifying the Shipping Screen for XML File Link elsewhere in this chapter To set up the XML File Link In integration map follow the same general instructions for setting up a batch map See General Instructions elsewhere in this chapter You must make sure that the Host File Properties are set correctly and that they are in line with View used for the map After setting up the map properties you must configure the map for XML File Link following the instructions for File Link In Setup above Set up the shipping screen see next page SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 8 55 8 Integration XML Integration File Link Modifying the Shipping Screen for XML File Link 8 56 Once the integration files have been set up you must set up the Shipping screen To set up the Shipping screen 1 Make sure that the field you selected in Step 4 above is on the screen If it is not see Configure the Appearance of the Shipping Screen in Chapter 3 for instructions for adding a field to the screen 2 Add the XML File Link In and XML File Link Out sub events to processing event See Processing Events in Chapter 3 for instruction on how to add and
186. e fields print Generally this should not be changed e Length Defines the maximum length of the field e Field Type 11 Click View Format at any time to preview the label A Conquest Label Format Viewer E X Label Name l IPSGrdBar Length 4 50 Width 4 00 Scale 1100 Color Code Legend ReducedFont Standar Font BoldFont Constant Text 6 ROUTE C JJ 9 SERVICE TEXT TRACKING 11 TRACKING NUMBER TEXT 12 VARIABLE FIELD 1 13 VARIABLE FIELD 2 17 VERE 14 VARIABLE FIELD 3 15 VARIABLE FIELD 4 1 CONFIGURABLE TEXT 1 2 CONFIGURABLE TEXT 2 3 CONFIGURABLE TEXT 3 4 CONFIGURABLE TEXT 4 12 Close the Label Format Viewer when you are done previewing the label 13 Save and Close the Label Setup window when you are done 7 4 SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Labels 7 Selecting a Once you have labels defined and formatted you must then tell SendSuite when Label to use them Follow the instructions below to select labels for use To select a label 1 Open the Supporting Data module from the Control Center 2 Double click the Carrier amp Labels folder 3 Double click the Labels folder 4 Double click Label Selection A Label Selection E Carrier Shipper Label ID Carrier ID ESTM Service GRD Label Name UPSGrdBar st Secondary Selection Field ShipperlD y Secondary Selection Value PB Printer Selection is a Workstation Specific Printer Selec
187. e value If you want the rate to be the exact dollar amount that you typed in the Base Charge field then type a 0 in the Rate field If you want a dollar amount added to the Base Charge then type that value in the Rate field 6 Select Incremental Rates if the carrier uses incremental rates see below Repeat these steps for each weight range Each weight range goes ona separate line item 8 Click Save then click Close 9 Complete all the instructions in Carrier Setup elsewhere in this chapter NOTE Enabling Incremental Rate instructs SendSuite Shipping to apply the base charge to a shipment and apply the rate only to the difference between the minimum weight and the actual weight of the shipment For example if shipping 1100 lb using the above screen setup with Incremental Rate enabled SendSuite Shipping would apply a base charge of 120 and rate 99 Ib at 0 11 for a total of 130 89 Without Incremental Rate enabled SendSuite would apply the base charge and rate the entire 1100 lb totalling 241 00 SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Creating a Custom LTL Tariff from Scratch SCAC Code Tariffs 6 To create a custom LTL tariff from scratch you must complete the following tasks 1 E e Enter the carrier s SCAC code Create an address record for the carrier Create the carrier s tariff for each level of service the carrier provides Set up the carrier profile Defi
188. econd CARRIER CarrieriD Third Setting Group and Report Totaling Voided Shipments Fed OO Report Totaling Group Totaling lt j ConsName ChargeTerms Kaim DES DUES pgmn 40000 1000 fian 1000 1000 T 7 m 7 T 7 v K m M Type the text you want for the groups in the fields next to First Second and or Third Click the drop down arrow in the field s next to the group s you defined in step 2 Select the field containing the data corresponding to the group you specified in step 2 from the drop down in the field on the left SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Reports 4 Creating To modify total columns Custom 1 Click the Totals tab in the Custom Report Interface window Reports 2 If you want a total for the entire report click the box in the Report Totaling oa column next to the data field you want SendSuite to calculate Modifying Total E i Columns 3 If you want a total for a group within a report click the box in the Group Totaling column next to the data field you want SendSuite to calculate Saving a Custom To save a custom report Report 1 Click the Save Report button 2 Type a unique name for the report NOTE You cannot 3 Click OK replace a standard f SendSuite report with a NOTE Custom reports are saved in the Custom folder on the left side of the custom report You must main reports window You can apply filters and run them the way you
189. ect the scripting tool al 2 From the Object drop down select what section of the report the script applies to For example if you are assigning a value to a field in the report header select ReportHeader 3 In the sub routine type your script The system defaults to OnFormat which means that the script will run when the report is formatted If you want the script to run when the report is printed select OnBeforePrint from the Events drop down For example if you want to print the run date in the report header then set up the script like this Script Editor SS xi Object ReportHeader Events OnBetorePrint Sub OnFormat rpt sections Report Header controls txtDate text date rpt sections ReportHeader controls txtTime text time End Sub This example assumes that you have two data fields on your report called txtDate and txtTime SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Creating Custom Reports for the Shipping Workstation Creating a New Thin Client Report Reports 4 Toolbar Buttons To use a tool click the desired button on the toolbar Then in the report design window click and drag to create the space where you want that feature You can move items later by using the cursor tool and dragging or re sizing items However if you want to move an item from one section to another for example moving a date from a group header to a page header
190. ect to Driver do Microsoft Paradox Adb 4 00 6200 00 Microsoft Corporat DBMS Driver para o Microsoft Visual FoxPro 6 01 8630 01 Microsoft Corporati Microsoft Access Driver mdb 4 00 6200 00 Microsoft Corporati Microsoft 4ccess Treiber mdb 4 00 6200 00 Microsoft Corporati Microsoft dBase Driver dbf 4 00 6200 00 Microsoft Corporati J Kae ee A ORR OT Piet ee MH AIL ni agan ni L Am 4 gt NOTE If the correct An ODBC driver allows OOBC enabled programs to get information from driver is not loaded a ODBC data sources To install new drivers use the driver s setup program use the driver s setup program to install the driver It is the responsibility of the MIS Administrator at the l Customer Site to ensure 6 Click OK to exit that the correct driver is 7 From the File menu select Close to close Control Panel installed ma Apply SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 8 23 8 Integration Creating a DSN Creating the Data Source NOTE A Machine Data Source is specific to the machine and cannot be shared User Data Sources are specific to a user on the machine System Data Sources can be used by all users on the machine or by a system wide service 8 24 A DSN is created using Microsoft tools You can access these tools through the Control Panel or you can access the tools through the integration module in SendsSuite To create the DSN from within SendSuite Shipping
191. eeenenesneeeees 6 41 Creating the VB SCHO sas ee esse eases eae eee 6 47 Modifying the Sub event a a a a a 6 49 Associating the VB Script with a Shipping Screen 6 49 Adding Fields to the Shipping Screen 6 50 Processing a Shipment Using Manual Rates 6 51 LAO RE CNE yee oo ee ee eee pcan eee ea eer 6 52 OTERO MESCA e ete ela ree ge ee A ee eer 6 52 Creating game Feld i heuer eee nero ener eerie re eee eee epee 6 52 SCURI METAI caer ents ie Ores ne dalen Be ee Cake A 6 52 Setting the Zone Details aarc r iaei e i 6 53 Setting the Class Rale Snn a a a a a 6 54 Configuring the Carrier ococcccocncnccccononnccccononncnnnnoss 6 55 Creating an Address Record coooocococococococonocononononononnnanos 6 56 SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 6 1 6 Tariffs Creating a Custom Parcel Tariff from Scratch SCAC Code 6 2 To create a custom parcel tariff from scratch you must complete the following tasks 1 Enter the carrier s SCAC code Create an address record for the carrier Create the carrier s tariff for each level of service the carrier provides Set up the carrier profile Define any additional parameters such as discounts etc oo 2 21 Apply the carrier s new tariff s to the shipper s who will use the tariff Once you have analyzed the carrier s rate structure and entered the required data you must also test the tariff to be certain that it rate
192. egration 8 Filtering Records When you are sending data out of SendSuite Shipping to an ASCII file you can select which records are sent out Using a filter queries only a portion of the database while unfiltered searches query the entire database Filters can significantly improve performance on large databases To filter records 1 2 3 From the Map menu select View Filter Setup your criteria using the check boxes and Conquest Fields see below Click OK M Date TODAY n days MV Get records that have not yet been uploaded Uploaded Flag is NULL C ance Packine Date TODAY n days If you want to select record using a relative date then check this box Then in the Conquest Field you must select a date field The input mask on the Minimum and Maximum value fields will change from data entry to TODAY This will select only records with today s date To select a range of dates type an operator then a number For example if you want the system to select all the shipments with an ActualShipDate in the last week then set the minimum value to TODAY 7 Get records that have not yet been uploaded Uploaded Flag is NULL By checking this box SendSuite will only write out records where tb ShipmentHeader Uploaded in NULL This can be used very effectively with the Update Uploaded flag see Out Tab elsewhere in this chapter SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 8 13 8
193. eld Length Bo Default Label Bchid Ship Date Field is Required I Default Value TODAY Roll Up ltem I Translation Type y Table Name This identifies the SendSuite table that this is on Field Name This identified the field name on the SendSuite table Default Label This is the name of the field as it shows in the mapping tree Default Value If the value being transferred is NULL the SendSuite will use the default value The data input must match the Field Type To use the current date type TODAY this must be in caps Translation Type If the host and SendSuite use different values then you can set up a translation Once the translation has been defined then you can select that translation from the drop down here Field Type This identifies the type of data expected by SendSuite Field Length This identifies the maximum number of characters that the SendSuite database will accept for this field Field is Required If checked SendSuite will require a value for this field If no value is sent to SendSuite the system will return an error Roll Up Item This field applies when multiple line items are being sent to SendSuite If checked SendSuite will summarize all the line items into a single line Running XML Refer to the XML In instructions in SV7S9131 XML Configuration Guide SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 8 47 8 Integration XML Out Integration
194. en allowing your shipping operator to type or select a routing instruction during shipping To set up routing instructions 1 Open the Supporting Data module from the Control Center 2 Double click the Shipment Planning Setup folder 3 Double click Routing Instructions eA Routing Instructions 5 x Pirate ID Consiqnee Route Description Cosignee Route Instruction tor Florida 4 insiructimns l le Goto Label Carrier harge Label Criterion Units Low Val High Val Action Rate Shop Group Service Terma I I 10 A FL ES ici LES 11 150 A Fl BS 157 10000 E DOF LT Co Insert ling Delete fine s Delete AH Delete Record uve Close Type a unique ID or name for the routing instructions in the Route ID field Type a description for the routing instruction in the Description field optional 6 Use the Instructions field to display a pop up message when using the Call For Instructions Action in Chapter 2 of this guide Type the message you want to appear in this field NOTE Although optional a detailed description is very helpful for future reference or for others who want to understand the purpose of the routing instructions Explaining the logic used to create the routing instruction would be a helpful description Click the cursor in the Label column of the instruction line SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Routing Instructions Setting Up
195. en select Format Border Rich Edit Control T his tool creates a box on the report design window You can place labels and text fields in this area grouping them together Text that you type directly into the Rich Control area will appear on the design window but not on the actual report This allows you to put notes on the report without having them print SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 4 21 4 Reports Creating Frame This creates a frame or frames on the report Like Custom z the Rich Control Edit tool objects you place in these frames Reports for will be grouped together Once you create a frame you can split the frame horizontally or vertically into multiple panes the Shipping Workstation To split a pane click one of the split tools If you want to delete a pane click the delete icon in that pane A Sub Report Do not use this tool with SendSuite Shipping Thin Client Report Creating a New Page Break Use this tool to create a page break When you run a report it will create a new page when there is more data than will fit on a page This tool creates a page break in a specific spot on the report OLE Object Object Linking and Embedding OLE allows you to link to an item created in another application and embed it in your report For example if you exported data to Microsoft Excel and created a chart you can link to that chart whenever you run the report If the char
196. er Piece or Ship po gt Rate Type Iss Effective Date 01 101 05 Package Type s ia Supplemental Data Accessorial Lanes ID Discount Lanes Po y Service Days Lanes ID y NOTE If you have multiple shipper IDs that will use this carrier then Absolute Min Lanes ID Accessorial Incompatibility ID Py Tariff Increase ID y Service File Name Po you must set up each shipper individually A CD e co 49 Click on the binoculars button to the right of the Shipper field and select the shipper from list 50 Type MAN in the Carrier field and then press Tab 51 Type LTL in the Service field SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 6 45 6 Tariffs Manual Rating Creating the Manual Carrier NOTE The freight of all kinds FAK will make sure that the shipment rates regardless of the commodities that are entered at the time of shipping Make sure that the class you use here is the same as the class you used to set up the rate in the Tariff Setup 6 46 52 Select Y in the Matching service required on shipment field NOTE This will make sure that an operator does not see the dummy carrier when rate shopping for parcel shipments 53 Type an effective date of this carrier in the Effective Date field 54 Type MAN in the Reporting SCAC field 55 Type MAN in the Package Type s field 56 Type Y in the Allow Consolidation f
197. er can ship with The Available Address Owner IDs field lists the available addresses stored in the system The Selected Address Owner IDs field lists what addresses the user can ship to The Available Processing Screens field lists the available shipping screens stored in the system The Selected Processing Screens field lists what shipping screens the user can access Move fields from an Available to Selected field using the button Use the button to select all available fields Use the and to remove and remove all selections Click OK when you are done SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Configuring Groups and Users Editing the User Properties and Permissions NOTE Enabling Account Visibility allows you to limit what accounts and account sets users can access on the shipping screens Account Visibility groups are configured in the thin client Refer to the thin client s online help for more information on setting up Account Visibility groups NOTE By leaving any of the Selected fields blank the user can access all data for that selection For example if you leave Selected Account Set AV Group IDs blank the user will be able to access every account set group available in SendSuite Tools 5 Account Visibility 1 Click Acct Vis to change which accounts and account sets are visible to the User or Group on the shipping screen 10 x Selected Account Set AY Gr
198. er text file that is picked up by the host system It is important to review the host file structure and data before creating the Data Map in the SendSuite To do this 1 g 2 82m Get a copy of a host file and determine where it will be located Identify the data in the file i e the column headers Identify the data type being brought in e g dates numbers characters etc Identify the file layout e g comma delimited tab delimited etc Identify the line attributes e g combined header and line records or separate header and line records etc When preparing a data mapper in SendSuite you will follow this general set of instructions There is considerable detail when completing these steps so refer to the pages that follow for more detail E EE NM From the Control Center open the Integration module From the File menu select New or click the New button Select Data Mapper from the list of file types the click OK Set the direction the data will flow Locate the ASCII file that contains the data coming in or going out Select the view that will be used this determines the SendSuite tables that can be mapped to or from Define the host file properties delimiters separate or combined lines etc Map the fields Save the Data Mapper Run the data mapper from the Integration module or schedule it to run using the SendSuite Task Scheduler SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guid
199. es of the other three types The setup and selection of labels is already defined for carriers when the rates are loaded The billing and shipper label setup and selection are defined on a case by case basis Carrier labels can be modified as needed Label Setup is for defining the category or type of label a format is used for It is also where the format file is linked to a label definition and where the data elements are defined for a label An existing label can be used to create a custom label The label templates supplied cannot be changed To set up a label 1 Open the Supporting Data module from the Control Center 2 Double click the Carrier amp Labels folder 3 Double click the Labels folder 4 Double click Label Setup A Label Setup System Template Non modifiable i s m x Label Name UPSGrdBar _ FormatFie es Category Description 4x4 5 UPS maxicode tracking barcode only Carrier ground service C Compliance C Billing C Shipper UCC128 No Print Label For v Box V Pallet Y Container Save Delete Close SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Labels 7 Label 5 The General tab displays the label s name description and function Type a Configuration name and a brief description for the label 6 Select the label s function under Category Label Setup NOTE You can make only one selection If you want to use the same label for other func
200. es that a carrier delivers to when you complete the Zone RBN tab If a carrier delivers to a number of zones then you will create multiple lines on the Zone RBN tab Repeat the steps listed below for each Zone RBN that the carrier supports In the Tariff Setup window 1 2 3 4 Click the Zone RBN tab Click in the New Record line Click the Details button Type or select the two letter ISO country code in the Country field for example US Enter the data necessary for rating depending on the way the carrier determines its rates You must select one of the following methods and complete the instructions in that section to correctly enter the Lane to Zone data e State e City and State e ZIP Code SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Creating a Custom LTL Tariff from Scratch Tariff Setup NOTE The Zone RBN can be an alpha numerical or alpha numerical value If you make the Zone RBN an alpha or alpha numerical value then the value can be any length However if you make the value strictly numerical it must be 8 digits long NOTE You must always spell the city the same way SendSuite spells the name of the city in the Geograph table SendSuite will not recognize any variations of the spellings of city names NOTE Pitney Bowes recommends that you click the drop down arrow in the field and select the city name from the list to assure that you have the spelling that Se
201. ese tags would not be directly imported it is not necessary to map them or define their properties Qualifier Properties If the source file uses repeating segments this identifies the field as a qualifier and defines its value Map this field to Conquest table This applies to the parent node only In order to successfully map data into or out of SendSuite you must choose a SendsSuite table from this drop down list If the tag you have selected is a child then this field is disabled Identifies the XML Document Use this to flag the root node Prefix and suffix strings Identify any characters that precede or follow the actual data you are transferred for example remove quotation marks Strip spaces from field after reading it This is checked by default and it will remove any blank leading and trailing spaces from a field This can be useful if the host system always outputs the maximum number of character for a field padding the data with spaces SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide XML In Integration SendSuite Shipping Field Properties Integration 8 To define the SendSuite Shipping field properties left click on the SendSuite field then right click on the field name Select Field Properties from the popup menu Field Properties p J x Fie Edit Record Help S ml rela pi alaz 2 Table Name ftolShipmentHeader Field Type SQL_TIMESTAMP Field Name ScheduledShipDate Fi
202. esets for SendSuite Shipping use the Email Setup screen to configure your email server settings Configuration settings will vary depending on each email server s settings To test your email settings enter your server settings and type an email address in the To Email Address field Click Test Email and an email should arrive at the address you just entered Peripheral Setup At Peripheral Setup B x LTL Manifest Version Release 001 9 99 007 07 96 212 12 97 002 06 95 OP 100 7 99 _ 1TO42 10 99 557209 9 15 97 ANNNA ARA QQ1 Set Default Printer Save Close Obsolete Use the SendSuite Shipping Digital Dashboard to configure peripherals in SendSuite Shipping SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Supporting Data 2 Additional E Track Setup S u p po rt n g End Of Day Package Tracking Setup E x Data EWCF Max Inquiry Nr FEDX Max Inquiry RPS Max Inquiry a _ Selected_ Carrier SCAC Start End Timedelayforeachpage gt TC DHLP 3 MM o EWCF mm 0 FEDX mm oc RPS m UPS Today 5 Today 1 4 gt Start EOD Clear All Save Close In E Track Setup settings can be configured for the various carriers regarding if and when SendSuite goes out and tries updating tracking information Data Account Account 98765 gt Description Legal Record Date 110 04
203. et adoRst oDBHelp RunSQLReturnRS DataSourceName Null strStatus oUserReport ProcessRPX strReports adoRst strHostID if status is true that mean a report was generated If strStatus Then filename generated consists of sesionid and _user RDF this is in the temp d strFileName Shipments SessionlD strFileName strFileName strReports RDF strFileName strReports RDF 7 Save the script Embed the script in a shipping sub event To run the report you need to call the VBScript you just created To call a VBScript from the SendSuite Shipping Workstation it must be set up as a processing sub event You can embed the script in an existing Master Event or you can create a new User Defined event For instructions on setting up the report sub event see Processing Events in Chapter 3 of this guide SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Reports 4 Accounting Unlike most reports in SendSuite the accounting reports are run from the thin client These reports detail the shipments and costs associated with each Reports Account in the system Account Summary The Account Summary report displays each Account Sub Account and Sub Report Sub Account s activity for the time period specified The information presented includes L Pieces The total number of packages shipped for the specified time period Average Cost The average cost per package for the specified time per
204. ete Mapped ODBC Field See below This button is enabled only when you click on a SendSuite field that has a host value mapped to it Optimization This button is enabled only when you click on a SendSuite table or view Once the data exchange properties have been defined you must add the host tables to the screen to map the fields Use the button on the ODBC toolbar or select Operations gt Add Host Tables Add Host Tables Host Tables Available Host Tables Selected OK Help CHECK_CONSTRAINTS COLUMN_DOMAIN_USAGE COLUMNS CONSTRAINT_COLUMN_USAGE CONSTRAINT_TABLE_USAGE DOMAIN_CONSTRAINTS DOMAINS KEY_COLUMN_USAGE MSreplication_options PARAMETERS REFERENTIAL_CONSTRAINTS v To add a host table click on the table you want then click the Add button You may add multiple tables If you selected a table by mistake click on the table in the right pane of the window and click the Remove button SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide ODBC Integration in SendSuite Shipping Mapping the Fields NOTE For all database types if a host table name or host field name is two words with spaces the name must be enclosed by delimiters Common delimiters include quotation marks and brackets SSS SSSA SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide PB TMS Integration Northwind DB ODxX File Edit View Operations HostFields Tables Window Help
205. etrecords that have not yet been uploaded Uploaded Flag is NULL L lf Host Out File exists Overwrite C Abor Upload C Merge M Update UPLOADED flag corcel Hee Views From the drop down select the type of data you will export from SendSuite The selection you make determines the database tables and fields you can map to Once you make a selection and close the setting window you cannot change your selection XML ShipmentOut and XML LoadOut This will allow you to map data to the following tables or views tolShipmentHeader vBillTo tblAddress tblLoad tolShipmentLine vConsignee tblAddress tolMultipackTotals tblStop vShipper toblAddress Selection Criteria For Root Table Type or select the fields you will use to select data from the SendSuite database To select fields click the drop down under tbl Fields select the field then click Get Root Table Field Get records that have not yet been uploaded Uploaded Flag is NULL Select this box when you want to write out only records that have not been uploaded before SendSuite will look at tbIShipmentHeader Uploaded for a date or a NULL SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide XML Out Integration XML Map Settings Mapping the Fields Integration 8 If Host File exists If the file name you are writing to already exists your must tell SendSuite what to do with the new data e Overwrite This will re
206. ext to the Map Name field and select MAN_RATE Save your changes SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 6 49 6 Tariffs Manual Rating Associating the VB Script with a Shipping Screen 6 50 Adding Fields to the Shipping Screen Before you can process a shipment using manual rates you need to add the following fields to the shipment processing screen e tolShipmentHeader ConfigNumSix Manual Freight e tblShipmentHeader PreSpec ProNumber or ProNumber Manual Pro Number To add fields to the Shipping screen 1 Click the Screen tab 2 Fromthe Process menu select Add Field Select Process Field xi View by user defined name C View by system defined name ConfigCharSeven ConfigCharsix E ConfigNum Three ES reli sd E Contains Dry la Ice El CountryOfTranshipment CountryOfUltimateDestination Date Certain Delivery Delivery Confirm DeptRuling 3 Double click the tblShipmentHeader folder Click and drag ConfigNumSix to a location on your screen 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 for PreSpec ProNumber or ProNumber depending on if you are viewing by User Defined or System Defined name 6 Change the field labels e ConfignumSix Manual Rated Freight Cost PreSpec ProNumber Manual Rated Pro Number ar mal Rates SETUP SCREEN loj x Setting gs Events 5 Weight D A Ci l Pieces i i Charge an t OOOO es PRONS a AR ee
207. f the spellings of city names NOTE Pitney Bowes recommends that you click the drop down arrow in the field and select the city name from the list to assure that you have the spelling that SendSuite recognizes Se 15 xl Zone ID ESTMGRD y Country lus gt State CT y ity NEW HAVEN o Low Origin High Origin Low Dest po High Dest fo Weight Limit Zone RBN CTONLYO2 Save Delete Close a Type or select the two letter state code in the State field b Type or select the name of the city in the City field c Create a Zone RBN code and type it in the Zone RBN field NOTE The Zone RBN can be an alpha numerical or alpha numerical value If you make the Zone RBN an alpha or alpha numerical value then the value can be any length However if you make the value strictly numerical it must be eight digits long d Click Save then click Close SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 6 7 6 Tariffs Creating a Custom Parcel Tariff from Scratch Tariff Setup NOTE The Zone RBN can be an alpha numerical or alpha numerical value If you make the Zone RBN an alpha or alpha numerical value then the value can be any length However if you make the value strictly numerical it must be 8 digits long 6 8 ZIP Code lf the carrier s origin and destination points are within a range of ZIP codes then you can use the ZIP code option This option is the o
208. fault these as Not Supported unless you set them up NOTE For some as dangerous goods e Discount Lanes Use this to set up the discounts you have negotiated with your carriers e Service Days Lanes Use this to tell SendSuite how soon a package will get to its destination using this tariff For example if this is a second day tariff then SendSuite needs to know that it cannot be used for overnight delivery SendSuite will default delivery days to O unless you set them up e FAK Lanes Use this to set up freight of all kinds arrangements you have negotiated with your carriers e Absolute Min Lanes Use this to set up the minimum charge or weight your carrier requires For example an LTL carrier s tariff may go as low as 50 pounds but the carrier has told you they will not come to your warehouse unless you have 1 000 pounds to ship 6 38 SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Borrowing a Tariff Clone a Carrier Setup NOTE For some carriers such as DHL hazardous materials may also be referred to as dangerous goods Create the Carrier Address Record Tariffs 6 e Accessorial Incompatibility Use this to tell SendSuite what accessorials cannot go together For example your carrier may support both inside delivery and hazardous materials but they will not support inside delivery of hazardous materials e Tariff Increase Use this to set up temporary tariff increases until the
209. ferent from the physical file name O shipmentactivity itg UserReportTables vbs O SLl itg SLl vbs O shipmentactivityxml itg ShipmentActivityXML vbs SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 4 23 4 Reports Creating Custom Reports for the Shipping Workstation Writing VB Script Running the Report 4 24 6 Modify the following variables O DataSourceName In quotations type the SQL statement you will use to select the data for the report This should be the same as the SQL statement you wrote in the report design OO strReports In quotations type the name of your report Do not include the file path nor the file extension The SendSuite Shipping component will look in C Program Files pbTranscape Conquesi rpx for the report Description ShipmentActivity This map will be used for Shipment Processing Language visual Basic Script UserReport Private Sub UserReport Dim oUserReport Dim oDBHelp Dim strStatus Dim strReports Dim strHostID Dim strHTML Dim strFileName Dim strWhere Dim adoRst Dim DataSourceName DataSourceName SELECT FROM vReportShipmentLoads This should be the same as what is in the report design strReports Report Name Type the report name but not the file path nor file extension rpx strHostID Shipments SessionlD Set oDBHelp CreateObject phCOEDataServiceHelper clsDBHelper Set oUserReport CreateObject pbCOEUserRpt clsUserRpt S
210. formance l Reorganize data and index pages O Reorganize pages with the orginal amount of free space Change free space per page percentage to 0 FT Update statistics used by query optimizer Sample 0 Of the database Remove unused space from database files vehen it grows beyond ea ME Amount of free space to remain atter shrink i gt Of the data space ochedule There are no operations to schedule Change Cancel Help 13 From the Database Integrity Check dialog box leave the default settings selected Do not make any changes to the options on this dialog box 14 Click Next SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide SendSuite Database Maintenance Creating a Database Maintenance Plan AE NOTE Ideally assum ing you are not shipping on Sunday the sched ule should be set up as follows Tuesday through Saturday at 2 A M AAA AA NOTE If you have made changes click OK and then click Next SendSuite Shipping Server 1 15 Accept the defaults on the Specify the Database Backup Plan dialog box Database Maintenance Plan Wizard local x Specify the Database Backup Plan Specify the database backup plan to prevent data loss due to system failure Location to store the backup file C Disk Schedule Occurs every 1 week s on Tuesday Wednesday Thursday a Friday Saturday at 2 00 00 AM
211. fy 11 Type the effective date of this carrier in the Effective Date field MA llos Cano 12 Optional Type the expiration date for this carrier in the Expiration Date field in order to access this tariff If the shipping 13 Type or select the carrier s SCAC in the Reporting SCAC field operator rate shops all tariffs SendSuite Shipping will not look at this one SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 6 19 6 Tariffs Carrier Setup NOTE You must set up a separate carrier record for every carrier tariff you wish to use NOTE If you do not make a selection SendSuite will default to Rate Per Piece 6 20 14 Optional Select the type of package used by this carrier and this tariff 15 16 17 18 19 Click the binoculars button next to the Package Type s field and select the package NOTE In order for the SendSuite to select a tariff with specific package type the shipping operator must specify that package type in the shipping module If the shipping operator does not specify the package type shown on the carrier setup SendSuite will skip this tariff To have SendSuite use this tariff regardless of the package type leave this field blank Type the number of ZIP code digits SendSuite must match before it can rate a package in the Zip Digits Required field Indicate whether this tariff allows consolidation of several shipments into one load in the Allow Consolidation
212. he user can change them There are three more miscellaneous charge amount fields you can place on the shipping screen To have the labels show up on the document the user must enter those names on the shipping screen ina MiscChargeDesc field International Documents Certificate of Origin 2 EXPORTER Primii ce acia lomo and ali inhalar 207 Conde Pitney Bowes Shipping 10800 Lyndal Avenue South MINNEAPOLIS MN US UNITED STATES 1 CONSIGNED TO French Destination 133 Rue Paris RF4 6 FR FRANCE 4 NOTIFY PARTY ANTERMEMATE COSINE Came ail adri Intermediate Cons Mame 101 Intermediate way SAINT PAUL MN 55101 US UNITED STATES CERTIFICATE OF ORIGIN Page 1 of 1 121234566700045915 ZPCODE ref nr 55420 T POR WARING AGENT Mame amd akies rats Agent Mame 101 Agent Dr MINNEAPOLIS MN 33420 E POINT STATE OF ORKON OA FTZ NUMBER N T DOMESTIC ROUTINE ENPORT INSTRAMOTICIAS 12 PRECARRIAGE BY 13 PLACE OF RECTIFT DY PRE CARRIER United Farcel Service MINNEAPOLIS i 14 EXPORTING CARRIER United Parcel Service IS FORT OF LOADEMVERPORT WA LAAEN A l pon of export load pier 1 PORENGN PORT OF UNLOADING Vene and air only 17 PLACE OF DELIVERY BY ONICARRIER VL TOPE OF MOVE Ma CORTAR Were candy port of unloading FRANCE Paris FRANCE IEC O Ke MARKS AND NUMBERS de 121234566700043915 Package 1 121234566700045915 Package 1 DESCRIPTION OF COMMODITIES la Schedule A demil GROSS
213. hen using the Meter Simulate Trip task When Meter Simulate Trip is executed the shipment is frozen with no option of executing events such as Unrate against the shipment Use this event in the case that a shipment that has had the Meter Simulate Trip event executed against it requires changes that cannot occur on a frozen shipment Default you set on the Defaults tab Hold set up on the Defaults tab in the Sub Event Properties box Power of Attorney Presents a UPS specific form for when you Form want to give UPS the power of attorney for the shipment This is on a per shipment basis Present ERR Presents the electronic return receipt signature Signature file for a POST tracking number Print Airbill Prints a carrier s airbill on the printer you selected in the Peripheral setup The ActualShipDate and the AirbillPrinted flag are updated Print Carrier Label Prints the carrier s label on the printer specified in the Peripheral setup Print Carrier Label Prints the carrier s label on a network label LAN printer Print Carrier Label Prints to the server s local label printer to speed Local up printing time This sub event is only suitable for stand alone SendSuite Shipping systems Cover with the ship to and ship from addresses shipments See SV7S9146 for more information Processing Events 3 34 SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Shipping Screens Processing Events Shipping 3 If any of the f
214. ia a laser printer Graphic label support is available for e UPS excluding UPS Basic e FedEx excluding IEXF Fedex International Express Freight and IECF Fedex International Economy Freight e DHL e Golden State Overnight e OnTrac e Eastern Connection e USPS IOP only EXAMPLE Customers with multiple remote locations with lower volumes of shipping often do not want to purchase a thermal label printer for each location Most customers however typically have access to a laser printer Graphical label printing will allow customers to print UPS FedEx and DHL carrier labels to a laser printer Graphic labels are required for desktop shipping Refer to SV7S9124 for additional information on graphic labels Setting the The SendSuite application server must have the Windows fonts set to large Windows Font Size To set the Windows font size 1 Right click the on the desktop and select Properties from the shortcut menu 2 Go to the Settings tab and then click the Advanced button 3 On the General tab select Large Fonts from the drop down menu Dell P990 and Intel r 82815 Graphics Controller Properties General Adapter Monitor Troubleshooting Color Management Display Font Size Large Fonts 125 normal size 120 dpi Compatibility Some programs operate improperly if you do not restart your computer after you change display settings After change display settings Restart the computer bef
215. ield 57 From the drop down in the Tariff ID field select the tariff you setup before and then press Tab The tariff ID will be MAN1 followed by a date 58 In the FAK Lanes field type MAN1 59 Click Save 60 On the Carrier Setup window click the FAK tab 61 Click the Details button PA FAK Lane Details FAK Lane ID MAN1 y State Gy p o Low High Orig Low Dest o Hight Dest o ffective Date 01 01 05 Expiration Date 7 vv 15 x Save Delete Close 62 In the Country field type US 63 Input a date in the Effective Date field 64 In the FAK Params ID field type MAN1 65 Click the FAK Parameter button x FAK Params ID MAN1 Use Detailed FAK T FAK Freight Class 5 Freight Class es FAK Class 4 Delete Line s Clear 66 In the FAK Class field type 100 SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Manual Rating Creating the Manual Carrier Creating the VB Script Tariffs 6 67 Click Save and then click Close 68 Click Save and then click Close 69 Close the Carrier Setup form 70 Close the Supporting Data module The following script sets carrier and service values on the shipping screen There are several variables in the script that are specific to your operation Before writing the script identify the following e Screen ID To get the ID open the Shipping module a
216. igit number SendSuite Shipping prints only the first six digits as required on the Certificate of Origin Prints all 3 Shipping International Documents NAFTA Certificate of Origin 3 16 11a Authorized none manually written MN Signature 11b Company vShipper ShipperName vane A AAA Document Field SendSuite Shipping Source 11c Name vShipper ShipperAttention 11d Title vShipper ShipperAttentionTitle 11e Date L ScheduledShipDate Selects one SH ScheduledShipDate SH ActualShipDate 11f Telephone vShipper ShipperPhoneNr Prints both Number vShipper ShipperFAXNr SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide International Documents SED U S DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE 1 5 CENSUS AURREAN Economics and Statiuics Adminiseaton BUREAU OF EXPORT ADMINISTRATION SHIPPER S EXPORT DECLARATION Page 1 of 1 FORM 1525 V 7 23 2000 OMB Mo Hat 57 IEUS PRINCIPAL PARTY IN INTEREST USFI Doomin mamo ard ANCES Pitney Bowes Shipping 10800 Lyndal Avenue South arco ARRAS Roa MINNEAPOLIS MN 55420 12123456670004501 5 ou oe E 555221111 EX men O da ULTIMATE CONSIGKEE Complete marmo and sde French Destination 123 Rue Paris RF4 6 FRANCE bb INTERMEDIATE CONSIONEE Complas name and adden Intermediate Cons Name 101 Intermediate way SAINT PAUL UNITED STATES S FORWARDING AGENT Compitc name mSaiaca g Agent Name 101 Agent Dr mE i MINE IS MN 55420 e a 1 COUNTRY OF ULTIMATE DE
217. ile C Disk Schedule Occurs every 1 week s on Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday at 2 00 00 AM Change 1 16 SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide SendSuite Database Maintenance Creating a Database Maintenance Plan A NOTE The transaction log backups contain any changes since the last complete or transaction log backup EAT AA NOTE lf you have made changes click OK and then click Next 24 20 26 27 28 SendSuite Shipping Server 1 Select a tape drive from the drop down menu NW Alternatively you can save to your local hard drive by selecting Disk If necessary click Change and modify the schedule The default is every day at 12 00 AM NOTE In a high volume operation you may want to run this backup several times a day You might consider backing up more frequently during the work day For example every two hours This would create 4 transaction logs each day with one complete backup Click Next From the Specify Transaction Log Backup Disk Directory select Use this directory Click the ellipsis to navigate to another local drive or tape backup device This should be the same directory as in Step 20 Database Maintenance Plan Wizard local specify Transaction Log Backup Disk Directory Specify the directory in which to store the transaction log backup file Directory in which ta store the backup file
218. ile Link 8 56 Conditional LOGIC Serono aa a a 8 57 SendSuite Shipping TOOISET o occoccccoconcoonoconooooos 8 58 Conditional Logic Operations oooocooococcconoconnoononnoconnnoos 8 59 VBScript Conditional Logic Properties 8 60 IO OCIO A A near ree 8 61 RUSMI OS CIP OEE E eee eae eee erate RG a 8 61 Attaching the Script to a Shipping Screen 8 61 Attaching a Script to an Integration MAap 8 61 IMPONGA a FTOM ASCE T uuiesc A a E yee 8 62 Importing Address Data ooocccccocnnnoccnnnocaconocnanonos 8 62 Extracting the Data From ASCEN1 1 ccsccccseereeees 8 62 Importing the Ascent Data into SendSuite Shipping 8 63 VO VINO RO SUIS acabes olaaa acido o iNaU A 8 64 8 2 SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping AdministraiVTG0ltd Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 8 2 Data Mapper Preparation NOTE A consistent file format is critical for Data Mapper In integration maps Changes in the file format can cause the import to fail General Instructions Integration 8 SendSuite can send and receive data from flat ASCII text files using the Data Mapper feature These transactions usually process information in batch For example a host system writes out all the morning s orders to a file at 10 00 SendSuite picks up those orders through the Data Mapper Once the shipments have been processed SendSuite writes shipping information to anoth
219. illTo fields to tolAddress Add Change Carrier Saves the information ean oao Seeme oman Add Change ShipFor Saves the information in the vShipFor fields to tolAddress Address Verify Validates the address on vConsignee Check Consignee the box next to Save Consignee Info to update tolAddress If tolAddress Cleansed 1 then the address is not verified again Bill of Lading Prints the Bill of Lading The ActualShipDate and the BOLPrinted flag are updated This sub event can only be used if the carrier service is LTL Billing Label Prints a billing label Billing Label This prints the billing label for an entire multipack Multipack Breakup Shipment This creates a number of new shipments based on the number in the Pieces field The multipack process does this automatically use this sub event to do it manually Carrier Terms amp Presents the DHL Carrier terms and conditions Conditions information sheet for international shipping Change Shipper Changes the shipper address information during shipment processing Check Package Max This checks the max weight entered in the package attribute screen against the actual weight of the box An error message is provided for overweight boxes but this does not stop the shipment from being processed Clear Weight on Deletes tblShipmentLine Weight Shipment DeleteMPShipments Deletes all the shipments in a multipack SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator
220. ing thin client Read Only is not supported for this function eTMSDataAccount Allows access to the sub sub account data entry screen Shipping through the browser eTMSDataAddress Allows access to the address screen through the Shipping browser eTMSDataShipperHandlingFees Allows access to the shipper handling fees through the Shipping browser eTMSDataCarrierAccounts Allows access to the carrier account setup page Shipping through the browser 5 12 SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Admin Admin Admin Admin Shipping Tools 5 User Properties Dialog Box Permissions Tab Applies To browser browser browser browser eTMSDataBOLPreferences Shipping the browser browser eTMSDataCarrierAndLabels Allows access to the Carrier and Labels tab Shipping Extended Shipping Templates Enables access to extended templates in the shipping Shipping screen setup and through the browser Batch BOL Allows user to run a batch of Bills of Lading through the Shipping interface Meter Settings Allows users access to the meter settings Shipping eTMSPBLinks Allows access to Setup gt Pitney Bowes Links through Shipping the browser eTMSPWDMaintenance Allows access to Setup gt Password Maintenance Shipping through the browser eTMSReports Allows access to the Reports menu through the Shipping browser eTMSDeliveryinfo Allows access to Shipping gt Delivery Information through th
221. ing problems with the backup procedure 1 20 SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide SendSuite Database Maintenance Understanding the Transaction Log SendSuite Shipping Server 1 The transaction log is a record of all modifications inserts updates and deletes that have occurred in the database The transaction log is used in case a database is badly damaged A user could recover all or most of the same data using the transaction log The user could restore the previous day s database apply the transaction log and have no data lost The transaction log is also used for debugging purposes Because changes to the database are not necessarily written to disk immediately this log is the only means whereby transactions can be recovered in the event of a system failure lf a data file is damaged and must be restored from backup all of the transactions that have occurred on that data file must be replayed to recover the database to the point just before the failure Because the transaction log is critical for this process and has limited space transaction log backups must be performed You must save all of the transaction log data that has been generated since the last backup to recover the database The default setting is to Automatically Grow file by 10 Percent with unrestricted file growth Depending on the number of changes to your database with the default setting the transaction log can grow to be
222. ing tools in the next section in this chapter or you can write your own script see Manually Writing a SQL Statement elsewhere in this chapter Click the Add button If you are going to write a multiple line statement then follow these steps a Click And or Or This tells the system whether a record must meet all the criteria And or just one of the criteria Or For example if you want to select a record where the warehouse number is 5 and the order number is 123 then use And b Click the Add button to add the new line c Repeat Step 5 and Step 6 until you have completed the WHERE clause Click the Close button Any changes are automatically saved when you close the window SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 8 35 8 Integration ODBC Using Sendsuite Shipping Supplied Scripting Tools Integration To use the SendSuite supplied scripting tools use the fields on the screen in SendSuite 1 In the First Parameter box click on the first host field you want use for your Shipping selection 2 Select the operator you want to use to compare the host data with what follows For example if you want to select a record where the order number Selection Criteria is 1234 then select the operator 3 In the Second Parameter box tell the system what value you are looking for In the Type box tell the system where you will be getting the data e Prompt User This feature will prompt the user but it
223. inistrator Guide 8 25 8 Integration ODBC Integration in SendSuite Shipping Preparing for Integration 8 26 Open Database Connectivity ODBC is possible with SendSuite This method of integration requires a valid and updated driver for the host database See Verifying that the ODBC Driver for Database is Installed elsewhere in this chapter The fundamental principle of ODBC is that each database talks directly to the other database using the ODBC driver A database can add or update records on the other database One advantage of using ODBC is the real time exchange of data between databases For example when Data Mapping is used records are downloaded and uploaded in batch meaning that they sit idle for some period of time On the other hand when an ODBC call is made the data is taken from one database and written to the other immediately You should review the host database before beginning the integration When you look at the host database write down the names of the tables that you will be using Open the tables and write down the names of the fields that contain the data you will bring into SendSuite as well as the names of the fields you will write information to on the host NOTE While you are using the SendSuite integration tools you have a live connection to the host database This may lock other users out of the database SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Integration 8
224. iod O Total Cost PAGE 1 of 1 Account Summmary Repo Date 12 05 2006 08 45 AM Actual Ship Dates 11 01 2006 1252006 shipper ID ALL Carrier ID ALL Pieces Avg Cost Total Cost Shipper PB Account Sub Account Sub Sub Account renee 135 15 470 2 005 500 Engineering Minnesota Development 4 1 3 620 54 450 Engineering Minnesota OA a be do bY ABD Finance 400 OA 4 51 305 9 20 Finance Connecticut 4 bY 345 29 370 Finance Minnesota e 10 p 543 05 430 GMs 600 Development 2 bY 635 15 20 PE Totals 162 14 109 2 205 30 Grand Totals 162 14 109 f2 205 7 30 SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 4 25 Accounting Reports Transactions by Account Report 4 26 The Transaction by Account report lists the carriers and services used by each Account Set ID and the shipping charges incurred for a specified time period Transactions by Account Summmary Actual Ship Dates Shipper ID Carrier 1D Shipper PB TranScape 11 01 2006 12 5 2006 ALL FEDX FEDX 7905 Golden Triangle Dr Eden Prairie MN 553447220 Account Set ID Account ID Carrier FEDX FEDX FEDX FEDX Sub Account Service Pieces Pieces 2PM 4 11 76 GRD 25 73 53 NEAM 1 2 94 NPM 4 11 76 34 Account Set ID EMD ENGINEERING MN DEV T Account ID Engineering Carrier FEDX FEDX EMD sub Account Minnesota Service Pieces Pieces HOM 1 50 00 NAM 1 50 00 2 Account Set ID FM FINANCE MN
225. ion to select fields 1 Left click on the label of the field you want to change 2 Type an ampersand amp in front of the letter you want to be a hot key For example if you want to use the P in Pieces change the label to amp Pieces SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Shipping 3 Shipping You can change the behavior of the fields on the screen These behaviors include Screens e Holding data from one shipment to the next Field Properties Making a field read only e Setting a default value e Changing the data source e Requiring the user to input data before they can save a shipment These properties can be set on the Screen tab or on the Defaults tab Setting Properties on the Screen Tab 1 Click the Screen tab 2 Click the cursor in the field you want to edit 3 Right click outside the field to display the menu 4 Select Field Properties 5 Make changes to any of the field properties listed in the Properties window see below 6 Click Close Properties Bill Nr a xi Internal Name BilNr Internal Table tbIShipmentHeader User Label BiINr Default Value Font Size medium Display Width 800 Suggested Field length 25 B Pixels Per Char e Text Color Example Color Default Back Color Tab Stop i Read Only Hold Single r Hold MultiPack Source Assign Source Table tblShipmentHeader Close SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Admi
226. ipt 6 49 6 50 processing shipments with 6 51 SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Index N NAFTA Certificate of Origin 3 14 3 15 3 16 O ODBC 8 26 8 27 8 28 8 29 8 30 8 31 8 32 8 33 8 34 8 35 8 36 8 37 creating a new ODBC map 8 27 8 28 8 29 host field properties 8 32 8 33 mapping fields 8 31 shipper alerts 2 14 SQL WHERE statement 8 35 toolbar 8 30 Operating system version compatibility B 2 P Parcel Tariff address record 6 3 creating custom tariff from scratch 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 5 6 6 6 7 6 8 6 9 6 10 incremental rates 6 10 SCAC code 6 2 tariff setup 6 4 6 5 6 6 6 7 6 8 6 9 6 10 Peripherals Supported See Appendix A Product Data 2 9 2 10 2 11 adding 2 9 2 10 2 11 international products 2 11 product fields 2 10 PRO Numbers 2 18 2 19 Purging Database Records 5 34 5 35 5 36 empty customer data 5 36 Q Queries See Database Queries R Rate Shop Groups creating 2 20 2 21 dual rating 2 21 Remark Codes 2 12 adding 2 12 Reports custom reports See Custom Reports for the shipping workstation 4 11 4 12 4 13 4 14 4 15 4 16 4 17 4 18 4 19 4 20 4 21 4 22 4 23 4 24 thin client report 4 12 4 13 4 14 4 15 4 16 4 17 4 18 4 19 4 20 4 21 4 22 exporting a report from crystal reports 4 10 importing external reports 4 8 4 9 4 10 running in SendSuite format 4 2 I Index Restoring the SendSuite Database 1 23 1 24 1 25 Routing
227. iration Date if Effective Date 101 01 05 Saturday Pickup Verbal Confirmation J Inside Pickup T POD M Saturday Delivery l Call Tag T Priority Alert M Signature Delivery l Sunday Pickup T Tracking l Return Service Requested Certain Delivery M Sunday Delivery l Inside Delivery l Leave No Response l Evening Delivery Insurance l Handling l Lab Pack l Appointment Delivery l Risk Insurance l Single Shipment SED l Exception Email Notify l Basic flex Insurance T Registered Mail T Fax Notify Fee Registered Insurance Email Notify Fee T Certificate of Origin l Delivery Email Notify T Return Email Notify T Return Fax Notify l Exchange Collect l Expanded Flex Insurance l Time in Transit Insurance Hazardous Materials Y COD l AOD l Delivery Confirmation T Intl Billing Terms Hold at Location l Commercial Invoice l Restricted Delivery Save Delete Close Select the accessorials that cannot be combined Type the effective date of the incompatibility Click Save then click Close on the Accessorial Incompatibility Details window Click in the next line down and repeat step 11 through step 14 for every other combination of accessorial incompatibility SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Tariffs 6 Temporary On occasion carriers may increase their rates before Pitney Bowes can send Tariff Increase you an update To temporarily define the tariff increase Open the Supporting D
228. it Selection Criteria Click in the statement you need to modify Modify the statement e If you used the SendSuite tools to create the statement then change the selections on the top of the window then click the Update Edit button e If you created the statement manually then click the Update Edit button Change your criteria in the window then click OK Click the Close button SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 8 37 8 Integration XML In Integration Preparation 8 38 XML refers to eXtensible Markup Language SendSuite can be setup to integrate with a host application using XML files There are many differences between XML and Data Mapping but one of the key differences is that XML integration is executed from the shipping client whereas the Data Mapper is executed from the Administrative Workstation SendSuite can import data structured in an XML format It can also export data in an XML format whether that is into an existing XML document or SendSuite can create an XML file with all the data and tags There are many ways SendSuite can integrate using XML Here are a few examples e Batch Integration The host application rewrites an XML file SendSuite imports those records in a single upload processes the records then exports the data back to the XML file The host application reads the new information into its database then rewrites the XML document with new shipments e Semi bat
229. ity menu 3 Open the Users amp Groups folder 4 NOTE Pitney Bowes strongly encourages keeping secu rity x enabled If you Welcome to the Group Creation wizard It allows you to e disable secu rity every create a new user group for this application user operates as an administrator and can Double click Create a New Group What is the Group ID A make changes that mig ht damage the What is the group name system rr You can include a comment for the new group El Add Cancel Type the Group ID Type the Group name Type a Name and Comments optional Click Add Right click the group you just created 200009 0 Select Properties 5 2 SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Configuring Groups and Users Setting Up Groups TIP To quickly give the group read and write access to all features click the Check All Read Write button See Security Permissions elsewhere in this chapter for descriptions of each security permission EA 11 Click the Permissions tab Group Properties 12 Assign permissions for the group by clicking in the boxes to the left of the desired features 13 Click OK SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 5 Tools Configuring Groups and Users Setting Up Users 2 NE Select the Tools module from the Control Center Select Users Groups from the Security menu Open the Users amp Groups folder
230. k POD data from USPS PB Secure Archive Tracks shipments in a batch See E Track in Chapter 3 The workstation running the task must have Internet http access SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Task Scheduler Empty Customer Data Executes the Empty Customer Data feature purging data from the database See Emply Customer Data elsewhere in this chapter This sends all manifests that have been queued in tolPBQueue This task can run even when tbIPBQueue is empty That means that you can run it several times every day Available Tasks End of Day Carrier Communication Tools 5 Feature whatitDoes Depending on the carrier the workstation running the task may need to communicate through port 443 Get Package Status Retrieves carrier package status information Print Report Prints a SendSuite report See Reports in Chapter 4 You must have a filter defined for the report See Creating and Saving Report Filters in Chapter 4 Print Small Package Allows reprint of manifest Manifest for manifesting carriers Process Downloaded Carrier Data This processes carrier rate and route files for carriers such as DHL and Eastern Connection Processes carrier package status information This feature deletes all the shipments that have the same GroupID Deletes shipments You can specify criteria For example you can delete all shipments that are more than 60 days ol
231. l tab you can edit the user s name password as well as what screens and defaults are assigned to the user x General o UserID Joe Shipper UserName Joe Shipper SS Password 4 Confirm Password p Comment Account Set ID Account ID Sub Account ID sub Sub Account ID Yv GMS v y Yv i GMS Finance PBDS Cargo PBDS Shipping Default ShipmentOwnerlD Default AddressOwnerlD Default Shipping Startup Screen IPB y JUPSINTL y y E AddressOwnerlDListD selected Processing Screens Shipper UPSINTL Customs Declarations Detailed Meter Shipping Detailed Pkg Shipping Manual Rating Single Use Recipient OK Cancel DY Acctvis 1 optional Under Default Accounting IDs select the user s default account settings to appear on shipping screens See page 5 7 for more information on configuring Accounting Visibility The boxes underneath the Default Accounting IDs display which accounting visibility groups the user can access jee IDs 2 optional Select a default Shipper for the user under the Default ShipmentOwnerlD drop down menu IMPORTANT To use the SendSuite Basic edition shipping templates you must assign a Default ShipmentOwnerlD for individual users or groups The Basic templates assume the user ships from the same location The user does not have access to theShipper field 3 optional Select a default recipient for the user under the Default AddressOwnerlD drop down menu 4 option
232. lationship A blank in the Account Set ID field is NOT valid N No validation is performed Search By y En Shipping Actions Setup Reports eQuery Help Logout s essage E Address ID PB Carrier I Agent 7 Consignee 7 Seller Benef J NAFTA Eff Date ae Shipper M Manufacturer I NAFTA Exp Date Ship For Dist Center COD Type lo P Intermediate Trading Partner I Sold To Hold at Location DUNS Nr 4 Bill To Haz Attention M Account Validation Type V Valid Account Set Required Blank is y Remit To Gov t Agency 7 Broker f Alt Return 7 X Valid Account Set Required Blank is NC W Valid Account Set Required Blank is als N No account validation performed i Using the Open a Shipping screen with the AccountSetID field enabled and type your Accounting Fields Account Set into the field The Account and associated Sub Accounts will be automatically displayed These cannot be changed on the Shipping Screen ii Charge Terms PPD kl Phone 1234567890 Date Req COD amt 0 00 AccountsetID PB P Declared Value 0 00 Account IGE Ship Date 12 11 2006 SubAccountID Cust Shipper PB P subSubAccountID PEDS See Chapter 4 for more information on viewing Accounting Reports SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 2 29 2 Supporting Data Additional Supporting Data NOTE If you specify that the user must select a valid accoun
233. ld and then press Tab 23 In the Tariff Revision field type MAN1 and then press Tab 24 In the Package Type s field select MAN 25 Type LTL in the Service field then and press Tab 26 Click in the circle to the left of Class Rates table 27 Click in the circle to the left of Lane to Zone 28 In the Lane to Zone ID field type MAN1 29 Click Save and then click Close 30 Click the Zone RBN tab SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 6 43 6 Tariffs Manual Rating 31 Click the Details button MEE Creating the Manual Carrier Low Origin High Origin Low Dest High Dest 32 Type US in the Country field 33 Type MAN1 in the Zone RBN field 34 Click Save then click Close 35 Click the Rates tab 36 Click the Details button A Class Rates Details Delete Line s Clear Delete 37 Type 100 in the Freight Class field NOTE Your freight classes may vary when you input the shipment Instead of creating a rate for every class you are telling the system to use one rate for all classes The class you use here has no effect on what prints on the bill of lading The BOL will always contain the commodities and classes you entered on the shipping screen We will set the freight of all kinds FAK parameter later 38 Type MAN1 in the Low RBN field 39 Type MAN1 in the High R
234. le relational or other database on a remote computer The data source consists of the data that the user wants to access and its associated operating system DBMS database management system and network platform if any used to access the DBMS Database vendors provide drivers which implement the specific interfaces with their database system Users then use the ODBC Data Source Administrator from the Control Panel to provide logical names for data sources Applications can then do their work without knowing any of the particulars of the database system being used This allows all applications to work with databases on a wide variety of platforms The ODBC Administrator is installed when Windows is installed The ODBC Administrator manages the ODBC drivers present on a system When the ODBC Administrator receives SQL statements from the application it directs them to the appropriate ODBC driver The ODBC driver then processes the SQL statements and gives them the appropriate DBMS to execute For example if the intended ODBC data source is a Microsoft Access database the ODBC Administrator sends the SQL statements to the Microsoft Access ODBC driver The Access driver then processes the SQL statements and interfaces with the Access database To use a data source you must configure the data source in the ODBC Administrator You must also install the appropriate ODBC driver This lesson provides procedures to configure the data source in th
235. lect the carrier s SCAC code in the SCAC field SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 6 39 6 Tariffs Borrowing a Tariff Create the Carrier Address Record Set Up the Carrier PRO Numbers or Tracking Numbers Select or Create a Label Add the Carrier to a Rate Shop Group and or Routing Instruction 6 40 9 Optional Specify the following about the carrier e IATA e If it handles international shipments e fit is an express carrier e Pay terms 10 Click Save then click Close You must set up PRO numbers or tracking numbers for this carrier See Setting up PRO Numbers and Tracking Numbers on page 49 for instructions to do this If you want to print a label for this carrier you must select a label to be associated with the carrier See the instructions in Chapter 7 Labels beginning on page 7 1 for instructions to select or create a label for the carrier If the new carrier is to be used in a rate shop group or as part of a routing instruction then you must add it to those groups See Creating Rate Shop Groups on page 2 19 and Creating Routing Instructions on page 2 21 for instructions to do this SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Manual Rating Creating the Manual Carrier Tariffs 6 You can manually rate a shipment using a dummy carrier A conditional logic script prompts the user for the carrier total freight and pro number to be assigned to the
236. lete Close The Mode Code table stores transportation mode codes used in rating packages A transportation mode lets you specify a group of carrier services For example the code Air indicates to select a rate for shipment by Air Generally it is not necessary to modify anything in the Mode Code table SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 2 39 2 Supporting Data Additional Supporting Data Data 2 40 Ports e Import Export Port E 1 x Schedule O U S Ports Port Code 144004 Port Name New York Country Code HMF Save Delete Close The ports of exit and entry can be entered here This includes the Foreign Port Schedule K information as well as the U S Port Schedule D information my lofx Unit Type CURRENCY ad Unit Code USD Unit Name U S Dollars Unit Print Code USD Save Delete Close Use the Units table to look up the units of measurement used in SendSuite Shipping This information is for viewing only and cannot be changed Unit Conversion e Units Conversion E _ ol x From Unit Code LBS To Unit Code KILO Multiplication 0 45359237 Close Use the Unit Conversion table to look up how units of measurement are converted to other units This information is for viewing only and cannot be changed SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Additional Supporting Data Carrier amp Labels
237. lete line s Delete All Delete Record Save Close Type the name of the group in the Rate Shop Group ID field Type a description of the rate shop group in the Description field optional Select a carrier from the Carrier ID drop down list Select the carrier service from the Service drop down list optional So oS oS A Select the carrier charge terms from the Charge Terms drop down list optional 9 The Penalty and Penalty fields are used for Dual Rating See Dual Rating in Chapter 2 of this guide 10 Select the checkbox under Direct Only to screen out any interline shipments for this carrier optional 11 Select the checkbox under Don t Use to have SendSuite skip this carrier during the rating process 12 Repeat steps 6 through 11 for all the carriers you want in your rate shop group 13 Click the Save buiton SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Supporting Data 2 Rate Shop When you perform the Rate event on the SendSuite Shipping workstation SendSuite Shipping selects the carrier with the lowest routing cost Without using Groups a rate shop group the routing cost is the same as the net freight PUA ARNI You can using the rate shop group to modify the routing cost affecting how SendSuite Shipping rates a shipment For example if Joe s Trucking and Fred s trucking charge similar rates but you prefer to use Joe s then you can use dual rating so SendSuite Shipping sele
238. lient Report FF Place Multiple Sections To Frames Press the Next button to start converting selected reports Cancel Back Hest gt 10 Click Next 11 When the conversion process has finished click Finish 12 You may need to correct the name of the report if it has both rpt and rpx file extensions 13 You may need to change the data controls The SendSuite interface supports only ADO data controls 14 Create the error handling script in ActiveReports See Scripting on the Report elsewhere in this chapter 15 Build the script that will call the report on the Thin Client See Writing VB Script elsewhere in this chapter SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 4 13 4 Reports Creating Custom Reports for the Shipping Workstation Creating a New Thin Client Report NOTE If you are familiar with Crystal Reports you can use that application to create new reports and then convert them into ActiveReports using the process above 4 14 Creating a New Report from Scratch To create a new report from scratch using the ActiveReports interface in SendSuite Shipping 1 Before you begin designing the report you need to define the data you will pull onto the report See Defining Data elsewhere in this chapter From the Control Center select the Reports module From the Custom menu select ActiveReports Configure the report header and add groups if necessary ae 2 N Build
239. m Ren Sets fields On load cost a shipment header tables LOAD 1 Carciertib Pspeccarrier LOAD L TotalFreight SHIPMENTHEADER 1 ConfigWNum5Six LOAD 1 Service Pipeciervice LOAD 1 AltCarrierCost LOAD 1 TotalPreight LOAD 1 GrogzsCharges LOAD 1 TotalPreight LOAD 1 Totalbillabletost LOAD 1 TotalFreight Ready HJM 4 In the Description field type Manual rating 5 From the This map will be used for drop down list select Shipment Processing SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 6 47 6 Tariffs Manual Rating Creating the VB Script NOTE This is where you need to screen ID and the master event ID In this example the screen is 1006 and the rate event ID is 1106 The rate event ID should stay the same but you will need to change your screen ID NOTE This is where you get the rate that the operator typed on the shipping screen You can use a different field for the rate 6 48 6 Create the following script Rem This script runs manual rating Do not delete Rem This stores the pre specified carrier and service for Rem later use Dim PSpecCarrier Dim PSpecService PSpecCarrier SHIPMENTHEADER 1 PreSpecCarrierlD PSpecService SHIPMENTHEADER 1 PreSpecService Rem This sets the carrier and service to the manual carrier Rem so SendSuite can rate the shipment Rem We assume there is a commodity in tblCommodity with Rem the ID 100 Ensure there is a com
240. m in the left pane of your window SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 8 51 8 Integration XML Out Note that if your XML file contains multiple records SendSuite will import Integration each parent tag and display it in the tree You need only one parent tag record so delete any extras by clicking on the tag and pressing the Delete key Mapping the l Fields Since the parent tag will be used for each data record in your XML file you must change its properties To change the parent tag s properties 1 Left click on the tag 2 Right click on the tag 3 Select Edit 4 Click the drop down arrow next to Map this field to Conquest table and select the table primary table you are mapping to or from for example ShipmentHeader Load etc See Host Field Properties XML Out elsewhere in this chapter Existing Map If you are adding host fields to an existing map select XML Fields gt Add a XML field If you select Create XML Tree View you will destroy your old tree and you must remap all the fields again 8 52 SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide XML Out Integration Mapping the Fields NOTE Do not let up on the mouse button until you have reached a SendSuite field Releasing the button too quickly will result in the host field being deleted from the list Right click and select Add XML Field to add the field back in Integration 8 Mapping Fields To map
241. m screen Screen 1 From the Control Center open the Shipping module 2 From the Setup menu select Setup Shipment Processing NOTE If you selected one of the system templates you must e If you want to use one of the system templates select the checkbox next give the screen a new to Display System Templates name You cannot save over a system template 3 Open the screen that you would like to change 4 Select Save As from the File menu 5 Type the name of the new template in the Form Name field 6 Click OK SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 3 21 3 Shipping Shipping Screens Configuring the Appearance of the Shipping Screen 3 22 On the Settings tab you have the following options Read Only Form If you check this box the user will not be able to save any information The user can perform any other action such as rating Back Ground Color If you click on this button you can change the background color of the shipping screen frame The background color on the other frames will not be affected If you want to return to the original system color click the Default Color button Screen Identifier SendSuite Shipping automatically assigns a screen ID to every screen You cannot change this ID but you can use it with other features See Processing Events in Chapter 3 and Setting up Users in Chapter 5 Processing Tab Display Use these checkboxes to select what tabs display wi
242. me directory as you saved the rpt file 8 Exit Crystal Reports To import the report into SendSuite Shipping 1 From the Control Center open the Reports Module 2 From the Custom menu select Crystal Report 3 From the File menu select Import Report 4 Locate the report you created and then click Open 5 Enter a new name for the report to be imported and then click OK The following message is displayed User Defined Report added successfully 6 Click OK to clear the message box 7 Click Close to return to the Reports window To use the report 1 Inthe Reports module double click the User Defined folder 2 Double click the name of the report you created You can use this report in the same manner that you use other reports in SendsSuite Shipping For example you can apply a filter to the information and you can imbed the report in the Task Scheduler You also can designate the default printer where the report should print SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Creating Custom Reports for the Shipping Workstation General Report Process Reports 4 You can print custom documents or reports on the SendSuite Shipping Workstation Reports can include summaries or single shipment reports They also can include domestic or international documents such as a bill of lading or a packing list SendSuite Shipping reports or documents that are produced on the Shipping Workstation Thin Client are
243. modify anything it is important to stop the scheduler and restart it for the changes to take place SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Task Scheduler Terminating the Task Scheduler Setting Up Purge Shipment Tools 5 To terminate the Task Scheduler 1 2 3 4 Open the Tools module from the Control Center Identify the scheduler that is running Click the Terminate button Click Yes to confirm that you want to stop the scheduler If you are using the Purge Shipment task you must tell the system which shipments to delete To set up shipment purge al Follow the steps earlier in this chapter to create and add the task to the group Select the Purge Shipment feature Click the Edit button Edit Task Purge Shipment i x SA near ae en oes ae Operator Yalue Logic Operator scheduled Ship Date Actual ship Date 4 Use any of the fields to select the shipments 5 If you want to purge shipments by date you can use a relative date a Make sure the Relative Date checkbox is selected b Select an Operator For example if you want to delete all shipments that are over 60 days old select lt or lt operator c Type the number of days in the Value field For example if you want to delete all shipments that are over 60 days old type 60 in this field 6 Click OK SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 5 27 5 Tools Task Scheduler Small Pa
244. modity in the line Rem item for the shipment or the bill of lading will not Rem print SHIPMENTHEADER 1 PreSpecCarrierlD MAN SHIPMENTHEADER 1 PreSpecService LTL SHIPMENTHEADER 1 SHIPMENTLINE 1 CommodityCode 100 Rem Rate the shipment Dam OBL Set oBL CreateObject PBCOEShipping_bl clsPBCOEShipping_bl obl PerformEvent 1006 1106 Shipments eQuestParam Rem Sets fields on load cost amp shipment header tables LOAD 1 CarrierID PSpecCarrier LOAD 1 TotalFreight SHIPMENTHEADER 1 ConfigNumS1x LOAD 1 Service PSpecService LOAD 1 AltCarrierCost LOAD 1 TotalFreight LOAD 1 GrossCharges LOAD 1 TotalFreight LOAD 1 TotalBillableCost LOAD 1 TotalFreight LOAD 1 AltCarrierlD PSpecCarrier SHIPMENTHEADER 1 PreSpecCarrierlD PSpecCarrier SHIPMENTHEADER 1 PreSpecService PSpecService SHIPMENTHEADER 1 DirectCost LOAD 1 TotalFreight SHIPMENTHEADER 1 ProratedCarrierCost LOAD 1 TotalFreight LOAD 1 COST 1 Amount LOAD 1 TotalFre1ghat LOAD 1 COST 1 Rate LOAD 1 TotalFreight LOAD 1 COST 1 CostType LINEHL 7 Save the file as MAN_RATE SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Manual Rating Associating the VB Script with a Shipping Screen NOTE Other optional subevents include Generate Tracking Number and Print Carrier Label Tariffs 6 This allows you to add a configurable event to the shippi
245. module from the Control Center Double click the Carrier amp Labels folder Double click the Rates folder Double click Carrier Setup Click in the line that has the tariff you want to modify Click the Details button Click in the FAK Lanes ID field and type a unique ID for the discount file Click Save Click Close Click the FAK tab Click the Details button A FAK Lane Details 3 _ ol x FAK Lane ID ESTMFAKO1 z Country lus State CT y City e Low oo High Orig Low Dest 7 Hight Dest Po Effective Date 01 01 01 Expiration Date Hill FAK Params ID BES gt FAK Parameter Save Delete Close Type any information about the lane in which this agreement applies For example if your agreement is good only for to deliveries to California then select that state If your agreement applies to all delivery destinations leave all the white fields blank Type the effective date of the FAK parameter in the Effective Date field Type or select the file with the discount information in the FAK Params ID field e If this is a new discount parameter then type a new and unique name in this field and continue following this procedure e If you are using and existing FAK parameter skip to step 19 SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Tariffs 6 Tariff FAK 15 Click the FAK Parameters button Fax parameter xi FAK Params ID ESTMFAK FAK 1175
246. mpted to restart the SQL Server Agent Click Yes Maintenance 13 Close the Enterprise Manager SQL Server Agent 14 Open the SQL Server Manager in the system tray in the lower right corner of your screen 15 Click the drop down in the Services field and select SQL Server Agent 70 SQL Server Service Manager 3 ei x Serer TENI A GEM BGT1 Services sal Server Distributed Transaction Coordinator SOL Server SOL Server Agent he Stary lontinue L Pause m Stop I Auto start service when OS starts Running A TRN185 GEN BGT1 MSs0Lserver 16 Check the box next to Auto start service when OS starts Y Auto start service when OS starts SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 1 7 1 SendSuite Shipping Server SendSuite Database Maintenance Creating a Database Maintenance Plan 1 8 The Database Maintenance Plan Wizard is used to help you set up the core maintenance tasks necessary to ensure that your database performs well is regularly backed up in case of system failure and is checked for inconsistencies Using the Database Maintenance Plan you can e Update distribution statistics e Back up database and transaction log files e System databases are special databases that cannot be backed up Since transaction log backups cannot be done on the system databases we recommend two separate DB Maintenance plans one for the system databases and one for the Conq
247. n client will run under the built in ADMIN user and will not be prompted for user ID and password O Interactive Authentication SendSuite presents a login page to prompt for the user ID and password The user ID and password are verified against SendSuite database SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 5 37 5 Tools User Authentication 5 38 eo Windows Authentication The application will verify the Windows user ID passed in exists in the SendSuite Database Since the user is authenticated through Windows no password is validated by SendSuite Shipping You must enable Windows security before enabling Windows Authentication in SendSuite Shipping To enable Windows security Click gt Settings gt Control Panel Double click Administrative Tools Double click Internet Information Services Open local computer gt Web Sites gt Default Web Site Right click eQuest and select Properties Click the Directory Security tab Click Edit Select Integrated Windows authentication oe Sse ey Click OK and close Internet Information Services Authentication Methods x ANONYMOUS OLLE Mo user name password required to access this resource Account used for anonymous access User name PE TESTOO James Browse Password ececeecees Allow 1S to control password Authenticated access For the following authentication methods username and password are req
248. n the Supporting Data Selection window Double click Address Click the blank record icon O Type the new consignee s I D in the Address ID field Check the box to the left of Consignee Click the Address tab Type the new consignee s address information in the appropriate fields ES 5 x Address IO New Consignen Logo Sighature Detail 1 Massage Nama Mary Alias Receiver Addis Types Attention M Carrier M Bill To M Intermediate Atin Title F Consiqoee T Remit To l Gov t Agency Address O Middle Street l Shipper l Dist Center Trading Partner reset 10 Middle Strect Ship For a el M Hold At Location Address2 Floor 16 F Manufacturer O Haz Attention Broker Sold To Sellerenet Abt Retur Addr City BRIDGEPORT Camier Gonsignee Shipper Stale cr o O COD Collection Method Store Mos Type e gt Consignes Billing Country US Parm Temp Permanent County Fairfield Phone 203 555 1234 Fn k ie Ext 1123 EM UES Location IDO Carrier Accounts Save Delete Close Click the Detail 1 tab Populate the appropriate fields on the Detail 1 tab Click the Detail 2 tab Populate the appropriate fields on the Detail 2 tab Click the Message tab If necessary type an alert message to be displayed when shipping to this consignee Click the Consignee tab 15 16 Populate the appropriate fields on the Consignee tab
249. nal Documents SED NOTE For some carriers such as DHL hazardous materials may also be referred to as dangerous goods Shipping 3 Document Field SendSuite Shipping Source 11 Port of Export SH PortOfExportName 12 Port of Unloading SH PortOfUnloadingName 13 Containerized Yes if tolShipmentLine ContainerCount gt 0 Otherwise No 14 Carrier Identification vCarrier CarrierSCAC Code 15 Shipment Reference SH BIlINr No 16 Entry Number IL EntryNr If there is more than one product then this code will print with the products in field 22 17 Hazardous Materials Checked if tolOCommodity Hazardous 1 Otherwise not checked 18 In Bond Code IL InBondCode If there is more than one product then this code will print with the products in field 22 19 Routed Export Yes if SH AgentlD lt gt Transaction SH ConsigneelD Otherwise No 21 D ForM___ IL CountyMfgType S 22 Schedule B Number IL HTSNr Prints all for each IL HTSDescription IL EntryNr IL InBondCode IL SEDLicenselL SEDLicenseExpires 23 Quantity Schedule B IL HTSQuantity1 Prints all for each Units IL LHTSQuantityUnits1 IL HTSQuantity2 ILL HTSQuantityUnits2 24 Shipping Weight IL NetWeight The system IL ProductQuantity automatically converts pounds to kilos 25 VIN Product Number IL VIN PIN Vehicle Title Number IL VehicleTitleNr SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 3 19
250. nd then select Setup Shipment Processing Open the screen and the ID number will appear on the Settings tab e Manual Rate Field You must choose one of eight configurable number fields where you will type the rate you want to use The example below will use ConfigNumSix Use the following instructions to create the manual rating script 1 From the Control Center open the Integration module 2 Click the New bution ol 3 Select Script and then click OK A PB TMS Integration Untitled VBS Untitled VBS E _ la x de Fle View Operations Window Hep e x Bem 4 zae i Bl aloe Qu z Objects I a Description P L s mop willbe used tor Shinmant Processing y ticas blLoad PM tipack Totals x 5 aj le Rem This script runs manual cating Do not delete e iras tbiSbipenariLine Rem This stores the pre specified carrier and service for later use H a tbistop v lSbhoper weillTe wiAm r Dim P pectacrier Dim PSpeciervica PopecCarriee SHIPMENTHEADER 1 Pre5pectarrieri o T vConsaqnee a VShipFor Pspecservice SHIPHENTHEADER 1 Prespecs ervice vShipper Rea This sets the carrier and service to the manual carrier so PB TMS can rate the SHIFMENTHEADER 1 Pre5pectarciecib MAN SHIPMENTHEADER 1 Prespecservice LTL Rem Rate the shipment Dim oBL fet oBL Create bject pbhCoeshipping bl bl Performevent 1006 1106 Shipments QuestPaca
251. ndSuite recognizes Tariffs 6 State If the carrier s origin point and destination points are always within a certain state then you can use the state option This means you create a tariff that will only apply to consignees within the state you indicate in the State field ee 15 xj Zone ID LHFGLTL z Country lus gt State Tx y Gig ET Low Origin HighOrigin Low Dest po High Dest fo Weight Limit Zone RBN LHFGLTLA gt Save Delete Close a Type or select the two letter state code in the State field b Create a Zone RBN code and type it in the Zone RBN field c Click Save then click Close City and State If the carrier s origin and destination points are always within a certain city and state then you can use the city and state option This means that you create a tariff that will only apply to consignees within the city and state that you indicate ae 15 x Zone ID LHFGLTL x Country lus gt State Tx y City SAN ANTONIO o o o LowOrigin HighOrigin f Low Dest A High Dest po Weight Limit Zone RBN LHFGLTL2 Save Delete Close a Type or select the two letter state code in the State field b Type or select the name of the city in the City field c Create a Zone RBN code and type it in the Zone RBN field NOTE The Zone RBN can be an alpha numerical or alpha numerical value lf you make the Zone RBN an alpha or alpha numerical value then the value can b
252. ndow 1 Click the Rates tab 2 Click the New Record line E 3 Click the Details button x SCACILHFG Serice 171 Tariff Revision LHF G1 EH Dale 1 1 2005 Freight Class 1100 gt de Max Tarti Wat 50000 Incremental Rate I Low RBM LHFGLTL1 3 Wgt Break Unit LBS High REM LHFGLTL1 T Rate Wi Unit LBS y Rate Per Weight Range Save Delete Close 4 Type or select the freight class that this rate supports in the Freight Class field 5 Type or select the Low RBN number in the Low RBN field The RBN number is linked with the number you assigned on the Zone RBN tab 6 Type or select the High RBN number in the High RBN field This RBN number is also associated with the number you assigned on the Zone RBN tab The low and high RBN numbers can be the same or they can be a range of numbers 7 Optional Type the maximum weight that the tariff will support in the Max Tariff Wot field 8 Type or select the weight units in the Wgt Break Unit field and press Tab The Rate Wat Unit field is automatically populated when you press Tab SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 6 17 6 Tariffs Creating a Custom LTL Tariff from Scratch Tariff Setup 6 18 10 Enter the correct data according to how the carrier rates shipments LTL rating allows you to enter rates according to weight ranges only You cannot assign a rate per pound unless you enter weight r
253. ne any additional parameters such as FAK discounts etc Apply the carrier s new tariff s to the shipper s who will use the tariff Once you have analyzed the carrier s rate structure and entered the required data you must also test the tariff to be certain that it rates shipments correctly Complete all of the instructions listed below in the order they appear You may be instructed to skip a section depending on the way the LTL carrier rates shipments To enter the SCAC code 1 Open the Supporting Data module from the Control Center 2 Open the Carrier amp Labels folder 3 Open the SCAC Codes table A SCAC Codes E x MAC Cert Ver Paper MAC Cent Ver EFile MAC Cent Ver Label SCAC Code LHFG z Carrier Name Long Horn Freight URL Save Delete Close 4 Click the blank button to make a new record 0 5 Type a three to four letter code for the carrier in all caps in the SCAC Code field 6 Type the carrier s name in the Carrier Name field Click Save then click Close Close the Carrier amp Labels folder SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 6 11 6 Tariffs Creating a Custom LTL Tariff from Scratch Address Record 6 12 To create an address record for the carrier 1 o wp oo A 10 11 12 13 Open the Supporting Data module from the Control Center Open the Data folder Open the Address table Click the blank button
254. ne that is the most used because you can specify a range of cities based on their ZIP codes NOTE Be aware that sometimes a ZIP code found within a range of ZIP codes may be in a different zone than the rest of the ZIP codes For example in the ZIP code range of 55400 55500 the ZIP code 55420 might be in Zone 2 while the other ZIP codes might be in Zone 1 If this situation occurs you must be sure to single out the ZIP code that falls outside of the zone range and assign it to its own line item In this situation there would actually be 3 separate line items for the 2 ranges of ZIP codes and for the individual ZIP code out of the zone The first range would be defined as 55400 55419 Then the ZIP code 55420 would be on its own line item Finally the third line item would be the range of 55421 55500 ini x Zone ID ESTMGRD Country State po ad Low Origin 06897 HighOrigin 06510 Low Dest 06604 High Dest 06855 Weight Limite Zone RBN ESTMGRD1 gt Save Delete Close a Type the low origin ZIP code in the Low Origin field b Type the high origin ZIP code in the High Origin field the high and low origins can be the same c Type the low destination ZIP code in the Low Destination field d Type the high destination ZIP code in the High Destination field the high and low destinations can be the same e Create a Zone RBN code and type it in the Zone RBN field f Click Save then click Close
255. nes you can use them for other carriers just by selecting this service days lanes ID 6 28 Unless told otherwise SendSuite Shipping will assume that your custom designed LTL carriers can deliver any shipment anywhere in the U S within an hour Use these instructions to define the number of days it takes a carrier to get from your warehouse to a destination To define the number of days Open the Supporting Data module from the Control Center Double click the Carrier amp Labels folder Double click the Rates folder Double click Carrier Setup Click in the line that has the carrier tariff you want to modify Click the Details button Click in the Service Days Lanes ID field and type a unique ID for the accessorial file 8 Click Save 9 Click Close 10 Click the Service tab 11 Click the Details button lol Lane ESTMSDLOT gt Country lus gt State CT y city BRIDGEPORT J Low HighOrigin Low Dest po Hight po Effective Date 01 01 05 Expiration Date f f Rest Day 1 e gt Rest Day1 Transit M Rest Day 2 o Rest Day2 Transit T Delivery Days 5 Delivery Time Save Delete Close 12 Type any information about this lane For example if the carrier can deliver anywhere in California in 2 days then select that state If the carrier has defined a range of ZIP codes that can be reached in 3 days then just fill in the Low and High Dest fields 13 Type the effective date of th
256. ng Supplied Scripting Tools 8 36 Manually Writing an SQL WHERE Clause Using ECO TOXU A a A E a O lied ote eee 8 37 Updating a WHERE ClauSe ccccconcncccoccncconcnncnononoo 8 37 SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 8 1 Integration A getile apne cores teeter re tere eran eer E errr rrr 8 38 Propatatlorn pene were era cher renner eee arene errr rc 8 38 General IGSthUCHONS Gamer a ee eee 8 39 KAME MIV SC THINGS a E rodada iio oben OA RIOS 8 40 General Ta aoe oe eee 8 40 Server XML File Properties ccooooococooooooomm o 8 40 IAN AA aR ey Re Ae errr E 8 41 Mapping ne RIOS cos cotas EE assem eepasaecec san cones 8 43 Adano FIOSE A ctl e a a av aevs 8 43 MIDI edad era denia 8 45 Host Field Properties XML ID ococcoooccccnconononononcononoso 8 46 SendSuite Shipping Field Properties o 8 47 Generals trucos a lc 8 48 INES S iene umes Nie ac var A E tele mae 8 49 General lal aa eas tat ae one heen ane el area ae 8 49 OE ohare eee ee er Che ee nee eae eer as 8 50 Mapping the Fields ocoooococococconocccnnnccanonnnnanonos 8 51 Adang Host Helds O coe tetera er a 8 51 AME OUU MOGAO rata A OO 8 53 To A Fields a ern rc errr A O 8 53 il O E A a age woke seiner aaa a ecaee ents 8 53 SendSuite Shipping Field Properties 8 54 XML Integration File LINK a a a a a a 8 55 US A mene ner e ence a een 8 55 Modifying the Shipping Screen for XML F
257. ng accessorial parameter skip to Step 23 6 23 6 Tariffs Tariff 15 Click the Accessorial Support button Accessorial Support E x Accessorials Accessorial Tab 1 Support ID ESTMACCO1 Insurance INS NOTE NS means Saturday oe INS Risk eee INS Saturday Delivery INS Basic Flex Insurance INS Not Supported For Sunday Pickup INS Expanded Flex Insurance INS example if Residential Sunday Delivery NS Time In Transit Flex Insurance NS Delivery IS marked as Additional Handling INS Self Insurance INS NS a shipment toa OffShore NS Registered NS consignee address Beyond INS Registered Insurance NS flagged as Residential O g i ld not use this Call Tag INS Tracking INS wow Fuel Surcharge INS Verbal Confirmation INS Carrier Inside Delivery INS AOD INS Stop Off INS Qualification INS Single Shipment INS Oversize Dim INS Residential Delivery INS Hazardous INS Parameters Save Delete Close 16 Type an ID for the accessorial supported by the carrier 17 Click the Parameters button Accessorial Setup i E x Parameter ID ESTMAH Algorithm 20 File Name 1 0 rate per piece NOTE Some Save Delete Close algorithms are specific to certain accessorial 18 Click the drop down arrow in the Algorithm field and select the method used charges such as Fuel to calculate the accessorial charge Surcharges COD etc ARTO NOTE Leave the File Name field blank This field
258. ng screen that calls the script There are two steps to this procedure e Setthe VBScript you created as a sub event Add the fields to the screen Modifying the Sub event To modify the sub event Open the Shipping module Create a new Shipping screen Click the Events tab Events Sut Read Shipment y eUnBOL UnAirbill Sub Return Service Shipment 9 eUndoRates 8 Save Shipment Ey eUser01 Sub Script Conditional Logic Sub Set Focus to Search a r Gil Script Conditional Logic Sul Set Shipment Defaults Guy Bill of Lading Sub Shipment Form ein Sub Save Shipment Sub SWOG Order 5 7 Sut SWOG Shipment Eg eUser 04 Sub SWOG Shipment Consolidate Oy eUser O05 Sut SWOG Shipment Load Eg eUser 06 Top Assenen ae Pa allearN7 SubEvent Properties Script Conditional Logic MAN_RATE Select any of the unused user configurable folders Complete the User Function Properties a Type the user description you want on the menu in the Menu Caption field For example Manual Rating b optional Assign a hot key combination to automatically call the event in the shipping screen Drag the Script Conditional Logic sub event from the Available Sub events list into the selected folder a Drag the Save Shipment sub event into the selected folder b optional Drag the Bill of Lading sub event into the selected folder With the Script Conditional Logic sub event highlighted click the down arrow n
259. nistrator Guide 3 25 3 Shipping Shipping Read only Shows you the name ES Field Properties of the field on the table in the database aoe fete of the table in the database User Label This is what will appear on the Although this is a shipping screen 256 character field the label should be brief The screen will resize itself to accommodate the Default Value Read Only See Setting Properties on the Defaults Tab on page 3 28 Font Size Selects the size of the text displayed on the shipping screen Display Width Use this field to specify the field s Click Suggested width on the shipping screen to let SendSuite Shipping determine an appropriate width Text Color Defines the color of the text on Click Default to the shipping screen select SendSuite Shipping defaults of black text on a Back Color Defines the background color white background of the text field displayed on the shipping screen Tab Stop Obsolete Although you can see the tab stop values they have no affect on the behavior of the shipping screen 3 26 SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Shipping 3 Screens Read Only This prevents the user from Check this box Field Properties adding or deleting information in to make the field the field Hold Single When the New With Hold event is performed this data will remain on the new shipment Hold Multipack When the New Shipment event is performed during a multipa
260. ntered For example if you entered a tariff increase in May for 2 and you are entering a cumulative tariff increase in July for 5 the freight will be figured at 7 1 of the original tariff e Noncumulative This percentage will not be added to other tariff increases you have entered For example if you entered a tariff increase in May for 2 and you are entering a cumulative tariff increase in July for 5 the freight will be figured at 7 of the original tariff 15 Click Save then click Close on the Tariff Increase Details window 16 Repeat step 5 through step 15 for every tariff that has changed 6 36 SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Tariffs 6 Borrowing a These instructions can be used to create a custom tariff using an existing tariff Tariff To borrow another carrier s tariff follow the steps below It is not necessary to create a tariff header zones or rates since those have already been defined for the master tariff Clone a Carrier When you clone a carrier setup and borrow the tariff that the carrier uses you Setup are borrowing all of that carrier s setup including delivery points accessorial charges discounts etc Remember to change these items to reflect the new carrier s accurate information To clone a carrier setup 1 Open the Supporting Data module from the Control Center Double click the Carrier Labels folder Double click the Rates folder Double click Carrier Setu
261. nts Overview 3 6 Multiple Values Some document fields draw from several database fields using the values from each field For example you might see the following Document Field SendSuite Shipping Source Order NR amp Items NR IL OrderNr Combined field Reference NR IL OrderHostltemNr IL PONr In this example the values from all the fields will appear on the document Calculated Values Some document fields draw from several database fields adding or multiplying the values together For example you might see the following Document Field SendSuite Shipping Source Pricing Total IL PricingUnit IL ProductQuantity In this example the values from the two database fields are multiplied and their product appears on the document For example if the Pricing Unit is 5 00 each and there is a Product Quantity of 2 then there would be a value of 10 00 on the document Some document fields summarize database information For example you might see the following Document Field SendSuite Shipping Source Total Quantity Sum IL ProductQuantity This is the sum of all the lines In this example there are multiple lines so the system adds the values together There are other fields where the system counts the number of lines Multiple Lines The documents draw information from line items so several lines of information will appear on the page When you see for each it means that the system is drawing
262. o calculate expected delivery dates geographic locations and carrier label formats e C Documents and Settings All Users Pitney Bowes SendSuite Shippinglrpt This directory contains the format files needed to print SendSuite reports and rpx files used for any Active X reports e C Documents and Settings All Users Pitney Bowes SendSuite Shipping rpx This directory contains any custom reports that you create 1 22 SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide SendSuite Shipping Server 1 Restoring the If necessary you can restore the SendSuite Database from a backup file Restoring the database may be necessary for a number of reasons but it should SendSuite only be done when other options have been exhausted Database When you restore the SQL database you replace all the current records with what is in the backup file That means if you entered new data since the last Restoring the SQL backup when you restore the database you will lose that new information Database Complete the steps below to restore your backup data using SQL 2000 This procedure restores the database that holds the shipment processing records in addition to other data stored in the SendSuite Database This procedure does not restore the SendSuite setup data which includes the system s carrier rates report formats and other data find and restore those folders See Backing up other Critical Information on page 1 22 for more
263. o determine which sub event s you want associated with the event 6 Click and drag the sub event s folder icon s to the folder icon of the event that you selected in Step 4 SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 3 29 3 Shipping Shipping Screens Processing Events NOTE You can allow an event to continue when a sub event fails by enabling Continue on Error To enable Continue on Error select the sub event and press the Space Bar NOTE You must select a key that is not already assigned subevents The key you assign will also appear when the user hovers over the event on the processing screen 10 11 3 30 Repeat Step 6 until you have assigned all necessary sub events to the event NOTE Place the sub events in the order they must occur SendSuite Shipping processes each sub event in the order they are listed in the event folder Type a name for the new shortcut key in the User Description field NOTE You can type a custom menu caption for every Master Event available even non custom events The caption appears when the user hovers the mouse over the button on the Shipping Screen Processing Events My eSaveShipment 9 eShipperLabel y eSswOoG By eUnBOL UnAirbill By eUndoRates y eUser 01 Sul Generate Tracking Number Sul Save Shipment Sib Validate Manifest Fields Sib Print Carrier Label Sul New Shipment With Default Eg eUser 02 Da allear
264. o not let up on the mouse button until you have reached a SendSuite field Releasing the button too quickly will result in the host field being deleted Integration 8 Mapping Fields To map the fields begin by expanding your host records Then expand the Sendsuite table to which you will map the data To map a field click and drag the host field onto the SendSuite Conquest field If you mapped the field successfully the host field icon and the SendSuite field icon change color Also in the SendSuite pane the host field name appears next to the SendSuite field name 0 x 18 x PB TMS Integration XML Test XML XML Test XML E a File Edit View Operations XML Fields Tables Map Window Help Host Fields IPE TMS Fields Appointment Mr ats Appt Dellivery drar Gara consignee Bill Numbe gt orderid a consid gt Bill To lD BE cons ame 2 pees w3 BOL Remarks ik CONSCOMParny ei BOL Fmrks Cde e consaddert serene Cad BOLSent ae consadder 2 ae i BOLStatus a conscity o BookingNr a consstate dh BrokerlD a conszip m GY CAlnvCommisChg Ema shipper o GQ CAlnvPackChg co GY CAlnvTransChg a G Call Tag e GO CarEMailNotity o gt CarNotifyEMail gt CarPrintCertOrigin o E CarnrFaxNotity e Carrier ID gt CarrierFilingSED a w3 CamerPrintingComminvoice o GY CarrNotifyEMail2 on CanNotifyEMails on gt CanNotityEMail4 oon GY CarrNo
265. ogic Properties 8 60 ANTI A 8 61 A Le cht eae tern eee con eh eau Aree mee ce 8 61 Attaching the Script to a Shipping Screen 8 61 Attaching a Script to an Integration MAap 8 61 Importing Data From ASCONL cccccccsssecssseccnsesensuseeseesenees 8 62 Importing Address Data eae ena ee 8 62 Extracting the Data From ASCEN1 1 ccscccsseeeeeees 8 62 SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide xiii Table of Contents SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Importing the Ascent Data into SendSuite Shipping 8 63 VENIVING TNO GSU antenna dende oia 8 64 A Supported Peripherals Supported Peripherals in SendSuite Shipping A 2 Manuals 19r Forpherals A A T a cuaamea ines A 3 B Version Compatibility Operating System and Upgrade Compatibility B 2 SendSuite Desktop Compatibility ooocccocononocononnononos B 3 Index Administrator Guide xiv SendSuite Shipping Server NS SCUIMRGS eco ee e a SRG hes 1 2 TRO Ulin E E tetra ataom tee Gaerne emtrea tos Tn ae ae 1 2 A ar saat arate 1 4 SendSuite Database Maintenance ocoooncccccccnccconononnnnnonanos 1 5 SENA SEVERA EN eee E 1 6 Creating a Database Maintenance PlaN cooccccconiccon 1 8 Setting Up the System Maintenance Plan 1 9 Setting Up the SendSuite Database Maintenance ALA ene ee nee ee eee ee ee 1 13 Editing the Da
266. ollowing fields has a value of 1 then the system prints the document tolShipmentHeader ExportComInvoice toblShipmentHeader ExportCertificateOfOrigin tolShipmentHeader ExportNAFTA tolShipmentHeader ExportSED Print International Docs On the Sub Event Properties check the box to print the documents directly to the printer If the box is unchecked then the user will see a preview of the document and will have to click the Print button Print Shipper Label Prints a label you setup in the Supporting Data module Print USPS 2976 or Prints a 2976 or 2976 A customs declarations 2976 A form for USPS international shipments Prompt Special Services Prompt USPS Article Generates a pop up window that appears before or after rating displaying the special services for the selected carrier The shipper has the opportunity to select special services and validate costs before proceeding Prompts the user to enter or scan the tracking number for the selected service s of COD Registered Mail Insurance and Certified Mail for both internal carrier IDs of USPS and POST Rate Quote This sub event will rate a shipment across all carriers skipping any business logic Rate Shipment Uses the current information on the shipping screen to rate the shipment Rating Decision Prints the Rating Decision Report Report Rating Error Report Prints the Rating Error Report Rating Summary Prints the Rating Summary Report Repo
267. om Parcel Tariff from Scratch Tariff Setup NOTE The Zone RBN can be an alpha numerical or alpha numerical value If you make the Zone RBN an alpha or alpha numerical value then the value can be any length Numbers less than 8 digits long will be padded with leading Zeros 6 6 State If the carrier s origin point and destination points are always within a certain state you can use the state option This means you create a tariff that will only apply to consignees within the state you indicate in the State field Zone ID ESTMGRD y Country lus gt State CT y Gr Low Origin HighOrigin f Low Dest po High Dest Weight Limit Zone RBN CTONLYO1 gt Save Delete Close a Type or select the two letter state code in the State field b Create a Zone RBN code and type it in the Zone RBN field c Click Save then click Close SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Tariffs 6 City and State If the carrier s origin and destination points are always within a certain city and state then you can use the city and state option This means that you create a tariff that will only apply to consignees within the city and state that you indicate Creating a Custom Parcel Tariff from Scratch Tariff Setup NOTE You must always spell the city the same way SendSuite spells the name of the city in the Geograph table SendSuite will not recognize any variations o
268. on Rate Shop Group See Rate Shop Groups in Chapter 2 for more information Routing Instructions See Routing Instructions in Chapter 2 for more information Route Priority This indicates indicate the order in which eTMS should apply routing instructions For example prepaid packages may use the shipper as the first priority and consignee second However collect shipments may use the consignee instructions first and shipper second e 1st Priority select the routing instructions you want to use first e 2nd Priority select the routing instructions you want to use if the 1st priority choice does not have any e 3rd to 5th Priority select the routing instructions you want to use if the previous choices do not have any See Setting Routing Instruction Priority in Chapter 2 for more information SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 2 45 2 Supporting Data Additional Selection Criteria Supporting Data Use Selection Criteria to create criteria IDs for load planning and data searches For example one could create a criteria ID that would search for all shipments for a consignee for a certain carrier within a certain date range Sh pment fA Selection Criteria E 0 x Planning Setup Criteria ID Launch M Ungrouped ed Only F Date Today Unplanned Shipments Only From To In Out Bound Outbound Schedule
269. on the SendSuite table Default Label This is the name of the field as it shows in the mapping tree Default Value If the value being transferred is NULL the SendSuite will use the default value The data input must match the Field Type To use the current date type TODAY this must be in caps Translation Type If the host and SendSuite use different values then you can set up a translation Once the translation has been defined then you can select that translation from the drop down here Field Type This identifies the type of data expected by SendSuite Field Length This identifies the maximum number of characters that the SendSuite database will accept for this field Field is Required If checked SendSuite will require a value for this field If no value is sent to SendSuite the system will return an error Roll Up Item This field applies when multiple line items are being sent to SendSuite If checked SendSuite will summarize all the line items into a single line Running XML e lf you are running the XML Out on a shipment by shipment basis refer to Processing Events in Chapter 3 for information on how to create a shipping subevent to perform the XML Out process 8 54 SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide XML Integration File Link File Link Setup NOTE These files must be in XML format using XML tags but they do not have to have the xml file extension they
270. on the bill of lading These codes are stored in tblRemarks To add a remark code Open the Supporting Data module from the Control Center Open the Data folder in the Supporting Data Selection window Double click Remarks Click View Remarks Type Select BOL Click OK Type a unique code to identify the new remark in the Remarks Code field 10 x oS E E E Remarks Type BOL Remarks Code 11 Remarks Fragile Handle with care View Remarks Type Save Delete Close 8 Type the specific remark in the Remarks field 9 Click Save SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Supporting Data 2 Standard SendSuite carrier tariff records and address records require a Standard Carrier Carrier Alpha Alpha Code SCAC These values are saved on tblCarriersCAC Codes SCAC To input a new SCAC 1 Open the Supporting Data module from the Control Center Double click the Carrier Labels folder Double click SCAC Codes Click the New button on the tool bar E Type the SCAC code in the SCAC Code field x SLAC Code DHLE NOTE MAC certifica Carrier Mame DHLP tion is used by the URL http iwwdhkbusa cor coibintrackino pl LAN ENGATID United States Postal Service for manifesting MAC Cer Ver Paper SENDSUITE analysis and certifica MAC Cert er EFile PITNEY BOWES tion purposes MAC Cert Ver Label BE Display Pending 3 Transmission Status Message Save Delete Clo
271. one Details j x 3CAC ZERO Service LTL Tariff Revision ZERO Ef Date 1 1 2006 Prato ito h Save Delete cose Type 00000 in the Low Origin and Low Dest fields Type 99999 in the High Origin and High Dest fields Type 00000001 in the Zone RBN field this must be 8 characters Save and close the ZIP to Zone Details screen SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 6 53 6 Tariffs Zero Rate Setting the Class Rates Carrier To set the class rates 1 On the Tariff Setup screen click the Rates tab Creating the Tariff gt Click Details 3 Select a Freight Class to use with the tariff xl Delete Line s Clear Save Delete Close Type 00000000 in the Low RBN field Type 00000001 in the High RBN field this must be 8 characters Select LBS as a Wgt Break Unit Under Rate Per Weight Range a oo PL a Type a low and high weight in their respective fields b Type 0 in the Rate field 8 Save and close the Class Rates Details screen 9 Repeat the above steps 1 8 for every freight class you want to use 10 Close the Tariff Setup window 6 54 SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Zero Rate Carrier Creating the Tariff Configuring the Carrier To configure the carrier 1 2 CN ea S a Open Carrier amp Labels gt Rates gt Carrier Setup Go to the New Record line and type in your shipper code Carrier Profile unis
272. ontain 123456 e Replace existing value The old value will be destroyed SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide ODBC Integration in SendSuite Shipping Host Field Properties Integration 8 Sending Data Out Use these fields to define how data is to the host database These fields will only be enabled when the Data Exchange Properties are set to Out e Padding If you need to add extra characters to a field For example if the host database is expecting a 10 character string but you are only sending 7 characters you can pad the string SendSuite will add the necessary padding to make up the difference e Pad left Adds characters to the left of your string e g 0000123 e Pad right Adds characters to the right of your string e g 123000 e Padding character Indicate which character you will use for padding e Send value after sending field Use this field for legacy systems that require a value to be sent after the data element SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 8 33 8 Integration ODBC Integration in SendSuite Shipping SendSuite Shipping Field Properties 8 34 To define the SendSuite Shipping field properties left click on the SendSuite Shipping field then right click on the field name Select Field Properties from the popup menu Field Properties xl Fie Edit Record Help al lmp m mi alaz 2 Table Name ftolShipmentHeader Fiel
273. ore applying the new display settings Apply the new display settings without restarting Ask me before applying the new display settings corel SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 7 7 Graphic Labels Graphic Label File DHL and UPS graphical labels are written to the Inetoub wwwroot eQuest GraphicLabels directory as a gif file FedEx graphical labels are written to this directory as a png file The file name contains the tracking number For example 1255310X0311140520 gif Information BY Ci Inetpub wwwroot eQuest GraphicLabels EGE e AWOrites ia MS ep ck y gt Asearch Folders E E Xx A Address C Inetpub wwwroot eQuest raphicLabels GraphicLabels EE Inetpub E AdminScripts O ftproot CA iissamples 0 maroot E webpub EXE wwwroot E aspnet_client H eQuery eQuest 2 _derived 0 _private o E _SeriptLibrary i 0 Generallncludes 01 Help EQ Images EY Integration i 0 Lookup Select an item to view its description See also My Documents My Network Places My Computer SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 3 1255310X0311140520 gif Integration Data IVIADDCN A E a ake e Pon eum eee anaes een eee 8 3 ied Rs jal gel A en tre cee eye ie ener rn een N eee 8 3 General INSthuChiOns at oa pati ad eee 8 3 Data Map Seting Ae ce are notes acne eden Bae 8 4 CAN O ae es ae eae ine oa eee eee 8 4 MAD Ree re A T T nn earner 8 6 H
274. ortDataDistance ipaa Check All Read Write Check All Read Only Uncheck All OK Cancel a q a 0 z z apayapa pa papa a ojo xl xl z 3 Click OK NOTE You can assign a user to a group and then give the user additional individual rights However a user cannot have fewer rights than the group If a user must have fewer rights than the group you must remove the user from the group If you remove a user from a group that user will have no rights until you assign individual rights or add the user to another group SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 5 9 5 Tools User Properties Dialog Box Permissions Tab Feature Deseription O Aplies o ProductAdministration ServerDatabaseMaintenance QueryDatabase PurgeData EmptyCustomerData SupportDataAddress SupportDataAutoNumbers SupportDataCarrier Setup SupportDataCommodity SupportDataDistance 5 10 Allows you to have administrator permissions You can Admin access all modules and functions within SendSuite Allows you to start up and stop the SQL Server and the Server Agent from the SendSuite interface Setting this permission in SendSuite does not affect permissions in SQL Server Allows you to look up any information in your SendSuite data files For example you can view all shipments that went to a particular customer on a given date This feature
275. ost File Properle S arava a musi a E ero 8 7 SendSuite Table Properties In oocccccoonoco o 8 10 DUI o eee 8 11 MENO RE CONOS E a lil 8 13 Mapping NT A aan a laminae ven were 8 14 Adama Host Fields pire 9 tered ee ee eee 8 14 Mapping Field S ester a eee ieee nc 8 15 Host Field Properties IN ccccccccsssscssesscnsnsessessenensens 8 16 Host Field Properties OUt moo aa aa a 8 16 SendSuite Shipping Field Properties o 8 17 Mapping to tblIntILine cooocccoocncccocnncocnnononoos 8 18 Considerations for Data on the Host File 8 18 Shipment Header Maparen aene a e 8 19 International Detail Line MAaP ooococonccconnconccncnooooo 8 19 Running Data Mapper eoe eee e 8 20 GREGG FAT SIN A rea re Fr Rn eR 8 22 Verifying that the ODBC Driver for Database Is E WEAR RA eae 8 23 Creating the Dala SOUICEC occccccconcnccococcnonocoonnnnonoononnnss 8 24 ODBC Integration in SendSuite ShIppino 8 26 Preparing for Integrati0OD oooccccocnnoocconononnonenionanons 8 26 Creating a New ODBC Map coocccoooncnnccccoccnnconoconnconononnnos 8 27 ODBC TOODA a 8 30 Adding the Host Tables ococcccoconococconnnococonnonanos 8 30 MAD DING NC Field S do e E 8 31 Host Field NRO DOME Scania bas ca dia ao adidas 8 32 SendSuite Shipping Field Properties 8 34 SCICCHOM Or era A E eee 8 35 Using Sendsuite Shippi
276. ost db e Out SQL Update This will send information back to the host database but it will only update existing records it will not insert new records into the host db SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 8 27 8 Integration ODBC Integration in SendSuite Shipping Creating a New ODBC Map 8 28 ODBC Data Source Name You can type the DSN in this field or you can click the Find button and browse for the DSN If the DSN has not already been set up you can click the Find button and use the Windows wizards to create a new DSN For further instruction on how to create a new DSN See Creating a DSN elsewhere in this chapter e User If the host DB requires a user login then type that in this field e Password If the user ID requires a password type that in this field e Use Cursor Library Use this checkbox to specify whether to use the cursor library for the data source Deselecting this checkbox may resolve some ODBC problems See Microsoft s website for more information on cursor libraries Database Properties Use the fields in this box to define additional information about the data in the host DB OU Escape Clause ODBC Driver Database Properties Some data in the host file may look like a wildcard character to the SQL statement Different ODBC drivers use different symbols as wildcards Click Driver Values to query the driver for the wildcard symbols EXAMPLE If a date val
277. other local drive or tape backup device Database Maintenance Plan Wizard local specify Backup Disk Directory Specify the directory in which to store the backup file Directory in which to store the backup file C Use the default backup directory Create a subdirectory for each database FT Remove tiles older than E Backup file extension BAK Cancel Help 24 Select Remove files older than and change to the number of weeks you want to keep the backup files 25 Three complete database backups will be saved in the specified directory 26 Click Next SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 1 11 1 SendSuite Shipping Server SendSuite 28 Select a tape drive from the drop down menu Database e Alternatively you can save to your local hard drive by selecting Disk Mai ntenance Database Maintenance Plan Wizard local x F Specify the Transaction Log Backup Plan Creating a Specify the transaction log backup plan to prevent failures and operator errors Database ER Maintenance Plan Back up the transaction log as part of the maintenance plan T Verify the integrity of the backup when complete Location to store the backup file C Disk Schedule Occurs every 1 week s on Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday at 12 00 00 AM Change 29 Click Next 30 From the Reports to Generate dialog box deselect all options
278. oup IDs w Account Visibility Configuration Available Account Set AY Group IDs GMS PB AARE Available Account AY Group IDs Selected Account AY Group IDs Available Sub Account AY Group ID GMS Marketing Selected Sub Account AY Group IDs GMS Finance v aaa a ala Available Sub Sub Account AY Group ID PBDS Payroll un Selected Sub Sub Account AY Group IDs PBDS Cargo PBDS Shipping v En Ed A OK Cancel e The Available Account Set AV Group IDs field lists the available account set groups stored in the system The Selected Account Set AV Group IDs field lists what account set groups the user can access e The Available Account AV Group IDs field lists the available account groups stored in the system The Selected Account AV Group IDs field lists what account groups the user can access e The Available Sub Account AV Group IDs field lists the available sub account sets stored in the system The Selected Sub Account AV Group IDs field lists what sub account groups the user can access e The Available Sub Sub Account AV Group IDs field lists the available sub sub account groups stored in the system The Selected Sub Sub Account AV Group IDs field lists what sub sub account groups the user can access Move fields from an Available to Selected field using the button e Use the button to select a available fields Use the lt and to remove and remove all selections Click OK when you ar
279. p Sh gt 2 Scroll to the carrier you want to clone and click in the grey area to the left to highlight the entire line MUNENNNNNNNNNNENENNNNNENNNNENNNNNANNNNNNNNNNNNENNNNNENNNNENNNNMENENNNNEENNENENENNNN 6 Click the Clone button 7 Select or type the new carrier ID in the Carrier ID field ME Shipper ID PB Carrier ID WPXP y Cancel 8 Click Continue 9 Click the Details button A Carrier Profile Details E lol x Carrier Shipper Shipper FY y Effective 08 01 01 Expiration Date mz Carrier lwPXP i o Reporting SCAC lYFsy E Service LTL y Package Type s Matching service required on shipment N Zip Digits Required Allow Consolidation N Tariff Tariff ID YF5000108 Z Tariff YF500 SCAC YFSY Service LTL Effective Date 08 01 01 Discount Application Py Package Type s Rate Per Piece or Ship Rate Type s Supplemental Data Accessorial Lanes ID PBODFL9912 v Absolute Min Lanes ID DBMC MNYFSY9912 Discount Lanes DBMC MNYFSY9912 Accessorial Incompatibility ID Service Days Lanes ID od Tariff Increase ID y FAK Lanes ID DBMC MNYFSY9912 Service File Name YFSY0108 Def Rate CWT Save Delete Close SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 6 37 6 Tariffs Borrowing a 10 Select the method by which your discounts will be applied from the drop Tariff down in the Dis
280. pients Create a new shipping screen of whatever tabs and appearance desired Click the Screen tab 3 Adjust the screen so that the user can enter recipient information Such as Name Address City etc aig A e O np e Jal Service y Weight AnS gt eae Pkg _Type Pieces a A o Length m Width e Charge_T Terms PPD E NR ee ATA IEA Date Reg Ship Date TODAY Mist a ong an SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 3 43 3 Shipping Single Use Recipients NOTE By selecting Generate SendSuite Shipping will automatically generate a unique Consignee ID To the user on the shipping screen the Consignee ID will appear as a series of asterisks 3 44 Click the Defaults tab Click Source under the ConsigneelD row Select Generate from the drop down menu Reset Mode y F DestinationTable Field Name Default Value User Label A Source Table EN blShipmentHeader a bIShipmentHeader GroupID LoadID Defaults Restrict View y Group ID Table tblShipmentHeader lol x Hold 4 Singl r Load ID Table tblShipmentHeader MEN blShipmentHeader BillNr Trans Assign tblIShipmentHeader ER blShipmentHeader ray blShipmentHeader y blShipmentHeader ShipperlD Shipper Table ShipForlD ConsigneelD Ship For Ship_To_ID aa bIShipmentHeader BillTolD Bill To
281. ping Rates shipments in a The shipments must be batch saved in the database using a common group ID See Batch Rating in Chapter 2 This task runs the small The carrier manifest package manifest for the properties must be date and carrier selected configured See Small Package Manifest Setup elsewhere in this Chapter SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Tools 5 Task Scheduler Feature whatitDoes Update Manifest This task updates the Transmission Status manifest transmission Available Tasks status for DHL UPS Auto Update Download and update the UPS communication must SendSuite system from be enabled UPS site Create a Task To create a task group Group 1 Open the Tools module from the Control Center 2 Select Task Groups from the TaskScheduler menu 3 Click Available Groups Tasks 4 Double click Add a New Group Add a Task Group Group Name End of Day Description End of day activities gl Add Cancel Close Type a unique name for the task group in the Group Name field Optionally type a description for the task group in the Description field Click Add If necessary enter other task groups OD ND Y Click Cancel Close to close the window SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 5 23 5 Tools Task Scheduler To add a task to the group 1 In the Available Task Group window click the task group you created 2 Double click
282. pop up message containing the text entered in the Instructions field If you selected G C or R in the Action field select one of the following items in the Goto Label Carrier Rate Shop Group field e G Type the name of the label you want the instructions to go to e C Select a specific carrier from the drop down list e R Select a specific rate shop group from the drop down list If you selected C in the Action field you have the option to specify terms in the Service and Charge Terms fields both fields are optional e Select a specific carrier service to apply to the shipment e Select charge terms to apply to the shipment Follow Step 7 through Step 13 for all additional conditions you want to apply to this set of instructions Click the Save button to save the routing instructions Click Close to exit the routing instruction window SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 2 23 2 Supporting Data Routing To apply routing instructions to a consignee agent or shipper Instructions 1 Open the Supporting Data module from the Control Center i Double click Data Applying Routing ds 7 aa Instructions to a 3 Double click Address Consignee Agent 4 From the Address ID drop down list select to whom you want to assign the or Shipper routing instructions 5 Click the Detail 1 tab Address ID 2080 m Detail 1 Parent ID Label Class EDI Partner ID oo IRSNo COURS Type
283. port License a _ e x Validated License 1115657897 License Exp Date 01 01 07 Record Date 07 20 05 Delete Close An export license is needed to ship certain commodities to certain countries If your product requires a license for export enter the export license number and expiration date For many SendSuite overseas shippers no license is required NLR for ordinary goods to friendly countries Freight Class a Freight Class a of x Freight 50 Description NMFC LTL Freight Class 50 Save Delete Close Use the Freight Class table to maintain a list of freight classes for your products A freight class determines the cost to ship a product by LTL or truckload carrier Each freight class is based on a combination of factors such as the weight risk in handling bulk value competition and cost of handling You must have a freight class in this data file for every product that you will ship by LTL shipment Look up each freight class in the NMFC National Motor Freight Classification Guide While the freight class value can be used for rating you should utilize the commodity code if you want freight descriptions to print on the bill of lading For more information see the NMFC web page http www nmfta org SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Supporting Data 2 Additional Geograph Supporting coat E Ban Data o Postal Code fossto Data city NEW HAVE
284. ptRuling For shipments to Canada Ruling only SH ExportRemarks AAA Quantity IL PricingUnit Product Number IL ProductNr a both Description IL ProductDescription HTS NR IL HTSNr Sum IL ProductQuantity If this is a multipiece shipment then the system will sum the total number of product items across all e The HTS number is a 10 digit number SendSuite Shipping prints only the first six digits as required on the Commercial Invoice CTR MFG IL CountryMFG AAA Order NR amp Items IL OrderNr NR Reference NR IL OrderHostltemNr IL PONr Prints all IL PricingUnit O Pricing Total IL PricingUnit Sum IL ProductQuantity SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide If this is a multipiece shipment then the system will sum the total number of product items across all packages 3 3 9 3 Shipping International Documents Commercial Invoice 3 10 Document Field Packing Freight Other Insurance Discount Rebate SendSuite Shipping Source SH MiscChargeAmtOne SH MiscChargeAmtTwo SH MiscChargeAmtThree SH MiscChargeAmtFour SH MiscChargeAmtFive SH MiscChargeAmtSix SH MiscChargeAmtSeven SH MiscChargeAmtEight SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide The labels on the report come from the corresponding SH MiscChargeDesc field To change these labels the miscellaneous charge description fields must be on the shipping screen so t
285. quite large Because the transaction log is a finite set of one or more files it will eventually be filled and therefore must be truncated periodically The log is automatically truncated at the completion of a log backup Although the log is truncated during the backup its physical size is not affected For example if you allow the transaction log to grow to 600MB then truncate it its file space being used might be 20MB but it still takes up 600MB of space on the disk You can shrink the size of the log file Refer to on line help on Microsoft SQL Server for additional instructions It is important that you set up the database maintenance plan in order to control the disk space usage Do not delete log files See Creating a Database Maintenance Plan on page 1 8 You also can refer to Microsoft SQL Books Online for information on Optimizing Transaction Log Performance SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 1 21 1 SendSuite Shipping Server SendSuite Some critical data is not stored in the database Make sure you have a backup of Database the following directories as well Maintenance e C Documents and Settings All Users Pitney BowesiSendSuite Shipping Rates This directory with its sub directories contains binary rate tables Backing Up used for rating shipments Other Critical C Documents and Settings All Users Pitney Bowes SendSuite Shipping Information dat This directory contains files used t
286. r tblFreightClass consID tbiPayor cct nothing EE tbiProduct Name tbIS Address tblShipmentLine E E B 5 E nothing2 Account B city Bill Item Number E state Bill Number gt Order E zip Commodity Code gt commodity E country Container Count B phone Cst Of Gds Sold E cartier Department B servuce Division B pieces Drylce Weight E commodity Hazardous Qnty E nothing3 Hazardous Unit Height Host Item Nr ltem Frt Desc D LabPack Length LtrCreditRef Nr DuterBoxCount Oversized Package Type Pallet Count Price Gds Sold Product Nr RecordDate Shippable Pieces D gt pieces Volume Weight Width User Fields vAItS hipper OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOoO H E H E Ready NUM h SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 8 15 8 Integration Data Mapper Host Field Properties In Host Field Properties Out 8 16 To define the host field properties left click on the host field then right click on the field Select Edit from the popup menu Name This field contains the host field Host Field Properties E name Name A Cancel Type This field identifies the data type in this Ms EE a i Cost Type field e g character number date or time Cost Type This field is not used i E lea a m Pad D ote out i Pad left Padding Character E Field position The following fields are only Pei enabled when the data on the host file is in
287. r Detail and Trailer Lines H Separate Header and Detail Lines Detail Line ID p C Separate Header and Detail related by a key C Combined Header and Detail related by a key Trailing Leading character to be removed from fields e g double quotes SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 8 7 8 Integration Data Mapper Data Map Settings 8 8 Separate Header and Detail related by a key In this host file each header record is followed by one or more detail lines The header and detail lines are related by a key such as an order number e Header and Line Key Column In these fields type the column number that contains the key that links the lines together For example in the example below the Header Key is 1 and the Line Key is 4 Order123 Cons1D456 Address1l A Pieces Product Order las Host File Properties File Type Header Key Col y Column f1 C Separate Header Detail and Trailer Lines C Separate Header and Detail Lines Line Key Column E Separate Header and Detail related by a key Combined Header and Detail related by a key Trailing Leading character to be removed from fields e g double quotes A Combined Header and Detail related by a key In this host file each record contains both header and detail information This type of data is used when product or commodity information does not change for each piece shipped see the example below Order123 Cons789 Ad
288. r a type of package used in rating For example if you are rating using letter rates you may have a package type of LTR Then the user can select letter rates with this code Labels See Chapter 7 Labels for more information on labels Label Setup Use the Label Setup window to define the content and purpose of labels in SendSuite Use one of the many label templates as the basis for labels There are four configured text fields on the labels that can be modified SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Additional Supporting Data Rates Shipment Planning Setup Supporting Data 2 There are four types of labels e Carrier Labels Labels required by the carrier to designate the service e Compliance Labels Labels required by trading partners using EDI standards These are provided by a third party supplier e Billing Labels Labels used for consignee billing e Shipper address Labels Labels used to indicate the origin and destination addresses If desired you can use a different shipper label for each shipper ID See Label Configuration in Chapter 7 for more information Label Selection All of the predefined labels are selected from the Label Selection dialog box There are four different label types that are available Each label type or group has pre defined label IDs that correspond to a carrier consignee trading partner etc See Selecting a Label in Chapter 7 for more informati
289. r truckload shipment For example after you rate a shipment going from Minneapolis to Chicago the distance between those cities will display in the data file This is used for Distance Rated carriers which requires installation of PCMiler software 2 34 SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Supporting Data 2 Additional Division Supporting A Division E Data Division PBMS v Data Description Management Services Record Date 10 04 02 Save Delete Close Use the Division table to optionally maintain a list of your organization s divisions for accounting purposes This field corresponds to the Account in the thin client Dock Hours 15 x Address ID 2080 y Pickup Hours Open Close Wednesday Thursday 07 00 AM 07 00AM 07 00AM 07 00 AM 07 00AM 07 00AM 11 00 AM 10 00PM 10 00PM 10 00PM 10 00PM 10 00PM 10 00PM 06 00 PM Delete Pickup Save Delete Close Use the Dock Hours table to maintain pickup and delivery hours of operation for each of your customers or vendors shipping docks Dock hours can be included in route instruction reports SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 2 35 2 Supporting Data Additional Supporting Data Data NOTE Standard NMFC Freight Classes are loaded during installation and should not require modification 2 36 Export Licence e Ex
290. ra tion pay File Edit View Operations XML Fields Tables Map Window Help gt x g ajaj S Ea _ mx Ga Sac O8 2 pe E 9 7 0 Host Fields IPB TMS Fields recordset Map p ing the Esa order Account Fields sa orderid Bill tem Number Sara consignee Bill Number a consid BOL Remarks 2 consname Commodity Code 2 conscompany Container Count consadder Y CstOfGds Sold 2 consadder2 Department a conscity Division a consstate DrylceWeight a conszip gt HazarditemNr shipper Hazardous Qnty eo shippercode Hazardous Unit Height gt Hostltem Nr ltem Frt Desc D LabPack Length LtrCreditRef Nr SY OuterBoxCount Oversized Package Type Pallet Count Price Gds Sold Product Nr RecordDate SY Shipinstructions Shippable Pieces D Volume Weight Width H E vBillTo Ready NUM Z Adding Host Fields New Map When creating a map for the first time the first thing you must do is define the fields on the XML file e You can do this manually by selecting XML Fields gt Add a XML field e If your XML file already exists select XML Fields gt Create XML Tree View This will import the tags from the XML file and display them in the left pane of your window Note that if your XML file contains multiple records SendSuite will import each parent tag and display it in the tree You need only one parent tag record so delete any extras by clicking on the t
291. rator Guide Tools 5 User Properties Dialog Box Permissions Tab Feature Deseripton Aplies o SupportDataGeograph SupportDataLabel Selection SupportDataLabelSetup SupportDataManifest Configuration SupportDataManifest Configuration cont SupportDataProduct SupportDataProNumbers SupportDataTariffSetup CustomizeReport ShipmentProcess Operation SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide The Geograph table contains the geographic Admin coordinates for all zip codes in the United States The Distance window uses this information to calculate the distance based rates If you plan to use the distance based rates to Canada and Mexico you will need to manually enter the geographic coordinates here first This feature is located in the Supporting Data Module Use the Label Selection window to assign how labels will be used You can assign carrier compliance billing and shipper labels This feature is located in the Supporting Data Module Use the Label Setup window to define the content and purpose of labels in SendSuite Use one of SendSuite s many label templates as the basis for labels This feature is located in the Supporting Data Module Use this feature to make required settings for carrier manifests You can make different settings for each shipper The Manifest Setup window consists of two tabs O Configuration tao This tab contains a separate configuration tab for par
292. rmine the PRO number at the time of shipment for example if you use labels or the PRO number is given to you by the truck driver select Prompt for PRO numbers You may save the record at this point do not complete the rest of the fields Type or select the block number you will be using in the Block in Use field Type the first number in the Beginning field Type the last number you were given in the Ending field Type the next number you will use in the Current field SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Supporting Data 2 Setting Up 9 If you want SendSuite to warn you when you are getting low on numbers PRO Numbers type the warning number in the Warning field and Tracking 10 In the Roll Over field select an option that will tell SendSuite what to do when it reaches the ending number in that block Numbers l e Roll over to other block When the last number is used SendSuite will start using the numbers in the other block e Roll over and reset When used for Block 2 SendSuite will notify you that you have depleted your numbers in both blocks If you input new numbers in Block 1 SendSuite will automatically roll over and start using those numbers Start over at block s beginning When the last number is used SendSuite will go back and start from the beginning number SendSuite will re use the numbers in the block e Stop When the last number is used SendSuite will alert you that
293. roperties XML In elsewhere in this chapter The differences are noted below Qualifier Properties This will always be disabled for data going out of SendsSuite Identifies the key for the parent node You must identify the primary key for each parent node This maintains system integrity when sending data out of SendsSuite If you do not make a selection then SendSuite will not send data out correctly Pad field before writing it out Using these radio dial buttons you can add characters to the left or the right of the data you are sending back to the host For example if SendSuite is sending back Dave but the host system expects 10 characters you can pad right so SendSuite actually sends back Dave SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 8 53 8 Integration XML Out To define the SendSuite Shipping field properties left click on the SendSuite Integration Shipping field then right click on the field name Select Field Properties from the popup menu SendSuite Field Properties x 7 7 File Edit Record Help aaa al ml te alr or laza 2 Table Name ftolShipmentHeader Field Type SQL_TIMESTAMP Field Name ScheduledShipDate Field Length e Default Label Bchid Ship Date Field is Required I Default Value TODAY Roll Up item I Translation Type y Table Name This identifies the SendSuite table that this is on Field Name This identified the field name
294. roup ID Add only Header Record C Disregard Header Record F Add Detail Line to database table F Rollup Line Rem by Commodity Code or by Product M Continue to read if file format is incorrect M Skip record if record would be added to the conflict table Locked Record Dehavior Skip Record C Promptuser Wan e seconds OK Cancel Holp Views From the drop down select the type of data you will bring into SendSuite The selection you make determines the database tables and fields you can map to Once you make a selection and close the setting window you cannot change your selection Shipment In This views tolCommodity tblShipmentLine vCarrier tblAddress tolFreightClass User Fields vConsignee tolAddress will allow you to map data to the following tables or tolPayorAcct vAltShipper tolAddress vShipFor tblAddress tolShipmentHeader vBillTo tolAddress vShipper tolAddress Supporting Data This will allow you to map data to the following tables or views tolCommodity t t blPayorAcct vDC tblAddress tolPackResourceType vConsignee tblAddress tblCountry blProduct vintermediate tblAddress tolDepartment User Fields vRemitTo toblAddress vAgent tblAddress vShipFor tolAddress tolExportLicense vAltShipper vShipper tolAddress tolAddress tolFreightClass vBillTo tolAddress vSoldTo tblAddress ibIHTS vCarrier tblAddress SSCS SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite
295. rring function based on a schedule you set up There are three steps to setting up the Task Scheduler 1 Create a task group 2 Add tasks to the group 3 Setup the schedule In order to run the Task Scheduler a Windows user must be logged on the computer and a SendSuite Shipping user must be logged on to SendSuite Shipping The Task Scheduler must be launched from the Tools module in SendsSuite Shipping If the Administrative Workstation is shut down and restarted you must manually restart the Task Scheduler See Start the Task Scheduler in the next section in this chapter SendSuite Shipping can run the following operations from the Task Scheduler Feature WhatitDoss Airborne Auto Update Uses FTP to data obtain You must have an NOTE Airborne is no updates from the carrier agreement with the longer supported and carrier The connection has been replaced by requires a username and DHL password for the carrier s site Screen configured with batch e mail notification script assigned Batch Email Notification Runs a script specified in the task setup to send e mail notification in a batch This task makes services available only if they are Carrier Service Description Branding enabled for Shipper s account You must have a Data Mapper integration map set up Data Mapper Runs a Data Mapper integration script See Data Mapper in Chapter 8 Download Bulk POD Downloads and Files processes Bul
296. rt Read Bol Remark Append Read Linked Account Set Reads the BOL remarks from the Remarks table using the Remark ID This appends together all of the remarks to the BOL Remarks field based on the BOL Remarks code Populates the account sub account sub sub account field based on the account set ID for the shipment Read Linked Populates the fields on vAltShipper with values AltShipper from tblAddress based on the AltShipperlD SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 3 35 3 Shipping Screens Read Linked BillTo Populates the fields on vBillTo with values from Processing Events tolAddress eases on the sus Read Linked Carrier Populates the fields on vCarrier with values from tolAddress based on the CarrierlD Read Linked Populates the fields on vConsignee with values Consignee from tblAddress based on the ConsigneelD Read Linked ShipFor Populates the fields on vShipFor with values from tolAddress based on the ShipForlD Read Linked Shipper Populates the fields on vShipper with values from tolAddress based on the ShipperlD Read Package Populates package dimensions fields based on Attributes what the user selects in the Package Attribute ID field Read Shipment Re populates data in the pTable with values saved in the database For example if you search for a saved shipment change information on the screen then change your mind and want to go back to the original data then this read inform
297. rt 6 01 update version 6 20 Application Call 32 bit mode Operating Customer Win XP SP3 Win XP SP3 Win XP SP3 Win XP SP3 System Support Win 2003 SP2 Win 2003 SP2 Win 2003 SP2 Win 2003 SP2 R2 Win 2008 SP2 Win 72 64 bit mode Win 2008 SP2 Win 2008 R2 Windows 7 Database Call SQL 2000 SQL 2000 SQL 2000 32 bit mode anal SQL 2005 SQL 2005 SQL 2005 SQL 2000 SQL 2005 SQL 2005 SQL 2005 Express SQL 2005 SP3 Express Express SQL 2008 32 Bit SQL 2008 SP1 Only 64 bit mode SQL 2008 SP1 SQL 2008 R2 RTM Upgrading to Call Supported Supported Supported SendSuite Customer Shipping Support Version 6 50 Only for Admin Workstation and Thin Client Workstation SendSuite Shipping 6 50 will be the last version to support SQL Server 2000 c Customers upgrading from Sendsuite 6 20 6 21 must also execute Carrier Feature Setup from the SendSuite Shippping 6 5 menu to complete the upgrade to SendSuite 6 50 This is not required for customers upgrading from SendSuite 6 25 O y B 2 SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide SendSuite Desktop Compatibility Version Compatibility B SendSuite SendSuite Shipping SP4 a20 no mos mos No No No No No No 5 00 Nor noz mos No No No No No No 5 10 Yes__ Yes Yes No 5 25 Yes ves Yes No Yes No No No No No No No No No No No 1 SendSuite Accounting if sub accounts are used 5260 5 50 5 6
298. run To retain a shipper alert message with ODBC integration the message must be part of the data map To manually attach or remove a message from a consignee address record 1 Open the Supporting Data Module from the Control Center 2 Double click Address 3 Click the drop down arrow in the Address ID field and select the consignee 4 Click the Message tab Miere Address ID TEMP Logo A s Signature Address Detail 1 Detail 2 Message Message Alert Setup Process Status E Allow process to continue Address Types C Do NOT allow process to continue ee ype Carrier Bill To Intermediate Consignee l Remit To l Gov t Agency AE l Shipper l Dist Center l Trading Partner Text that appears on the shipping screen l Ship For l Agent Hold At Location Manufacturer Haz Attention Broker Sold To M Seller Benef E Alt Return Addr Carrier Consignee Shipper COD Collection Method v Store No r lype C Consignee Billing No ION MOREIA ZI UPS Location ID n Carrier Accounts Save Delete Close Type your message in the Message Alert Text field 6 fyou want SendSuite to display the message and prevent the shipping operator from further processing the shipment then click the circle next to Do NOT allow process to continue 7 Click Save SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Supporting Data 2 Shipper Alert To delete a shipper alert
299. run using Data Dynamics ActiveReports Your SendSuite Shipping system has a run time version of ActiveReports built into it This interface allows you to create custom documents that can be printed from the SendSuite Shipping screens To set up a custom report for the SendSuite Shipping Workstation 1 Create or convert the new report See below Make sure that you complete the following O Create or modify the data connection using an ActiveX Data Object ADO O Write the error handling script 2 Write a VBScript to run the report See Writing VBScript elsewhere in this chapter 3 Embed the VBScript in a shipping screen as a sub event See Processing Events in Chapter 3 of this guide SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 4 11 4 Reports Creating Custom Reports for the Shipping Workstation Creating a New Thin Client Report 4 12 There are two ways you can create a Thin Client report OO Convert an existing Seagate Crystal Reports document into ActiveReports If you are familiar with Crystal you can create new reports using that application and convert them into ActiveReports See Converting a Crystal Reports Document elsewhere in this chapter C Develop the report from the ground up using the run time version of ActiveReports in SendSuite See Creating a New Report from Scratch elsewhere in this chapter Converting a Crystal Reports Document To convert Crystal Reports to ActiveReports
300. s NOTE Binary Carrier Data is configured during carrier installation Supporting Data 2 UPS Support Files UPS Support Files creates activity logs that are useful in troubleshooting connectivity and transmission issues with UPS communications USPS Electronic Communication Setup Use this screen to configure your FTP information for communicating with the USPS Delivery Confirmation Setup Use Delivery Confirmation Setup to specify the user name and password along with the upload and download paths given by USPS to transmit Delivery Confirmation Data Service Rate Category Setup Use this screen to select Commercial Plus rates for USPS services which are significantly lower than retail rates Before using Commercial Plus rates a shipper must meet certain USPS thresholds or have an existing agreement with the USPS Install RDI Data Use this to update the RDI address data given by the post office via CD through a monthly subscription Tariff Setup Please see Chapter 6 Tariffs for more information on tariff setup Carrier Setup See Carrier Setup in Chapter 6 of this guide for more information Binary Carrier Data A Binary Carrier Data Utilities 3 x File view Record Help alas Mall 2 Expiration Date 99 99 99 Copy Set Dates Save Refresh Delete Do Add Close The Binary Carrier Data Utilities dialog box contains the following tabs Tariff Market Points Interline Service and US Canad
301. s check the box to Loop at Server if there is nothing else happening on the client For example if the master event is designed to process a shipment then print a label then it cannot loop at the server it must return to the client to print the label then go back to the server for the other sub events eMultipack Open Starts a multipack session and creates the number of shipments indicated by the user Generate Auto Bill Generates a new bill number based on the auto Number number setup in the Supporting Data Module Generate Tracking Creates a new tracking or PRO number using the Number setup from the Supporting Data Module Get Weight Default Scale 3 32 Brings in the weight registered by the default scale attached to the system lf there already is a weight assigned to the shipment the scale will not override that value SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Shipping Screens Processing Events NOTE For some carriers such as DHL hazardous materials may also be referred to as dangerous goods Shipping 3 Hazardous Detail Opens a new browser window for EasyShip Platinum Web Intellishop Runs the Intellishop feature You can turn off the calendar that shows the shipping dates by changing the Sub Event Properties International Detail Opens the window where international package Edit detail information can be entered Load Processing Select the ID from the drop down under the
302. s BOLRemarks Routing Export INstructions 10 Loading Pier SH LoadingPier Terminal 11 Type of Move L Service Selects one SH PreSpecService 11a Containerized Yes if SH TotalContainerCount gt 1 Otherwise checks No 12 Pre Carriage by 13 Place of Receipt vShipper ShipperCity by Pre Carrier 3 12 SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Shipping 3 International Document Field SendSuite Shipping Certificate of 14 Exporting Carrier If L Service or Origin SH PreSpecService OCN then uses SH VesselVoyageNr Otherwise uses vCarrier Name 15 Port of Loading SH PortOfExportName Seren mone 16 Foreign Port of Unloading 17 Place of Delivery vUltimateCons ConsCity Prints both On Caer icomwcamaname nn 18 Marks and L ProNumber Prints all in the Numbers IL PackageType following format IL PackagelD ProNumber Package Type PackagelD The lines are rolled up by IL HTSNr and IL CountryMfg 19 Number of The system counts the Packages number of packages and places the total 20 Description of IL HTSDescription Commodities number in this field 21 Gross Weight Sum IL GrossWeight Only one weight will show per package For example if you have two products in one box one of the lines will show a zero 0 weight SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 3 13 DEPARTMENT OF THE TREASURY OMB No 1515 0204 International Documents UNITED ST
303. s part of and in connection with SendSuite Sendsuite is a trademark of Pitney Bowes Inc Other company and product names mentioned herein may be the trademarks of their respective owners Table of Contents SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping 1 SendSuite Shipping Server A e S ce oe ee eee esi ee eRe 1 2 O A se E tence erent nen oases 1 2 LOOO anata mens A eamu data mee aay 1 4 SendSuite Database Ma intEnanCe cccsscccecssseseesseneeeeees 1 5 SOL SENT AJE rae cee ate ee teens een cee 1 6 Creating a Database Maintenance PlaN cooccccconiccon 1 8 Setting Up the System Maintenance Plan 1 9 Setting Up the SendSuite Database Maintenance A A eee 1 13 Editing the Database Maintenance Plan 1 20 Viewing History of the Database Maintenance A ne na ee ere Teer ane Henn mare 1 20 Understanding the Transaction LOQ 1 ccccsssseesseeees 1 21 Backing Up other Critical Information oooo 1 22 Restoring the SendSuite Database ooccccconicocononicconnnonos 1 23 Restoring the SOM alaDas ere ee ee 1 23 2 Supporting Data Consigne Dala E A R ren a ee ar eee eee 2 4 Adding a CONSIQNEE E a a a E A A e 2 4 COUV DU EA e E a 2 6 MO GHIVIIRG County Dala n e a a E E elo 2 7 COMMON DUAA E E re E E cee 2 8 Adding a Commodity COJNE ccccccococccccccooncnnconononononos 2 8 POUC COUI EE o ee tLe ena 2 9 AJANT Qu MOO UGH Fe EE aces E E T E e 2 9 AR
304. s shipments correctly To enter the SCAC code 1 Open the Supporting Data module from the Control Center 2 Open the Carrier amp Labels folder 3 Open the SCAC Codes table AA SCAC Codes E x SCAC Code EsTM gt Carrier Name Eastern Terminal URL fwww easternterminalcom MAC Cert Ver Paper PO MAC Cert Ver EFile PO MAC Cert Ver Label PO Delete Close 4 Click the blank button to make a new record 1 5 Type a three to four letter code for the carrier in all caps in the SCAC Code field 6 Type the carrier s name in the Carrier Name field Optional Type the carrier s URL in the URL field MAC Certification information is not required for custom tariffs 8 Click Save then click Close 9 Close the Carrier amp Labels folder SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Creating a Custom Parcel Tariff from Scratch Address Record Tariffs 6 To create an address record for the carrier 1 2 3 4 oo N p pi 10 11 12 13 14 Open the Supporting Data module from the Control Center Open the Data folder Open the Address table Click the blank button to make a new record T mel x Address ID ESTM m Signature Logo Address Name Eastern Terminal Alias Attention Address Types a V Carrier l Bill To M Intermediate Attn Title l Consignee J RemitTo l Gov t Agency Pee o l Shipper l Dist
305. sage is displayed Successfully created the maintenance plan Setting Up the SendSuite Database Maintenance Plan 1 o OF 2 SN From the Windows Start menu click Programs gt Microsoft SQL Server gt Enterprise Manager Double click Microsoft SQL Servers Double click SQL Server Group Click your PC name to expand the folder Click Management to expand the folder Right click Database Maintenance Plans and select New Maintenance Plan From the Welcome to the Database Maintenance Plan Wizard click Next SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 1 13 1 SendSuite Shipping Server SendSuite Database Maintenance Creating a Database Maintenance Plan eee NOTE If you have made changes click OK and then click Next AAA 1 14 8 Select ConquestDB as the database to be backed up and click Next Database Maintenance Plan Wizard local select Databases select the databases for which to create the maintenance plan C All databases C All system databases master model and msdb C All user databases all databases other than master model and msdb e 3 Cancel Help 9 From the Update Data Optimization Information dialog box deselect all options and click Next Database Maintenance Plan Wizard local Update Data Optimization Information As data and index pages fill updating requires more time Reorganize your data and index pages to improve per
306. screen sub event properties When SendSuite Shipping encounters this sub event it will open the screen selected p Table data will persist so the user loses no information Meter Batch Close This ends a meter batch that is currently open If no meter batch is open then this sub event has no effect Meter Batch Open This starts a batch process on a postage meter The user must select the carrier called POST Meter Batch Status This sub event opens a display window showing the current status of a batch process running on a postage meter Meter Information Presents a screen with your meter s information Meter Simulate Trip This event causes the system to mark a POST only shipment as if it were ran through a postage meter for manifesting purposes This is used when using a disconnected meter with the desire of sending confirmation services electronically through the SendSuite Shipping system for the pieces metered This feature speeds up and standardizes the process of setting the shipment state so the end of day process can include the shipments in the transmission file Meter Trip Postage Posts back to the client postage to set and trip the postage meter The digital dashboard components must be installed for this to work SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 3 33 3 Shipping Shipping Sub Event Description O Screens Meter Undo Simulate This event removes the flags set on the shipment w
307. se Ol a oe wN 6 Type the carrier s name in the Carrier Name field Optional You can add the carrier s URL This information links to the Web Track feature on the shipping screen 8 Optional You can add information for the carrier s MAC certification 9 Optional Select Display Pending Transmission Status Message to enable pending transmission messages on the thin client workstation for this SCAC code only 10 Click Save SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 2 13 2 Supporting Data Shipper Alert Creating a Shipper Alert NOTE There is no override in the shipping screen to allow a ship ment to be processed To process shipments for that consignee you must click the Allow process to continue circle or delete the ship per alert See Deleting a Shipper Alertin Chapter 2 of this guide 2 14 A shipper alert is a message that will appear in the shipping screen when a specific consignee is selected The shipper alert must be part of the consignee address record before the user accesses the record For example if you bring consignee data as part of an ODBC integration script the consignee data is written at the same time the shipment is written Therefore the user is not selecting the consignee record and the shipper alert will not display lf you add a shipper alert to an address record following the instructions below SendSuite will overwrite the alert when a new ODBC script is
308. se options are set for every workstation using the SendSuite Digital Dashboard To select label printing options 1 Open the SendSuite Digital Dashboard 2 Click the Peripheral Setup button 3 Click the Labels tab 4 Click Label Options Label Options E x Number Of Copies Box i Fallet D Container D Consignee Country Name Always Print C Skip On Shipper Country Match Multi piece Numbering C Always Prompt Print All Pieces Starting At 1 5 Inthe Number of Copies box type the number of labels to be printed for each type of packing resource 6 Inthe Consignee Country Name box you can tell SendSuite whether to print the consignee s country on the label e If you want the country to print only if the shipper and consignee are in different countries then select Skip On Shipper Country Match e If you want the country printed on all labels then select Always Print 7 Inthe Multi piece Numbering box specify how you want SendSuite to print labels for multiple piece shipments e If you want SendSuite to ask the user how many labels to print then select Always Prompt e If you want SendSuite to print labels for all shippable pieces including boxes on a pallet then select Print All Pieces Starting At 1 8 Click Save 9 Click Close SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Labels 7 Graphic Labels SendSuite supports the printing of graphic labels v
309. shipment EXAMPLE One instance where you might consider manual rating is for a company that rarely uses LTL services Such a company would probably find it more cost effective to use a manual carrier than purchase an actual LTL tariff There are two major components required for manual rating The first creating a manual tariff below involves modifying a number of settings in the Supporting Data module The second component using VB Scripts involves creating a new script and associating it with a shipping screen See Creating the VB Script elsewhere in this chapter This section provides you with information on e Creating the manual carrier e Creating the VB Scripts needed for manual rating e Associating the scripts with a browser shipping screen e Processing a shipment from the browser using manual rates SendSuite always rates a shipment Therefore in order to manually rate a shipment you must first start with an existing tariff Following this process you will set up an LTL tariff so you can print a bill of lading To create the manual carrier 1 Open the Supporting Data module from the Control Center 2 Open the Carrier amp Labels folder 3 Open the SCAC Codes table 4 Click the blank button to make a new record EJ MA SCAC Codes E x SCAC Code MAN M Carrier Name Manual Carrier MAC Cert Yer Paper MAC Cent Ver EFile MAC Cert Ver Label S E Type MAN in the SCAC Code field
310. sing Events Hold Single Hold Multipack Read Only Required When the New With Hold event is performed this data will remain on the new shipment When the New Shipment event is performed during a multipack session this data will appear on the new shipment in the multipack This prevents the user from adding or deleting information in the field Read only fields on the screen will have a yellow background If this box is checked the user must input data in this field in order to save the shipment The field labels or required fields will appear in red text Shipping 3 Check this box to keep the value from one shipment to the next Check this box to keep the value from one shipment to the next Check this box to make the field read only NOTE Although you can remove the checkmark on some fields it will still be a read only field for example TotalFreight Check this box to make the field a required field NOTE Although you can remove the checkmark on some fields they may still be needed for rating To create a Master Event that will be triggered while working in a shipment processing template 1 Select Setup Shipment Processing from the Setup menu 2 Select the template that will contain the event 3 Click the Events tab 4 Double click on the Processing Events folder icon that will contain the sub event 5 Scroll through the list of Available Sub Events t
311. ss ooccccccconcnccccccononcccononnncnnanonnons 4 11 Creating a New Thin Client R POft cccccsseeseeeee 4 12 Converting a Crystal Reports Document 4 12 Creating a New Report from Scratch 4 14 A vitae E vanahrar ieee E aca ee 4 15 Headers and Footers aaae nae E aa E 4 17 EX A E A rene ees 4 18 Sum F elds E E E E A Sec 4 19 Scripting ON the Repon 2 aera eaa A 4 20 Toolbar BUUONS EA ee E ae en ea ere a 4 21 Modifying Sample Scripts o cocoooooconcoconnnnnos 4 23 NTIDOMUNG TCS CHOI ree O 4 23 WV ETO BB SCIO peo se aera nee Ste ce ee Lesa 4 23 RUNDING NE REDON a EE ll Geen E sal 4 24 ACCOUMMO REDONS E a a a see E T roses 4 25 Account Summary Report AA A n A E E 4 25 Transactions by Account R DOST c1ccccsseceeseeeeneeees 4 26 5 Tools Configuring Groups and Users a aar e E 5 2 Seting WO GlOUDS ele A ee ee 5 2 Senin UO USES fa ee o esc ara 5 4 Setting the User s Defaults ccccccccccssssseeecsssssseeens 5 5 Editing the User Properties and Permissions 5 5 USDA lana 5 6 ACCOUNT ISIOMIEY venture a E teceen aloe E 5 7 Adding a User tO a GrOUP cocccccccccncconcnnonononononononnanos 5 8 Assigning Individual User RIghtS ooocccoooncoo o 5 9 Security PerMiSSIONS aaan A e A E a E A 5 14 Administrative Workstation Permissions 5 14 SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide viii Table of Contents
312. ssing This feature is used to track the history of data imported by keeping a record of all the files imported After SendSuite processes the file it will copy the data into a new file and append the file extension with a numeric value For example if the original file name was Hostdata xml SendSuite will create a new file called Hostdata xml00 SendSuite will create a maximum of 11 00 10 files then it starts over 00 Each time the host file is processed SendSuite will create a new file with the next number in sequence For example if the original file was processed five times you will see the following files Hostdata xml Hostdata xml00 Hostdata xml01 Hostdata xml02 Hostdata xml03 and Hostdata xml04 e Batch Files Type or browse to select an exe com or bat file to process before or after the mapping SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 8 49 8 Integration XML Out Integration XML Map Settings 8 50 e Conditional Logic Script From the drop down you can select a VBScript to run at the time the map is running The script conditional logic will run for each record as it is processed Host Date and Time Format From the drop down you can select a date and time translation Out Tab General Out Views XML LoadOut y l Selection Criteria For Root Table tblLoad tblLoad LoadiD a xl tblLoad Fields ActualDelDate Get Root Table Field G
313. ssing the only view available Once you make a selection and close the setting window you cannot change your selection e Shipment Processing This will allow you to map data to the following tables or views ProcessMemory tolShipmentLine vBillTo tbICost tbIStop i tblLoad bISwog tolShipmentHeader vAltShipper vShipFor Shipper SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 8 29 8 Integration ODBC Integration in SendSuite Shipping ODBC Toolbar NOTE Optimization is not recommended Running optimization removes fields from the view used by integration maps If any of the fields you remove are needed by other maps they will not be available Adding the Host Tables NOTE If SendSuite does not read the host tables then the ODBC driver does not support this feature The table names will have be added manually in this case 8 30 There is an additional toolbar that can be used with the ODBC mapping feature in SendSuite To add the toolbar to the screen select View gt ODBC Data Exchange Toolbar You can move the toolbar anywhere on the screen including it next to the standard integration toolbar ODBC Data Exchange Properties This opens the Data Exchange Properties window Add Host Tables This opens the host database and displays its tables Edit Selection Criteria See below Show SQL Statement See below Execute SQL Statement See below Del
314. station 4 11 General Report Process aaar a a A a a a 4 11 Creating a New Thin Client R POft ccccsseseeeeee 4 12 Converting a Crystal Reports Document 4 12 Creating a New Report from Scratch 4 14 UI O A eaeeetoae rms rae cast ener ierd 4 15 Headers and Footers a a a aa a a E a 4 17 E0111 101e TEE eee a T A E ee E T cet SS 4 18 Summary Fields a r es eh ee Bees ee 4 19 Scripting ON the Repor a aa aa a a E 4 20 TOODA BULON a E E re eee ee ee eee 4 21 Modifying Sample Scripts cocooooococcocoooonnos 4 23 IMPO ME SCIO E eee ede eae ner ones ees 4 23 Wilt ViBeSCHOE R AE A en eat ee eee eee 4 23 AUS a a a a a a E a ss hes a a E 4 24 ACCOMM REDONS E a a E A oboe 4 25 ACCOUNT SUNDAY AEDO 2 a E E 4 25 Transactions by Account R DOST 1cccccsececseeeraneeees 4 26 SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 4 1 4 Reports Running SendSuite Shipping contains templates for a number of reports You can run a SendSuite report in the SendSuite format or you can modify the format to suit your needs Shipping To run a report in SendSuite Shipping format Reports 1 Open the Reports module Running a Report 2 Use one of the following methods to open the folder containing the report in SendSuite a Double click the folder name Shipping Format ppng b Click the to the left of the folder 3 Double click the name of the report you want 4 Ifyo
315. t set then the user must use a Shipping Screen with the Account Set field available See Chapter 3 for more information on configuring Shipping Screens System Configuration 2 30 The following information covers the less frequently used features found in the Supporting Data tables This information is presented in the order it appears in the SendSuite Shipping Supporting Data module Supporting Data Selection Z ioj xj El a a Configuration a a TA Configuration _ E Peripheral Setup E E Track Setup eo Data z E Account E Address e Commodity 2 Country be Currency Exchange z Department z Distance 2 Division 2 Dock Hours 2 Esport License z Freight Class 2 Geograph z HTS 2 Letter Of Credit a Mode Code 2 Forts 2 ve Product a Units oe Units Conversion x Auto Numbers iix Number Type Invoice Numbers Auto Number porro Sequence Number Beginning 10000 Ending 99999 Current 110001 o Warning 99990 Reset Monthly Save Close In Auto Numbers one can set the Sequence Number to increment Bill Numbers Invoice Numbers Order Numbers Status Numbers and VICSBOL Numbers The sequence numbers can be set to use a Beginning Ending and Current along with a warning and when to Reset those numbers SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Supporting Data 2 Additional Privacy Statement and Legal Notice Supporting Legal Notice x D
316. t is updated then the updated version of it will appear in the report ActiveX Control Use this tool to insert an ActiveX control These controls allow Internet Explorer to interact with other applications In general these are not necessary for Sendsuite reports Barcode Control f you want to print text in barcode format you must use this tool ADO Data Control In most cases you will use an ActiveX Data Object to connect to the SendSuite database to get information DAO Data Control These controls are not used with SendSuite since the information must be presented on the Thin Client RDO Data Control These controls are not used with SendsSuite since the information must be presented on the Thin Client XML Data Control An alternative to using an ADO connection is to get data from an XML string 4 22 SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Creating Custom Reports for the Shipping Workstation Writing VB Script NOTE The File menu changes when other integration maps are open You must close all maps before importing a map Reports 4 You must call two components on the server in order to run the report You can write your own report or you can modify one provided to you on the server The first component gathers the specific data you are looking for The second component finds the report format and then displays the report on the browser The second component call also crea
317. t it If you do not want to replace the screen that is already in this system choose this option This will not import the screen that is in the adtg file L Overwrite it If you want to replace the screen that is currently in the system then choose this option The screen on the adtg file will replace the one currently in the system C Call it If you want to import the screen but give it a new name then choose this option Type the new name for the screen in the field provided The screen currently in the system will remain in the system 8 Check to make sure your screens imported successfully A message confirming this should appear at the bottom of the screen 9 Click Close By default a user will have access to all screens in the system You can restrict the screens that a user can see therefore controlling what a user can do To identify which screens a user will see when he she logs on see Configuring Groups and Users in Chapter 5 of this guide SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Shipping 3 Single Use You can create shipping screens that allow you to send shipments to one time Recipients recipients The recipient information is created on the fly and stored in the following unique manner e When searching your address book these addresses do not appear e When you delete the shipment these addresses are automatically deleted To create a shipping screen that supports single use reci
318. t na ike ee era Rasen eal ti ree alae tole eine 6 2 AGIOS S AC CONG O pisos E 6 3 TAS CMU Oates e A Oe oes 6 4 E CT VD eri Sea caea a eee ee e a eee 6 4 OAC RBN O earn aa eae nee nace cle ee ee ee 6 5 PETC S o ea eae TT 6 9 Creating a Custom LTL Tariff from Scratch oooco oo 6 11 SCAG A sie eens eee eae gees 6 11 FAO GICSS IAC COMO fare Oe fe ee eaten oe ea eae Me ee ie 6 12 PATHS CLI Dieta Ocn tue E roe anne acd es a ean sere 6 13 EA TO Bie het a teen Benoa ean 6 13 Zone MBN AD eer carers ease eos eee ne een 6 14 ig 2 Ueno O cee ee cree ater a ann ree 6 17 Caro SUD Coen E aac oe ele tee eo eee a eer ek 6 19 TATE ACCES SOTIA hee reece Svar ae te rae eres ee ee 6 23 Tani NDS COCA DS cee ee ee cee oie eee ee 6 26 Caner Sevic Das a knee ee e iS 6 28 E at A ert er ere rent crrer ee 6 30 EU IVINANITUIINS AR 28 Sais oe see eer ee OO eee 6 32 Tariff Accessorial Incompatibility oooooccoconncconncoononooo 6 34 Temporary Tariff Increase ooocccccnicconnniccnnneonnnonannncnnnnonon 6 35 E A A Meret neha edo A A marae aes 6 37 Cope a Camere SCD ease re es eee E 6 37 Create the Carrier Address Record 1ccccsseeeecneeees 6 39 Set Up Carrier PRO Numbers or Tracking Numbers 6 40 Select or Create a Labalan ie a eiea 6 40 Add Carrier to Rate Shop Group and or Routing Instr 6 40 MEN nuaeis ste wat Amarin on enc ae ime teen Paneer anaes 6 41 Creating the Manual Carrier cccccsssscesssses
319. t rete ioe 3 42 Single USE Recipients n ee ee eee 3 43 ANA A 3 45 SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 3 1 3 Shipping E Track Data Tracking Shipments 3 2 You can use SendSuite Shipping to track shipments through the Internet This can be done on a shipment by shipment basis or in a batch mode Follow the instructions below to configure e Track Once configured you can automate the e Track functionality by configuring a task in the Task Scheduler See Task Scheduler on page 5 16 for detailed instructions pertaining to automating the e Track process When you track the delivery status of shipments using e Track SendSuite Shipping updates several fields Specifically it updates tblLoad ActualDelDate This field is compared to tblLoad ScheduledDelDate when the Carrier Performance Analysis reports are run To track a batch of shipments using e Track 1 From the SendSuite Shipping Control Center open the Shipping Module 2 Expand Workstation Configuration and double click E Track Setup The End of Day Package Tracking Setup window appears 5 End Of Day Package Tracking Setup e x EWCF Max Inquiry Nr FEDX Max Inquiry RPS Max Inquiry UPS Today 5 Today 1 2 Clear All Save Close 3 Select the checkboxes in the Selected column for the carriers you want to track 4 Type the Start and End dates for each of the carriers If you specify actual da
320. t will be used to retrieve data b Identify the primary key in each parent node Save the XML Map lf applicable set up the shipping screen to execute this integration using the XML Out This Shipment subevent See Processing Events in Chapter 3 SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide XML Out Integration XML Map Settings NOTE When using XML File Link select an XML document that will serve as a template for all other XML documents Integration 8 The XML Map Settings window appears immediately when you create a new map To modify the settings for an existing map select Map gt Change XML Map Properties XML MAP Settings General In Direction In Out Server XML File Properties Name UPL Browse Edit Save XML file after processing Batch Files Pre executed PO Browse Postexecuted Browse Script y Host Date and Time Format y el coca rte General Tab Direction Sets the way the data will flow e In Data coming into the SendSuite database e Out Data going out of SendSuite to an XML file Server XML File Properties e Name URL required Type the name of the file SendSuite will be sending data to you may also browse for the file see below e Browse Click this button to search for the file you want to use e Edit Click this button to open the file you selected using Notepad Save XML after proce
321. t your SendSuite Shipping DVD into your DVD CD ROM drive Open the SendSuite Control Center and open the Integration module Click File gt Import oe w Navigate to your DVD CD ROM drive and select ascent cons import itg Click Import 6 Click Operations gt Run Data Mapper xl Map Name ZE Default Group ID User Name admin Log e Log errors C Log errors and events Print out log Jv Run in attended mode Will display messages and Dialog Boxes Cancel Help 7 Ensure the Map Name is Ascent Cons Import and click OK SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 8 63 Importing Data 8 After a successful import the Data Mapper Results will display Click OK From Ascent Data Mapper Results Importing Address Data Verifying the Results Open the Address Table in the Supporting Data module All of the Ascent records you imported should now be in SendSuite Shipping s Address Table 8 64 SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Appendix A Supported Peripherals Supported Peripherals in SendSuite Shipping Manuals for PeripheralS oooccccocncoocncicoonnoncncocancnonnnnonannos SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide A Supported Peripherals Supported SendSuite Shipping supports the following peripherals Peripherals in SendSuite Shipping Forms Printers J624 Laser Printer J630 J632 St
322. tabase Maintenance Plan 1 20 Viewing History of the Database Maintenance A e an 1 20 Understanding the Transaction LOJ cccoooncccconciniom 1 21 Backing Up other Critical Information oooo 1 22 Restoring the SendSuite Database occcococcciccnicccnniccnnnonos 1 23 Restoring the SQL DatabasSe cccccooconcnonccccocononenncnnnnos 1 23 SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 1 1 1 SendSuite Shipping Server IIS Settings Time Out 1 2 The SendSuite Shipping workstations connect to the server through Microsoft Internet Information Services IIS Once the internet server has been installed there are several default settings that can be modified Because you do not want users tying up system resources indefinitely IIS will disconnect a user after a period of time if the user has not performed any actions during that time period The default time out setting is 20 minutes Follow the instructions below to change the time out setting A EL RS A A From the Windows Start menu click Settings gt Control Panel Double click Administrative Tools Double click Internet Services Manager Expand the icon for your server Double click on Default Web Site Right click on eQuest and select Properties On the Virtual Directory tab click the Configuration button eQuest Properties oO Ax Virtual Directory Documents Directory Security HTTP
323. te TMS URL http trn1 8 gen bgtl Equest SSL Lo TMS Email Addr JoeShipper abe con v palas en OK Cancel 4 From the Carrier ID drop down select the carrier service shipper combination 5 Make sure the Relative Date checkbox is selected 6 Inthe Scheduled Ship Date fields and Actual Ship Date field type a zero 0 This will manifest for the current day e If you want to run this process after midnight therefore it is the next day then type a negative one 1 in this field 7 Click the SendSuite button to populate the SendSuite URL field e If you are using multiple application servers then manually type the Web address for the main application server in this field 8 optional Type an email address to send a notice once communication is completed 9 Click OK SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Tools 5 Task Scheduler You can run scheduled tasks in SendSuite from the Windows Task Scheduler Use the instructions below to configure the Windows Task Scheduler Running Tasks Creating the Windows Task From Windows To create the Windows task Task Scheduler 1 Create a Task Group See elsewhere in this chapter 2 Click Start gt Settings gt Control Panel 3 Double click Scheduled Tasks 4 Double click Add Scheduled Tasks 5 Click Next Scheduled Task Wizard x This wizard helps you schedule a task for Windows to perform ou select the program you
324. te ID This field is used to select a package attribute type This sets the length height and maximum weight for the current shipment 4 Toggle the following look up options to best suit your needs e D Combo Drop Down Allows you to select information from a drop down menu e Q Quick Lookup Allows you to select information from a list in a pop up window SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 3 45 This Page Intentionally Blank 3 46 SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Reports Running SendSuite Shipping Reports occcococcccccononocoooo 4 2 Running a Report in SendSuite Shipping Format 4 2 Creating and Saving Report Filters oooococoooo 4 2 Creating Custom Reports a aE E EAE AE E E AES 4 4 Selecting a Report to Modify A a e e E 4 4 Modifying the Report Dalta ooooccccoccccccnnccocccccaononanonnns 4 4 Modiivying Data GrOUDS E 2 ee EEE 4 6 Modiiving Total COlUmNS ea ee ene Ea eee 4 7 Saving a Custom NEDO E E E a a E E E 4 7 Importing External ReportS oooocccooncccocccococnononoconannonanononoos 4 8 AVALADO Bala aes ae aes ese E E rae mee 4 8 Current List of Tables and Views Supported 4 8 Ae 4 9 Exporting a Report from Crystal Reports 4 10 Importing the Report into SendSuite Shipping 4 10 Using the als 60 ae arene T remem te nero E 4 10 Creating Custom Reports for the Shipping Work
325. termines the database tables and fields you can map from Once you make a selection and close the setting window you cannot change your selection e Shipment Consolidated Costs This will allow you to map data out from the following tables or views tolLoad tolShipmentHeader tolStop vConsolidatedCosts e Shipment Costs This will allow you to map data out from the following tables or views tolCost tolLoad tolShipmentHeader tolStop e Shipment Out This will allow you to map data out from the following tables or views tblCost toblLoad tolShipmentHeader Update UPLOADED flag By checking this box SendSuite Shipping will add the current date to tb ShipmentHeader Uploaded If Host File exists If the file name you are writing to already exists your must tell SendSuite what to do with the new data e Append This will add the new data to the existing data in the file e Overwrite This will rewrite the file with only the new data The previous data in the file will be lost e Abort Upload This will stop the transfer of data out of SendSuite e Prompt This will notify the user that the file already exists and ask the user which action to perform The user can choose to Overwrite the file Append the file or abort the mapper by clicking the Cancel bution SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 8 11 8 Integration Data Mapper Host File Properties Using
326. tes the format must be MM DD YY Y Y NOTE You can specify a range of actual dates for example 03 01 2005 through 03 14 2006 or you can specify a range of dates that is relative to today s date for example TODAY 15 through TODAY 1 The advantage of using the range of dates that is relative to today s date is that you dont have to update the dates each time you run a batch e Track The word TODAY must be in all caps SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide E Track Tracking Shipments NOTE Within the carrier group if one of the shipment inquiries fails then the whole group fails For example if you selected 10 as the maximum inquiry number for FEDX if one inquiry failed the other 9 would fail as well This is the result of carrier limitations Shipping 3 Click inside the Time Delay for Each Page field that corresponds with one of the selected carriers A drop down arrow appears allowing you to select a delay of 1 to 15 seconds This setting is used to create a delay between each tracking request sent to the specified carrier If you are going to track FEDX Federal Express EWCF Emery or RPS shipments Federal Express Ground Shipments you must also specify the maximum number of inquiries that SendSuite Shipping will send to the carriers websites You must specify this number because the carriers allow multiple inquiries to the web sites at one time Click the Save buiton To l
327. tes a file with an rdf extension in the eQuest Temp directory on the server O pbCQEDataServicehelper clsDBHelper RunSQLReturnRS your SQL statement Null OU poCQEUserRpt clsUserRpt ProcessRPX your report name the record set created by the ServiceHelper the user s session ID Modifying Sample Scripts Three sample scripts have been included with SendSuite Shipping After creating a report you can modify one of these scripts to run your specific report The report name is part of the script so if you created multiple reports you will need multiple scripts one script per report Each script was written for a different report call CO ADO shipmentactivity itg was created for ActiveX Data Objects using a SQL statement O XML shipmentactivityXML itg was created for XML data L Stored Procedures SLI itg was created for ActiveX Data Objects calling a stored procedure These scripts are included in SendSuite Shipping but you will not find them in the Integration module You must first import the script and then modify it Importing the Script To import a script 1 From the Control Center open the Integration module 2 From the File menu select Import 3 Select the map you want to import They are all in the same directory C Documents and Settings All Users Pitney Bowes SendSuite Shipping dat Integration Click the Import button 5 The file is automatically saved however the script name may be dif
328. th the Shipping Screen The user cannot access information for tabs not selected A eConsigneeExpressTemplate l i o Setings Form Name leConsigneeExpress Back Ground Color M Read Only Form Screen Identifer 1002 l Multiple Lines On Default Color Color Processing Tab Display Y Processing V Line Items Y Remarks V Accessorials M Freight Cost Y Address Information Y Carrier SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Shipping Screens Configuring the Appearance of the Shipping Screen Shipping 3 Click the Screen tab then follow the steps listed below to delete add or move fields on the shipment processing screen Delete Fields 1 Click the cursor in the field you want to delete 2 Right click outside the field to display the menu 3 Select Delete Field Add Fields 1 Right click anywhere in the grey area on the Screen tab 2 Select Add Field 3 Double click on the folder icon to open a table that holds the data you want to add 4 Click and drag the table icon of the data you want to add to an empty line on the template Move Fields 1 Select Move Fields from the Options menu to activate the move fields function Notice the Move Fields Active note in red at the bottom of the setup screen Click and drag a field to an empty line on the template 3 Select Move Fields from the Options menu to turn off the move fields function a io a M eae Name
329. the Print button Shipment Form New This prints the Shipment Request Form with the Account accounting fields AccountSetlD AccountID SubAccountID SubSubAccountID Split Accounting This event displays a window for the currently Costs selected shipment allowing the user to split charges across multiple accounts This process can only be used on meter batch meter discrepancy or previously split shipments SWOG Order Opens the default SWOG Edit screen SWOG Order Scan Presents a SWOG screen used to scan related orders for a shipment Each scan is transmitted back to the server The screen is designed for high speed scanning of additional orders that are part of the shipment Consolidates Express package based service Consolidate LTL or Truckload shipments Load numbers screen screen Jumps to the Carrier tab on the Shipping screen Tab Freight Cost Jumps to the Freight Cost tab on the Shipping screen Tab Information Jumps to the Information tab on the Shipping screen Tab Line Items Jumps to the Line Items tab on the Shipping screen Tab Processing Jumps to the Processing tab on the Shipping screen Tab Remarks Jumps to the Remarks tab on the Shipping screen SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 3 37 3 Shipping Screens UnBOL UnAirbill This removes the actual ship date and re saves the shipment This will clear the BOLPrinted Processing Events or AirbillPrinted fields
330. the fields begin by expanding your host records Then expand the Sendsuite table to which you will map the data To map a field click and drag the host field onto the SendSuite Conquest field If you mapped the field successfully the host field icon and the SendSuite field icon change color Also in the SendSuite pane the host field name appears next to the SendSuite field name O x 15 x aa Fie Edit View Operations XML Fields Tables Map Window Help aj sal S aja gt xj ul See Ge 2 gt 21218 Appointment Nr Appt Dellivery ASN Sent Bill Number gt orderid Bill To ID BOL Remarks BOL Rmrks Cde BOLSent BOLStatus BookingNr BrokerlD CAlnwCommisChg CAlnwPackChg CAlnwTransChg Call Tag CarEMailNatify CarNotifyEMaill CarPrintCertOrigin CarrFaxMotify Carrier ID CarrierFilingSED CarrierPrintingComminvoice CarrNotifyEMail2 CarrNotifyEMail3 CarrNotifyEMail4 CarrNotifyEMail5 CarrNotifyPacLewel CClApplicable CClIncludelnwT otal CClRoyalty CClSupGoods Charge Terms D CiDeclStmtRemCode Ready NUM a consignee 2 consid 2 consname 2 conscompany 2 consadder l a consadder2 a conscity a consstate a conszip Esa shipper a shippercode GOSS OSS SOO SSH OOO SOO SOOO OSS OOSOooeoes To define the host field properties left click on the host tag then right click on the tag Select Edit from the popup menu Many of the definitions are them same as the Host Field P
331. this method will verify its basic structure SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Integration 8 XML In When preparing XML Integration in SendSuite you will follow this general set of Integration instructions There is considerable detail when completing these steps so refer to the pages that follow for more detail General From the Control Center open the Integration module Instructions From the File menu select New or click the New button Select XML Data Exchange from the list of file types the click OK For the direction select In Locate the XML file that contains the data coming into SendSuite If applicable identify any batch files that will run with the map If applicable select a conditional logic VBScript that will run with the map en ea A AN a Select the view that will be used this determines the SendSuite tables that can be mapped to or from 9 Define the line item multiple record and locked record behaviors 10 Set the properties of the XML parent tags 11 Set the properties of the XML fields identifying the key fields 12 Map the fields 13 Save the XML Map 14 Execute the map from the Shipping Workstation SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 8 39 8 Integration XML In Integration XML Map Settings 8 40 The XML Map Settings window appears immediately when you create a new map To modify the settings for an existing map select Map
332. tion a Save Delete Close Click the tab for the type of label you are selecting 6 Click the Blank Current Form button Gi Click the drop down arrow in the ID field and select the carrier shipper or trading partner NOTE If your carrier supports multiple 8 If you are selecting a carrier label then click the drop down arrow in the services you must Service field to select the service for the label e g next day ground select a label for each 9 Click the drop down arrow in the Label Name field and select the label rvice add format 10 If you want to use this label only in certain circumstances then click the drop down arrow in the Secondary Selection Field and select the data field you want SendSuite to look at For example you can set up a label that will only be used for collect shipments e Click the drop down arrow in the Secondary Selection Value field and select the specific criteria to apply 11 Click the drop down arrow in the Printer Selection field and select the printer for this label optional If you do not select a printer SendSuite will print the label on your default label printer 12 Click Save Note the Label ID field automatically populates SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 7 5 7 Labels Label Printing Options 7 6 You can tell SendSuite how many copies of a label to print and whether to print the consignee s country on the label The
333. tion click Save Le Build a table of criteria ranges and the associated handling charge You can enter the information directly on the grid or you can click Detail T and enter the information on the Shipper Handling Fee Detail screen Example If the cost of goods is between 1 00 and 49 99 dollars apply an additional 10 00 dollar handling charge If the cost of goods is between 50 00 and 99 99 dollars apply a 20 00 dollar handling charge Field Definitions Goto Tag Identifies this location as the start of a subset of handling rules Criteria Identifies which shipment information will be used to make comparisons for handling decisions For example COST OF GOODS Used to further specify information about the criteria for weight types Low Value Low comparison value for range based criteria or exact match for text criteria High Value High comparison value for range based criteria only Defines an action that is to be performed if the criterion evaluates to true This may be used to calculate a handling charge or to skip to a section defined by a TAG For example Flat Amount Parameter This is a flat amount or percentage used to compute the handling charge or a TAG to refine the handling instructions 8 Click Save to save any entries or changes you have made SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 2 17 2 Supporting Data Setting Up PRO Numbers and Tracking Numbers NOTE If SendSuite gener
334. tion determines what SendSuite tables you can view It also will determine where the script can be used For example if you choose XML Shipmeniln you will not be able to use this script in the Shipment Processing module Once you start typing your script you will disable this field Once you save the script you will not be able to change this field Language The default is Visual Basic Script The field is not enabled so you cannot change this 8 60 SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Integration 8 Conditional You write your script in the large text box You can write your script freehand you Logic Scripting can copy a script from another application such as Notepad It is important that you use the SendSuite field names as they have been defined for scripting lf you are unfamiliar with the SendSuite field names you can insert them by selecting them from the tables in the right pane of your window Writing a Script A Group AE S i lgj x an PRE vew Operators Window Hap _ Haaj e muje lt ml Flee GAY 2 gt S ll bin Ecce 4 Sie Satna OL Sins t badors t TotalFreight In the left pane place your cursor where you want the SendSuite field to appear in your script Double click the field name in the right pane Parsing a Script You can use SendSuite tools to validate your script NOTE This utility will only validate the syntax of your VBScript It will
335. tions you must create a separate label format 7 Specify the type of package the label will print for under Print Label For Click the Format File tab A Label Setup System Template Non modifiable 3 ol x Label Name UPSGrdBar y Printer FormatFile Name JE92 UPSGrdBar m45 UPSGrdBar d45 UPSGrdBar 245 Delete Printer Refresh Save Delete Close 9 Review the available printers and their associated files Then click the Data tab A Label Setup System Template Non modifiable 7 aa m x Label Name UPSGrdBar gt Not Specified Not Specified Scheduled Ship Date Not Specified Not Specified Not Specified Bill Number Not Specified Alat Cnhnnnfind Alat Chnnn find Save Delete Close SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 7 3 7 Labels Label 10 Modify as necessary the following fields of the label Configuration Field Number Identifies each field e Part Number Part number of the label Label Setup e Primary Data Primary SendSuite value to be displayed e Operator Defines how the primary data interacts with the alternate data if any e Alternate Data Alternate SendSuite value to be displayed e Data Field Index Defines where on the label the fields print Generally this should not be changed e Text Text appearing before any SendSuite data e Start Defines where on the label th
336. tityEMailS oo QD CanNotityPacLevel CClApplicable oon GY COllncludelnwTotal i CClRoyalty 0 Y CCiSupGoods e Charge TermsiD gt ClDeciSimiRemCode El fumf gt ara shippercode SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 8 45 8 Integration XML In Integration Host Field Properties XML In 8 46 To define the host field properties left click on the host tag then right click on the tag Select Edit from the popup menu XML Field Properties l 3 E Type Character v Cancel XML Node Type ELEMENT Help Width J Precision fo Default Value Qualifier Properties Is a qualifier field Qualifier Value Map this field to Conquest table SHIPMENTHEADER y FT Identifies the key for the parent Hoge Identifies the XML Document Pad Field before writing it out 7 m Prefix and Suffix Strings No padding Prefix C Pad left Padding Character Pad richt Suffix V Strip spaces from field after reading it la Add field asrootnode Tag This field contains the XML tag name Type This field identifies the data type in this field for example character number date or time XML Node Type This identifies what will be found in the XML tag The default value is ELEMENT and that should be used for all fields being mapped into SendSuite For example you can identify the source tag as an Entity Reference however since data from th
337. u want to print the report containing all possible data then click Print 5 Ifyou want to print only selected data then a Type information in the Selection Fields to filter the data See Creating and Saving Report Filters below b Click Print Creating and To create and save report filters Saving Report 1 Click the drop down arrow under Selection Field Filters 2 Click the data you want to limit 3 Type the Beginning Value and Ending Value that SendSuite Shipping should limit the report to PB TMS Reports E 5 x File Edt View Custom Window Help NOTE The keyword Y Repons Voided Shipments TODAY can be used in Pe po ERA values for filters and prin cis Selection ID Voided Shipments Jan 01 May05 Number of Copies ho can supply a range vi Selection Field Beginning Value Ending Value of dates relative to O shipmentaciviy ACualShipDate o po O fosos the current date For a Ea example a Beginning elas Shipments Date of TODAY 7 and A a ustom Po Ending Date of TODAY gt So eee ee Aasna eID Stippentame the previous week 4 b Test Filter Sawe Filter Print Preview Close Ready 5 3 2005 2 49 PM 4 Repeat the steps above for any additional data you want to filter out of the report 5 Click the Save Filter button 4 2 SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Running SendSuite Shipping Reports Creating and Saving Report Filters NOT
338. u will see 1 2 and 3 in the PackagelD field SendSuite determines whether to create a new PackagelD whenever it encounters a change in BillltemNr In the example below the host file contains three lines but only two box IDs However the box IDs are not grouped together so SendSuite creates three PackagelDs because it sees three changes Host Product Number Host Box ID SendSuite Package ID P123 P124 P125 This means that the host file must arrange the data by PackagelD The correct arrangement for this example would be Host Product Number Host Box ID SendSuite Package ID P123 P125 P124 SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Data Mapper Mapping to tblintlLine Integration 8 Shipment Header Map The first map is set up to bring data into tolShipmentHeader and tblShipmentLine The two tables are related by the BillNr field in a one to many relationship You can create multiple records on tb ShipmentHeader When running the second mapper to bring information into tblIntlLine SendSuite will recreate all the tb ShipmentLine necessary To make sure that you do not end up with duplicate records on tblShipmentLine you must set the SendSuite table properties to Replace See SendSuite Table Properties In elsewhere in this chapter You must set a value for tbIShipmentLine HostltemNr You can map up to four number in this field or you can set a default value International Detail Line M
339. ue must be imported literally and not translated the an escape character may precede and follow the value for example 05 21 05 Use the Prefix and Suffix fields to specify these escape characters CO String used to specify Table Alias If you are referring to table aliases instead of the actual table names type the characters that are used to indicate that the table is an alias For example if you are connecting to a table called CustomerTableHeader but you want to refer to it as CH then you may need to type Alias in this field in order to connect to the correct table O Connection String Type any additional connection information in this field For example if you want to set a 3 second timeout on a MS SQL database you can type TIMEOUT 3000 in this field Select Statement Strings The ODBC map will create a SQL Select statement to gather the information it needs You cannot alter the SQL statements SendSuite creates but you can add a statement after the Select and From statements using these fields For example if you want to use a SELECT DISTINCT statement type DISTINCT in this field Host Date and Time Format From the drop down you can select a date and time translation SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide ODBC Integration in SendSuite Shipping Creating a New ODBC Map Integration 8 This map will be used for From the drop down select Shipment Proce
340. uestDB NOTE Both maintenance plans assume the PC running the backups is on 24 by 7 If this is not the case recommended times will need to change The recommended times would be appropriate even if a second shift is run since each task should complete in less than two minutes Change the recommended times only if the database is very large and heavily used SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide SendSuite Database Maintenance Creating a Database Maintenance Plan NOTE This mainte nance plan backs up the system databases SendSuite Shipping Server 1 Setting Up the System Maintenance Plan e You should ensure that there is enough disk space to store the backups generated The amount of disk space needed depends on the present size and estimated future size e The backup should be written to a drive other than the drive that contains the SQL database The default is C MSSQL BACKUP This can be changed to write to another local drive or local tape backup device It is recommended that you keep the default directory name and change the drive letter if necessary e The PC configured to do the backup must be on in order to run the backup scheduled To set up the system maintenance plan 1 From the Windows Start menu click Programs gt Microsoft SQL Server gt Enterprise Manager Double click Microsoft SQL Servers Double click SQL Server Group Click your PC name to expand the folder
341. uired wher aMOnyMous access ls disabled or access ls restricted using NTFS access control lists Digest authentication for Windows domain servers Basic authentication password is sent in clear text Default domain SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Tools 5 User O Single Sign on 3rd Party A third party authentication provider sits Authentication between or the client browser and the thin client The third party single sign on provider authenticates the user and then passes the authenticated user to the application SendSuite Shipping verifies user credentials from the third party provider against the SendSuite Database O Key Exchange This authentication option is used when Pitney Bowes provides hosting services or when SendSuite Shipping is behind the customer s firewall User ids profiles must be established on SendSuite NOTE Call technical Shipping for each user support for assistance a with configuring Single SendSuite Shipping generates a client key for each software instance and Sign on 3rd Party or encrypts and stores the key Each customer is provided with their key to Key Exchange store and use securely 1 800 692 0003 SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 5 39 This Page Intentionally Blank 5 40 SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Tariffs Creating a Custom Parcel Tariff from Scratch o 6 2 SCAC COGE Ren
342. uite processes an ASCII document it renames the document by adding a numeric value to the file extension For example if the original file name was Hostdata txt SendSuite renames the file Hostdata txt00 SendSuite will create a maximum of 11 00 10 files then it starts over 00 Batch Files Type or browse to select an exe com or bat file to process before or after the mapping Conditional Logic Script From the drop down you can select a Conditional Logic script to run at the time the map is running The Conditional Logic script will run for each record as it is processed Host Date and Time Format From the drop down you can select a date and time translation SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 8 5 8 Integration Data Mapper Data Map Settings NOTE When SendSuite imports data into a view the table the view Is based on Is also updated NOTE If you need to map to tblintlLine for international shipments see Mapping to tblIntlLine elsewhere in this chapter 8 6 In Tab Romarks General 1n z Host Fin Proporhts File Type C Seporote Header Detall and Trailer Unes C Seporate Header ond Detail Lines Seporote Header ond Detail related by a key C Combined Meader and Detail related by a key Trollina Leading character to be removed trom fields No line item response mode Header Key Column fi Line Key Column i e g double quotes Default G
343. ule Advanced QUery ccooooncccccconncicoconononcnnnos 5 19 lask o chedule rn a E A E a eee ee eed 5 20 AV ANGDIC TASK a R E E e E E 5 20 Create a Task GrOUD ire o E e A o 5 23 Add a Task to the Grou a E e a E A 5 24 Schedule When Task Groups Will Run 5 25 Start the Task Scheduler aa a a A a 5 26 MONADA Scheduler T o E a a a et ee 5 26 Terminating the Task Scheduler oooooooocccccocnccconoccnonconooo 5 27 Setting Up Purge ShipMeM ccoooccccccoconicoconononoconanonnnonos 5 27 Small Package Manifest SetUp ccoooooncccccocnnonncnoononnnnnos 5 28 Creating the Windows TaSK ooococccccnninccococinncooonon 5 29 Running Tasks From Windows Task Scheduler 5 29 Testing PETAK a E lt suey sees IF Purging Database Records cccoconccccoconcnncccnonecononocanonnonanos 5 34 Prge Fo aturo WE E T E ieee Minn a a a 5 34 mpy CUSIOMeErn Dla E eno A ee esc 5 36 CUSTOMIZE E E A E E cd 5 36 A O O 5 36 User Authentication E Salus BUN noe ta eon 5 37 SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 5 1 5 Tools Configuring Configuring groups and users will establish levels of security in SendSuite Groups and Shipping To prompt the user to login you must enable security To do so verify that Security Enabled ON is selected under the Security menu in the Tools Users module Setting Up Groups TO Setup a group 1 Select the Tools module from the Control Center 2 Select Users Groups from the Secur
344. uled backup to occur Database f To verify if SQL Server Agent is running perform the following steps Maintenance d ies a 1 From the Windows Start menu click Programs gt Microsoft SQL Server gt SQL Server Agent Enterprise Manager Double click Microsoft SQL Servers Double click SQL Server Group Click your PC name to expand the folder Click Management to expand the folder Right click on SQL Server Agent Verify the Start option is selected The arrow displays in green when the SQL Server Agent is running eS oS A Right click on SQL Server Agent and select Properties 9 Click the Advanced tab 10 Check the box next to Auto restart SQL Server Agent if it stops unexpectedly SQL Server Agent Properties local a E E x General Advanced Alert System Job System Connection Restart services i Auto restart SOL Server if it stops unexpectedly OePEr ACE AT IT IT SIONS UNexpecie Ol SOL Server event forwarding F Forward events to a different server Sener T Events f Unhandled events O All events event has severity of or akowe 001 Miscellaneous System Information Idle CPU condition I The computer is idle when Average CPU usage falls below And remains below this levelfor seconds Cancel Apply Help 1 6 SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide SendSuite Shipping Server 1 SendSuite 11 Click OK Database 12 You will be pro
345. w Recoro line AA AS NOTE Pitney Bowes recommends that you use the carrier s SCAC code followed by a number for the tariff revision For example if Joe s Delivery s SCAC is JOES then type JOESO1 as the Tariff Revision ID AAA A NOTE If the carrier provides multiple services you must set up a separate tariff for each service EAN sa 6 4 To set up a carrier s tariff 1 oS Open the Supporting Data module from the Control Center Open the Carrier amp Labels folder Open the Rates folder Double click Tariff Setup to display the Tariff Setup window Complete the instructions in the sections that follow to enter the correct data on the following tabs e Tariff Header tab e Zone RBN tab e Rates tab Tariff Header Tab Under the Tariff Header tab of the Tariff Setup window 1 Scroll to the bottom of the list of tariffs in the Tariff Header tab Click anywhere in the last empty line which is marked with a in the far left gray column Click the Details button et Tariff Details Rate Data Source MAA C Class Rates table C Binary package Z tariffs C Distance Rates table C CZAR C UPS CWT hundredweight C FEDX HYT hundredweight oa C AIRB HYT heavyweight C FedEx On Site Server C Emery Rates Server C AIRB Ground CWT C CSI Rates Server Zone RBN Data Source Zone RBN built into tariff C ZIP to Zone ZIP to Zone ID Zone index l STMGRD
346. without applying a charge to them SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Labels SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide EQD CMC ORNOURAN OM 2 stanton ete nes eet edn mae ere 7 2 kaper SetU TE a dE ic e Doa 7 2 SOICCHMO a Lapel Aree se cree ase A meee eee AA E a 7 5 EAU DI DHOMS state tanneries asta ae ache ons 7 6 Graphie Labeloa a E are aed eee eee 7 7 Setting the Windows FONT SIZC 1 cccccsseeeeeensneeeessanees 7 7 Graphic Label File Information oocccccccccnnoccononononoo 7 8 1 7 Labels Label Configuration Label Setup 7 2 Label configuration is done in the Supporting Data module The label definitions that come with the software cannot be changed or deleted Custom labels can be created by copying the pre defined label formats and then making changes to the copy The SendSuite Client Server Edition comes pre defined and loaded with label formats and definitions for three general types or groupings of labels e Carrier labels required by the carrier to designate the service Labels are provided for all of the carriers that are supported that require a tracking address label e Billing labels used for consignee billing e Shipper labels used to indicate the origin and destination addresses The shipper label is the only group that does not come with pre defined labels This label group is for custom shipper labels or printing duplicat
347. would give your report a new run a standard SendSuite report See Running SendSuite Reports on page and unique name 4 2 for instructions on how to apply filters SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 4 7 4 Reports Importing External Reports Availability of Data 4 8 The standard reports for SendSuite were developed using Seagate Crystal Reports You may use Crystal Reports to create your own reports with data from the SendSuite database Those reports can be run from Crystal in any manner you choose You can get data from any SendSuite table If you want to import a Crystal report into SendSuite so it can be run in the SendSuite Reports module or from the SendSuite Task Scheduler then you must follow the guidelines in this section NOTE The reports you create in this manner can only be run from an Administrative Workstation If you want to run a report from the Shipping Workstation please see Creating Custom Reports for the Shipping Workstation on page 4 11 When running a report the SendSuite component looks for data from a limited set of tables and views If you design a report that uses a table or view that is not supported the report will not print in SendSuite Current List of Tables and Views Supported To view the latest list of tables and views supported follow these steps 1 Open the Microsoft SQL Server Query Analyzer 2 Run the following query USE ConquestDB SELECT DataSourceName FR
348. write the file with only the new data The previous data in the file will be lost e Abort Upload This will stop the transfer of data out of SendSuite e Merge This will add the new data to the existing data in the file Update UPLOADED flag By selecting this box SendSuite will add the current date to tb ShipmentHeader Uploaded PB TMS Integration XML Test XML mel x x Host Fields IPB TMS Fields recordset Esa order a orderid Esa consignee 23 consid a consname 2 conscompany a consadderl 2 consadder2 a conscity 2 consstate a conszip Ea shipper eo shippercode Bill tem Number Bill Number BOL Remarks Commodity Code Container Count Cst Of Gds Sold Department Division DrylceV eight HazarditemNr Hazardous Qnty Hazardous Unit Height Host Item Nr ltem Frt Desc D LabPack Length LtrCreditRef Nr OuterBoxCount Oversized Package Type Pallet Count Price Gds Sold Product Nr RecordDate Shiplnstructions Shippable Pieces D Volume Weight Width EZ vBillTo Ready NUM A voca a Adding Host Fields New Map When creating a map for the first time the first thing you must do is define the fields on the XML file e You can do this manually by selecting XML Fields gt Add a XML field e If your XML file already exists select XML Fields gt Create XML Tree View This will import the tags from the XML file and display the
349. you have used the last number and will not allow you to process another shipment for that carrier until new numbers are input 11 Click the Save button 12 Click the Close button SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide 2 19 2 Supporting Data Rate Shop Groups Creating Rate Shop Groups NOTE It is a good idea to describe your rate shop group for future reference Including a description of the logic used to create the group will be helpful for others NOTE Using the Don t Use field gives you the flexibility of changing the rate shop group quickly in the future If you decide to change the makeup of your rate shop group you can simply check the boxes under Don t Use instead of having to insert or delete lines 2 20 Rate shop grouping allows you to specify a set of carriers or carrier services to be used in the rating process You can also add a drop down list of rate shop groups to your shipping template Rate shop groups can also be used with routing instructions associated with a shipper or consignee To create rate shop groups 1 Open the Supporting Data module from the Control Center 2 Double click the Shipment Planning Setup folder 3 Double click Rate Shop Group Rate shop Grow lol Rate Shop Group ID Ground Description Small Package Ground Carriers gt Carrier ID Service Charge Terms Penalty Penalty Direct Only Don t Use 2 Insert line De
350. you must cut and paste the item you cannot drag from one section to another Cursor Use this tool when you want to select an existing ls item on the report Label This tool creates a text field on the report Use this for report titles and field labels Once you have placed the field on the report you can modify the format using the Property Toolbox For example you can modify the font by selecting the ellipsis Text Box Use this tool to create the fields on the report for your data Before you use this tool you need to define the date on your report See Defining Data elsewhere in this chapter You can create the text box on the design window and then select the DataField in the Property Toolbox You also can create a list of fields on the screen and then drag and drop the fields To view the list of available data fields click the View menu and then select Explorer If you do not see your fields click the refresh button Image Use this to place a graphic on the report This can include logos It also can include a signature that you have saved as a graphic You can use various bitmap image types such as omp gif and jpg Line and Shape Use these tools to draw lines or boxes on the screen The can be used to create borders around text or to separate sections or fields You can create a border around a text field by using the Format menu Select the field you want to border then select the Format menu th
351. your report using the vertical toolbar on the left side of the design window For a definition of the buttons see Toolbar Buttons elsewhere in this chapter 6 Save the report You must save the report in the following directory C Program Files pbTranscape Conquesit rpx 7 Write the VBScript to run the report See Writing VBScript elsewhere in this chapter SVTS9117 Rev J SendSuite Shipping Administrator Guide Creating Custom Reports for the Shipping Workstation Creating a New Thin Client Report NOTE A pre configured DSN is installed on the server ppSQLData UserlD ConquestUser password transcape retrieves all the data that s needed Reports 4 Defining Data Although ActiveReports is designed to use several different data types SendSuite will only work with ActiveX and XML When designing the report you must use one or the other of these data objects ADO ML For reports on SendSuite Shipping data ADO is all that is needed To create the database connection 1 Click the ADO button on the tool bar 2 Inthe detail area of the design window click and drag to create the ADO connection you do not need to be precise when creating the ADO connection since the box resizes itself to the same size as the icon 3 Use the Property Toolbox on the right side of the window OR Right click the ADO object and select Properties to open the Properties Dialog Box Design MO E

SendSuite® Shipping - Pitney Bowes User Forum

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

SendSuite&reg; Shipping - Pitney Bowes User Forum

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

SendSuite® Shipping - Pitney Bowes User Forum